Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
P802 D902
1 3
(PRIMARY)
D904
TO N802 2
GND1
D905
C903
470uF 25V
%%%
L901
2 1
GND1
X901
TO AMP BD
GND1
N L X902
L
R902
10K 1/4W %%%
GND1
Q901
EU ONLY
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety
WARNING SEE NOTE WARNING SEE NOTE
US:3.0A EU:1.6AL 250v 250V
X904
F901
JP902
components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
P802 D902
1 3
(PRIMARY)
D904
TO N802 2
GND1
D905
C903
470uF 25V
%%%
L901
2 1
GND1
X901
TO AMP BD
GND1
N L X902
L
R902
10K 1/4W %%%
GND1
Q901
EU ONLY
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety
WARNING SEE NOTE WARNING SEE NOTE
US:3.0A EU:1.6AL 250v 250V
X904
F901
JP902
components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
ALIGNMENT INDEX
Alignment Index
Electrical Characteristics.
Complete Pre-Aligned Tuner Available Under Part Number: 257177
Adjust Point.
Electrical Characteristics.
Complete Pre-Aligned Tuner Available Under Part Number: 257177
Adjust Point.
1. Send a FM IF signal through a 1nF capacitor series with a 10K resisitor to TP004 (Pin 39 of U1). 2. Detect the IF signal output at TP009 (Pin 10 of U1) through a 4.7 uF capacitor. 3. Align TF006 to obtain a clear display on the osilloscope without interference. 4. Ensure that the curve is not staturated. 5. Tune the set to 98.10MHz. 6. Apply an unmodulated mono RF signal at 98.10MHz with a RF input level of 0.1uF. 7. Connect a frequency counter to TP003 (Pin 33 of IC001) through a 0.1uF capacitor. 8. Check TP003 and align TF006 to get 10.7MHz 10KHz.
Oscilloscope
1. Set the frequency to 87.5MHz. Adjust FM OSC coil (L004) to obtain 1.0 - 1.05V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 108.10MHz. Adjust CV002 to obtain 7.00.5 at TP002. 3. Repeat the above procedure until the band coverage is within the specified VT voltage. 4. Feed a FM RF signal to a matching balanced pad of 50 ohm - 75 ohm at TP001 and RFGND. 5. Detect signal from TP007/008 through the following circuit shown in figure 3 (See Page 3-2). 6. Set frequency to 90.10MHz and adjust L003 until maximum amplitude is reached. 7. Set frequency to 106.10MHz and adjust trimmer CV001 until maximum amplitude is reached. 8. Tune back to 90.10MHz to check for any mistracking. Tune back to 106.10MHz, as well, to check for any mistracking. 9. Check the amplitude of 98.10MHz for equal sensitivity.
IN
OUT
Fig. 1
FM IF Alignments
10.80
10.70 10.60
Fig. 2
FM IF Alignments
3-1
RS2622 ALIGNMENTS
Oscilloscope Tuner TP-001 1.00V DC Voltmeter TP-009G TP-002 TP-001G 4.7uF TP-007/008 TP-009G FIGURE 3 IN OUT
3-2
RS2622 ALIGNMENTS
FM Stereo Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: TP001 TP001G Output: TP005 TP010G RFGND DGND
1. Remove VT probe during search. Apply an unmodulated mono RF signal at 98.10MHz with RF input level of 1mV. 2. Search to 98.10MHz. 3. Connect a frequency counter to TP005 (Pin 24 of IC001), short TP010 (Pin27 of IC001) to ground TP010G (Pin 26 of IC001) and across a 10K resistor from TP005 to GND. 4. Check TP005 and align RV001 to get 152KHz 1KHz. 5. After the FM stereo alignment, send a stereo signal to the set. Ensure that the Stereo indicator lights up. The signal strength must not be more than 32dB.
Fig. 4
FM Stereo Alignment
3-3
RS2622 ALIGNMENTS
AM Oscillator Alignment (MW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 Tuning Voltage VT: TP002 TP001G (RFGND) TP009G (AGND) TP009G (AGND) AM IF and AFC Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP011 TP006 TP004G
1. Set the frequency to 530KHz. Adjust MW Osc.coil (TF003) to obtain 1.4 0.05V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 1710KHz. Ensure that MW-VT at TP002 is 8.0 1V. AM Oscillator Alignment (LW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 Tuning Voltage VT: TP002 TP001G (RFGND) TP009G (AGND) TP009G (AGND)
1. Set the frequency to 150KHz. Adjust MW Osc.coil (TF003) to obtain 1.51 0.01V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 283KHz. Ensure that MW-VT at TP002 is 4.6 1V.
1. Send an AM IF Signal to TP012 (pin 6 of IC001). 2. Detect the signal out at TP009. 3. Adjust TF005 and TF008 until maximum amplitude is reached. 4. Send an unmodulated RF signal at 1000KHz with RF level of 100mV. 5. Search Up/Down the receiver. It will stop after the signal is aquired. 6. Connect a frequency counter to TP011 (Pin 36 of IC001) through a 1uF capacitor. 7. Check TP011 and align TF007 to get 450KHz 1KHz.
Fig. 5
3-4
RS2622 ALIGNMENTS
AM RF Alignment (MW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 TP009G (AGND)
1. Send a modulated (400Hz) MW RF Signal at 630 KHz with low RF level of 300uV. 2. Detect signal from TP007/TP008 and adjust TF001 until maximum amplitude is reached. AM Oscillator Alignment (LW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 TP009G (AGND)
1. Send a modulated (400Hz) MW RF Signal at 170 KHz with low RF level of 300uV. 2. Detect signal from TP007/TP008 and adjust TF002 until maximum amplitude is reached.
3-5
Play/Record and Playback Head Azimuth Adjustment To adjust the play/record and playback head azimuth screw: 1. Connect two (2) VTVMs and a dual trace scope to the stereo headphone jack (as shown) with a 32 ohm dummy load. (See Figure 1.)
SCOPE
CH1
CH2
VTVM
VTVM
DUMMY LOAD
2. Insert a 6.3 KHz test tape (such as TEAC MTT-113 or equivalent) into the tape mechanism and play it back. 3. While playing back the test tape, slowly turn the azimuth adjusting screw until the amplitude of both channel output waveforms is maximum and in phase. (See Figure 2.) 4. Secure the azimuth screw in place with glue or paint after making the adjustment.
Tape Speed Adjustment 1. Set the function switch to TAPE. 2. Connect a frequency counter with a 32 ohm dummy load to the stereo headphone jack. (See Figure 3.)
FREQUENCY COUNTER
DUMMY LOAD
3. Insert and play back a 3 KHz test tape (TEAC MTT-111 or equivalent) into the tape mechanism. 4. Insert an insulated alignment tool and adjust the tape speed potentiometer (MOTOR) until the frequency counter indicates 2940 Hz to 3090 Hz. Bias Oscillator Frequency and Level Adjustment 1. Set the function switch to TAPE and the record and play tape mechanism to RECORD. 2. Connect a VTVM and frequency counter to test point R/P HEAD. 3. Adjust bias oscillator coil T301 until the frequency counter indicates 60 KHz 2 KHz.(Oscillator voltage is 25V 5V)
TUNER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE Equipment needed: 1. AM Signal generator 2. FM Signal generator 3. DC Voltage meter 4. Oscilloscope 5. Output meter (VTVM) AM Alignment: Use AM S/G and loop antenna Step 1 S/G Frequency 450 KHz (1 KHz 30% mod.) Dial Setting Indicator Adjust 603 KHz Connect T402 oscilloscope or VTVM to speaker jack Low end Connect DC voltage T407 meter to test point Vt and ground Same as step 2 Nil Remarks Adjust for maximum output Adjust until Vt equal to 1.1 0.1V Confirm Vt: 8 0.5V Maximum output Maximum output Offset is less than 3 dB.
3 4 5 6 7
600 KHz (1 KHz 30% mod.) 600 KHz Same as step 1 L404 1400 KHz (1 KHz 30% mod.) 1400 KHz Same as step 1 CT402 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to minimize tracking error 1000 KHz 1000 KHz Same as step 1 Nil (1 KHz 30%mod.)
VTVM
DUMMY LOAD
60 cm
10
Connect FM S/G to ANT inputs (mod 1 KHz 22.5KHz dev.) Step 1 2 3 S/G Frequency 10.7 MHz 87.5 MHz 108 MHz Dial Setting 98.1 MHz 126 dB Low end High end Indicator Connect oscilloscope or VTVM to speaker jack Connect DC Voltage meter to test point Vt and ground Same as step 2 Adjust T403 Remarks The Voltage Between IC401 Pin3 and IC401 Pin22 is 0 10 mV Confirm Vt: 2.2 0.1V Confirm Vt: 8.2 0.3 V
DUMMY LOAD
Figure 6. FM Band/Tracking
11
A1
T403
T408
T409
T301
12
1. Send a FM IF signal through a 1nF capacitor series with a 10K resisitor to TP004 (Pin 39 of U1). 2. Detect the IF signal output at TP009 (Pin 10 of U1) through a 4.7 uF capacitor. 3. Align TF006 to obtain a clear display on the osilloscope without interference. 4. Ensure that the curve is not staturated. 5. Tune the set to 98.10MHz. 6. Apply an unmodulated mono RF signal at 98.10MHz with a RF input level of 0.1uF. 7. Connect a frequency counter to TP003 (Pin 33 of IC001) through a 0.1uF capacitor. 8. Check TP003 and align TF006 to get 10.7MHz 10KHz.
Oscilloscope
1. Set the frequency to 87.5MHz. Adjust FM OSC coil (L004) to obtain 1.0 - 1.05V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 108.10MHz. Adjust CV002 to obtain 7.00.5 at TP002. 3. Repeat the above procedure until the band coverage is within the specified VT voltage. 4. Feed a FM RF signal to a matching balanced pad of 50 ohm - 75 ohm at TP001 and RFGND. 5. Detect signal from TP007/008 through the following circuit shown in figure 3 (See Page 3-2). 6. Set frequency to 90.10MHz and adjust L003 until maximum amplitude is reached. 7. Set frequency to 106.10MHz and adjust trimmer CV001 until maximum amplitude is reached. 8. Tune back to 90.10MHz to check for any mistracking. Tune back to 106.10MHz, as well, to check for any mistracking. 9. Check the amplitude of 98.10MHz for equal sensitivity.
IN
OUT
Fig. 1
FM IF Alignments
10.80
10.70 10.60
Fig. 2
FM IF Alignments
3-1
RS2620 ALIGNMENTS
Oscilloscope Tuner TP-001 1.00V DC Voltmeter TP-009G TP-002 TP-001G 4.7uF TP-007/008 TP-009G FIGURE 3 IN OUT
3-3
RS2620 ALIGNMENTS
FM Stereo Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: TP001 TP001G Output: TP005 TP010G RFGND DGND
1. Remove VT probe during search. Apply an unmodulated mono RF signal at 98.10MHz with RF input level of 1mV. 2. Search to 98.10MHz. 3. Connect a frequency counter to TP005 (Pin 24 of IC001), short TP010 (Pin27 of IC001) to ground TP010G (Pin 26 of IC001) and across a 10K resistor from TP005 to GND. 4. Check TP005 and align RV001 to get 152KHz 1KHz. 5. After the FM stereo alignment, send a stereo signal to the set. Ensure that the Stereo indicator lights up. The signal strength must not be more than 32dB.
Fig. 4
FM Stereo Alignment
3-3
RS2620 ALIGNMENTS
AM Oscillator Alignment (MW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 Tuning Voltage VT: TP002 TP001G (RFGND) TP009G (AGND) TP009G (AGND) AM IF and AFC Alignment Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP011 TP006 TP004G
1. Set the frequency to 530KHz. Adjust MW Osc.coil (TF003) to obtain 1.4 0.05V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 1710KHz. Ensure that MW-VT at TP002 is 8.0 1V. AM Oscillator Alignment (LW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 Tuning Voltage VT: TP002 TP001G (RFGND) TP009G (AGND) TP009G (AGND)
1. Set the frequency to 150KHz. Adjust MW Osc.coil (TF003) to obtain 1.51 0.01V at TP002. 2. Set frequency to 283KHz. Ensure that MW-VT at TP002 is 4.6 1V.
1. Send an AM IF Signal to TP012 (pin 6 of IC001). 2. Detect the signal out at TP009. 3. Adjust TF005 and TF008 until maximum amplitude is reached. 4. Send an unmodulated RF signal at 1000KHz with RF level of 100mV. 5. Search Up/Down the receiver. It will stop after the signal is aquired. 6. Connect a frequency counter to TP011 (Pin 36 of IC001) through a 1uF capacitor. 7. Check TP011 and align TF007 to get 450KHz 1KHz.
Fig. 5
3-4
RS2620 ALIGNMENTS
AM RF Alignment (MW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 TP009G (AGND)
1. Send a modulated (400Hz) MW RF Signal at 630 KHz with low RF level of 300uV. 2. Detect signal from TP007/TP008 and adjust TF001 until maximum amplitude is reached. AM Oscillator Alignment (LW) Test Conditions are as follows: Input: Antenna Loop Output: TP007/008 TP009G (AGND)
1. Send a modulated (400Hz) MW RF Signal at 170 KHz with low RF level of 300uV. 2. Detect signal from TP007/TP008 and adjust TF002 until maximum amplitude is reached.
3-5
RS2622
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A
SCHEMATIC NOTES 1. RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS; K=X1000, Meg=X1,000,000. RESISTORS ARE 1/4W 5%, EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/8W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/16W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. m F, 2. CAPACITANCE VALUES 1.0 AND ABOVE ARE IN pF, VALUES BELOW 1.0 ARE IN EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. VOLTAGE RATING IS 50V EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT. 3. DENOTES CHASSIS GROUND. INDICATES CONNECTION VIA POINT-TO-POINT WIRE. -INDICATES JUMPER WIRE. -INDICATES ZERO OHM CHIP COMPONENT.
ALL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND MANY OTHER SEMICONDUCTORS ARE ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE AND REQUIRE SPECIAL HANDLING TECHNIQUES DESCRIBED UNDER "ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES) DEVICES" IN THE SAFETY AND SERVICING PRECAUTIONS PUBLICATION.
COMPONENTS WITH A ! HAVE SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS IMPORTANT TO SAFETY. BEFORE REPLACING ANY OF THESE COMPONENTS READ CAREFULLY THE PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE IN THIS SERVICE DATA. DO NOT DEGRADE THE SAFETY OF THE SET THROUGH IMPROPER SERVICING.
PAGE 9-1
PAGE 9-1
Features
Fast Read Access Time - 70 ns Dual Voltage Range Operation
Low Voltage Power Supply Range, 3.0V to 3.6V or Standard 5V 10% Supply Range Compatible with JEDEC Standard AT27C010 Low Power CMOS Operation 20 A max. (less than 1 A typical) Standby for VCC = 3.6V 29 mW max. Active at 5 MHz for VCC = 3.6V JEDEC Standard Packages 32-Lead PLCC 32-Lead TSOP (8 x 20 mm) 32-Lead VSOP (8 x 14 mm) High Reliability CMOS Technology 2,000V ESD Protection 200 mA Latchup Immunity Rapid Programming Algorithm - 100 s/byte (typical) CMOS and TTL Compatible Inputs and Outputs JEDEC Standard for LVTTL Integrated Product Identification Code Commercial and Industrial Temperature Ranges
Description
The AT27LV010A is a high performance, low power, low voltage 1,048,576-bit onetime programmable read only memory (OTP EPROM) organized as 128K by 8 bits. It requires only one supply in the range of 3.0V to 3.6V in normal read mode operation, making it ideal for fast, portable systems using battery power. (continued)
Pin Configurations
Pin Name A0 - A16 O0 - O7 CE OE PGM NC Function Addresses Outputs Chip Enable Output Enable Program Strobe No Connect PLCC Top View
A12 A15 A16 VPP VCC PGM NC A11 A9 A8 A13 A14 NC PGM VCC VPP A16 A15 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 O0
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 3 2 1 32 31 30
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
Rev. 0548C10/98
O1 O2 GND O3 O4 O5 O6
Atmels innovative design techniques provide fast speeds that rival 5V parts while keeping the low power consumption of a 3.3V supply. At V CC = 3.0V, any byte can be accessed in less than 70 ns. With a typical power dissipation of only 18 mW at 5 MHz and V C C = 3.3V, the AT27LV010A consumes less than one fifth the power of a standard 5V EPROM. Standby mode supply current is typically less than 1 A at 3.3V. The AT27LV010A is available in industry standard JEDECapproved one-time programmable (OTP) plastic PLCC and TSOP packages. All devices feature two-line control (CE, OE) to give designers the flexibility to prevent bus contention. The AT27LV010A operating with V CC at 3.0V produces TTL level outputs that are compatible with standard TTL logic devices operating at VCC = 5.0V. The device is also capable of standard 5-volt operation making it ideally suited for dual supply range systems or card products that are pluggable in both 3-volt and 5-volt hosts. Atmels AT27LV010A has additional features to ensure high quality and efficient production use. The Rapid Programming Algorithm reduces the time required to program the part and guarantees reliable programming. Programming time is typically only 100 s/byte. The Integrated
Product Identification Code electronically identifies the device and manufacturer. This feature is used by industry standard programming equipment to select the proper programming algorithms and voltages. The AT27LV010A programs exactly the same way as a standard 5V AT27C010 and uses the same programming equipment.
System Considerations
Switching between active and standby conditions via the Chip Enable pin may produce transient voltage excursions. Unless accommodated by the system design, these transients may exceed data sheet limits, resulting in device non-conformance. At a minimum, a 0.1 F high frequency, low inherent inductance, ceramic capacitor should be utilized for each device. This capacitor should be connected between the V CC and Ground terminals of the device, as close to the device as possible. Additionally, to stabilize the supply voltage level on printed circuit boards with large EPROM arrays, a 4.7 F bulk electrolytic capacitor should be utilized, again connected between the VCC and Ground terminals. This capacitor should be positioned as close as possible to the point where the power supply is connected to the array.
Block Diagram
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Temperature Under Bias .................................. -40C to +85C Storage Temperature ..................................... -65C to +125C Voltage on Any Pin with Respect to Ground .........................................-2.0V to +7.0V(1) Voltage on A9 with Respect to Ground ......................................-2.0V to +14.0V(1) VPP Supply Voltage with Respect to Ground .......................................-2.0V to +14.0V(1) Note: 1. Minimum voltage is -0.6V dc which may undershoot to -2.0V for pulses of less than 20 ns. Maximum output pin voltage is VCC + 0.75V dc which may be exceeded if certain precautions are observed (consult application notes) and which may overshoot to +7.0V for pulses of less than 20 ns. *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability
Operating Modes
Mode \ Pin Read
(2) (2)
CE VIL X VIH
(3)
PGM Inhibit
VCC(3)
2. Read, output disable, and standby modes require, 3.0V VCC 3.6V, or 4.5V VCC 5.5V. 3. Refer to Programming Characteristics. Programming modes require VCC = 6.5V. 4. VH = 12.0 0.5V. 5. Two identifier bytes may be selected. All Ai inputs are held low (VIL), except A9 which is set to VH and A0 which is toggled low (VIL) to select the Manufacturers Identification byte and high (VIH) to select the Device Code byte.
VIN = 0V to VCC VOUT = 0V to VCC VPP = VCC ISB1 (CMOS), CE = VCC 0.3V ISB2 (TTL), CE = 2.0 to VCC + 0.5V f = 5 MHz, IOUT = 0 mA, CE = VIL -0.6 2.0 IOL = 2.0 mA IOH = -2.0 mA 2.4
A A A A A mA V V V V
Read/Standby Current
VCC(1) Standby Current VCC Active Current Input Low Voltage Input High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage
VCC = 4.5V to 5.5V ILI ILO IPP1 ISB ICC VIL VIH VOL VOH Notes:
(2)
VIN = 0V to VCC VOUT = 0V to VCC VPP = VCC ISB1 (CMOS), CE = VCC 0.3V ISB2 (TTL), CE = 2.0 to VCC + 0.5V f = 5 MHz, IOUT = 0 mA, CE = VIL -0.6 2.0 IOL = 2.1 mA IOH = -400 A 2.4
A A A A mA mA V V V V
Read/Standby Current
VCC(1) Standby Current VCC Active Current Input Low Voltage Input High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage
1. VCC must be applied simultaneously with or before VPP, and removed simultaneously with or after VPP . 2. VPP may be connected directly to VCC, except during programming. The supply current would then be the sum of ICC and IPP .
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
AC Characteristics for Read Operation
VCC = 3.0V to 3.6V and 4.5V to 5.5V
AT27LV010A -70 Symbol tACC(3) tCE(2) tOE
(2)(3)
Parameter Address to Output Delay CE to Output Delay OE to Output Delay OE or CE High to Output Float, whichever occurred first Output Hold from Address, CE or OE, whichever occurred first
Min
tDF(4)(5)
tOH
ns
Notes:
1. Timing measurement references are 0.8V and 2.0V. Input AC drive levels are 0.45V and 2.4V, unless otherwise specified. 2. OE may be delayed up to tCE - tOE after the falling edge of CE without impact on tCE. 3. OE may be delayed up to tACC - tOE after the address is valid without impact on tACC. 4. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested. 5. Output float is defined as the point when data is no longer driven.
Pin Capacitance
f = 1 MHz, T = 25C(1)
Symbol CIN COUT Note: Typ 4 8 Max 8 12 Units pF pF Conditions VIN = 0V VOUT = 0V
1. Typical values for nominal supply voltage. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested.
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
Programming Waveforms(1)
Notes:
1. 2. 3.
The Input Timing Reference is 0.8V for VIL and 2.0V for VIH. tOE and tDFP are characteristics of the device but must be accommodated by the programmer. When programming the AT27LV010A a 0.1 F capacitor is required across VPP and ground to suppress spurious voltage transients.
DC Programming Characteristics
TA = 25 5C, VCC = 6.5 0.25V, VPP = 13.0 0.25V
Limits Symbol ILI VIL VIH VOL VOH ICC2 IPP2 VID Parameter Input Load Current Input Low Level Input High Level Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage VCC Supply Current (Program and Verify) VPP Supply Current A9 Product Identification Voltage CE = PGM = VIL 11.5 IOL = 2.1 mA IOH = -400 A 2.4 40 20 12.5 Test Conditions VIN = VIL, VIH -0.6 2.0 Min Max 10 0.8 VCC + 0.5 0.4 Units
A
V V V V mA mA V
AC Programming Characteristics
TA = 25 5C, VCC = 6.5 0.25V, VPP = 13.0 0.2V
Limits Symbol tAS tCES tOES tDS tAH tDH tDFP tVPS tVCS tPW tOE tPRT Notes: Parameter Address Setup Time CE Setup Time OE Setup Time Data Setup Time Address Hold Time Data Hold Time OE High to Output Float Delay(2) VPP Setup Time VCC Setup Time PGM Program Pulse Width(3) Data Valid from OE VPP Pulse Rise Time During Programming 1. VCC must be applied simultaneously or before VPP and removed simultaneously or after VPP . 2. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested. Output Float is defined as the point where data is no longer driven see timing diagram. 3. Program Pulse width tolerance is 100 sec 5%. Output Timing Reference Level: 0.8V to 2.0V Input Timing Reference Level: 0.8V to 2.0V Input Rise and Fall Times: (10% to 90%) 20 ns Input Pulse Levels: 0.45V to 2.4V Test Conditions
(1)
Min 2 2 2 2 0 2 0 2 2 95
Max
Units s s s s s s
130
ns s s s ns ns
105 150
50
1. The AT27LV010A has the same Product Identification Code as the AT27C010. Both are programming compatible.
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
Rapid Programming Algorithm
A 100 s PGM pulse width is used to program. The address is set to the first location. VCC is raised to 6.5V and VPP is raised to 13.0V. Each address is first programmed with one 100 s PGM pulse without verification. Then a verification / reprogramming loop is executed for each address. In the event a byte fails to pass verification, up to 10 successive 100 s pulses are applied with a verification after each pulse. If the byte fails to verify after 10 pulses have been applied, the part is considered failed. After the byte verifies properly, the next address is selected until all have been checked. VPP is then lowered to 5.0V and VCC to 5.0V. All bytes are read again and compared with the original data to determine if the device passes or fails.
Ordering Information
tACC (ns) 70 ICC (mA) VCC = 3.6V Active 8 Standby 0.02 Ordering Code AT27LV010A-70JC AT27LV010A-70TC AT27LV010A-70VC AT27LV010A-70JI AT27LV010A-70TI AT27LV010A-70VI AT27LV010A-90JC AT27LV010A-90TC AT27LV010A-90VC AT27LV010A-90JI AT27LV010A-90TI AT27LV010A-90VI AT27LV010A-12JC AT27LV010A-12TC AT27LV010A-12VC AT27LV010A-12JI AT27LV010A-12TI AT27LV010A-12VI AT27LV010A-15JC AT27LV010A-15TC AT27LV010A-15VC AT27LV010A-15JI AT27LV010A-15TI AT27LV010A-15VI Package 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V Operation Range Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C)
0.02
90
0.02
0.02
120
0.02
0.02
150
0.02
0.02
Package Type 32J 32T 32V 32-Lead, Plastic J-Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC) 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (TSOP) (8 x 20 mm) 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (VSOP) (8 x 14 mm)
10
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
Packaging Information
32J, 32-Lead, Plastic J-Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC) Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)
JEDEC STANDARD MS-016 AE
32T, 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (TSOP) Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)*
JEDEC OUTLINE MO-142 BD
.045(1.14) X 45
.025(.635) X 30 - 45 .012(.305) .008(.203) .530(13.5) .490(12.4) .021(.533) .013(.330) .030(.762) .015(.381) .095(2.41) .060(1.52) .140(3.56) .120(3.05)
INDEX MARK
.032(.813) .026(.660)
18.5(.728) 18.3(.720)
20.2(.795) 19.8(.780)
.050(1.27) TYP
0.50(.020) BSC
0.25(.010) 0.15(.006)
1.20(.047) MAX
32V, 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (VSOP) Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)
JEDEC OUTLINE MO-142 BA
INDEX MARK
12.5(.492) 12.3(.484)
14.2(.559) 13.8(.543)
0.50(.020) BSC
0.25(.010) 0.15(.006)
1.20(.047) MAX
11
Atmel Headquarters
Corporate Headquarters
2325 Orchard Parkway San Jose, CA 95131 TEL (408) 441-0311 FAX (408) 487-2600
Atmel Operations
Atmel Colorado Springs
1150 E. Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd. Colorado Springs, CO 80906 TEL (719) 576-3300 FAX (719) 540-1759
Europe
Atmel U.K., Ltd. Coliseum Business Centre Riverside Way Camberley, Surrey GU15 3YL England TEL (44) 1276-686677 FAX (44) 1276-686697
Atmel Rousset
Zone Industrielle 13106 Rousset Cedex, France TEL (33) 4 42 53 60 00 FAX (33) 4 42 53 60 01
Asia
Atmel Asia, Ltd. Room 1219 Chinachem Golden Plaza 77 Mody Road Tsimshatsui East Kowloon, Hong Kong TEL (852) 27219778 FAX (852) 27221369
Japan
Atmel Japan K.K. Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg., 9F 1-24-8 Shinkawa Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033 Japan TEL (81) 3-3523-3551 FAX (81) 3-3523-7581
Fax-on-Demand
North America: 1-(800) 292-8635 International: 1-(408) 441-0732
e-mail
literature@atmel.com
Web Site
http://www.atmel.com
BBS
1-(408) 436-4309
Atmel Corporation 1998. Atmel Cor poration makes no warranty for the use of its products, other than those expressly contained in the Companys standard warranty which is detailed in Atmels Terms and Conditions located on the Companys website. The Company assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in this document, reserves the right to change devices or specifications detailed herein at any time without notice, and does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. No licenses to patents or other intellectual proper ty of Atmel are granted by the Company in connection with the sale of Atmel products, expressly or by implication. Atmels products are not authorized for use as critical components in life suppor t devices or systems. Marks bearing
and/or
are registered trademarks and trademarks of Atmel Corporation. Printed on recycled paper.
0548C10/98/xM
Features
Fast Read Access Time - 70 ns Dual Voltage Range Operation
Low Voltage Power Supply Range, 3.0V to 3.6V or Standard 5V 10% Supply Range Compatible with JEDEC Standard AT27C010 Low Power CMOS Operation 20 A max. (less than 1 A typical) Standby for VCC = 3.6V 29 mW max. Active at 5 MHz for VCC = 3.6V JEDEC Standard Packages 32-Lead PLCC 32-Lead TSOP (8 x 20 mm) 32-Lead VSOP (8 x 14 mm) High Reliability CMOS Technology 2,000V ESD Protection 200 mA Latchup Immunity Rapid Programming Algorithm - 100 s/byte (typical) CMOS and TTL Compatible Inputs and Outputs JEDEC Standard for LVTTL Integrated Product Identification Code Commercial and Industrial Temperature Ranges
Description
The AT27LV010A is a high performance, low power, low voltage 1,048,576-bit onetime programmable read only memory (OTP EPROM) organized as 128K by 8 bits. It requires only one supply in the range of 3.0V to 3.6V in normal read mode operation, making it ideal for fast, portable systems using battery power. (continued)
Pin Configurations
Pin Name A0 - A16 O0 - O7 CE OE PGM NC Function Addresses Outputs Chip Enable Output Enable Program Strobe No Connect PLCC Top View
A12 A15 A16 VPP VCC PGM NC A11 A9 A8 A13 A14 NC PGM VCC VPP A16 A15 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 O0
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 3 2 1 32 31 30
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
Rev. 0548C10/98
O1 O2 GND O3 O4 O5 O6
Atmels innovative design techniques provide fast speeds that rival 5V parts while keeping the low power consumption of a 3.3V supply. At V CC = 3.0V, any byte can be accessed in less than 70 ns. With a typical power dissipation of only 18 mW at 5 MHz and V C C = 3.3V, the AT27LV010A consumes less than one fifth the power of a standard 5V EPROM. Standby mode supply current is typically less than 1 A at 3.3V. The AT27LV010A is available in industry standard JEDECapproved one-time programmable (OTP) plastic PLCC and TSOP packages. All devices feature two-line control (CE, OE) to give designers the flexibility to prevent bus contention. The AT27LV010A operating with V CC at 3.0V produces TTL level outputs that are compatible with standard TTL logic devices operating at VCC = 5.0V. The device is also capable of standard 5-volt operation making it ideally suited for dual supply range systems or card products that are pluggable in both 3-volt and 5-volt hosts. Atmels AT27LV010A has additional features to ensure high quality and efficient production use. The Rapid Programming Algorithm reduces the time required to program the part and guarantees reliable programming. Programming time is typically only 100 s/byte. The Integrated
Product Identification Code electronically identifies the device and manufacturer. This feature is used by industry standard programming equipment to select the proper programming algorithms and voltages. The AT27LV010A programs exactly the same way as a standard 5V AT27C010 and uses the same programming equipment.
System Considerations
Switching between active and standby conditions via the Chip Enable pin may produce transient voltage excursions. Unless accommodated by the system design, these transients may exceed data sheet limits, resulting in device non-conformance. At a minimum, a 0.1 F high frequency, low inherent inductance, ceramic capacitor should be utilized for each device. This capacitor should be connected between the V CC and Ground terminals of the device, as close to the device as possible. Additionally, to stabilize the supply voltage level on printed circuit boards with large EPROM arrays, a 4.7 F bulk electrolytic capacitor should be utilized, again connected between the VCC and Ground terminals. This capacitor should be positioned as close as possible to the point where the power supply is connected to the array.
Block Diagram
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Temperature Under Bias .................................. -40C to +85C Storage Temperature ..................................... -65C to +125C Voltage on Any Pin with Respect to Ground .........................................-2.0V to +7.0V(1) Voltage on A9 with Respect to Ground ......................................-2.0V to +14.0V(1) VPP Supply Voltage with Respect to Ground .......................................-2.0V to +14.0V(1) Note: 1. Minimum voltage is -0.6V dc which may undershoot to -2.0V for pulses of less than 20 ns. Maximum output pin voltage is VCC + 0.75V dc which may be exceeded if certain precautions are observed (consult application notes) and which may overshoot to +7.0V for pulses of less than 20 ns. *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability
Operating Modes
Mode \ Pin Read
(2) (2)
CE VIL X VIH
(3)
PGM Inhibit
VCC(3)
2. Read, output disable, and standby modes require, 3.0V VCC 3.6V, or 4.5V VCC 5.5V. 3. Refer to Programming Characteristics. Programming modes require VCC = 6.5V. 4. VH = 12.0 0.5V. 5. Two identifier bytes may be selected. All Ai inputs are held low (VIL), except A9 which is set to VH and A0 which is toggled low (VIL) to select the Manufacturers Identification byte and high (VIH) to select the Device Code byte.
VIN = 0V to VCC VOUT = 0V to VCC VPP = VCC ISB1 (CMOS), CE = VCC 0.3V ISB2 (TTL), CE = 2.0 to VCC + 0.5V f = 5 MHz, IOUT = 0 mA, CE = VIL -0.6 2.0 IOL = 2.0 mA IOH = -2.0 mA 2.4
A A A A A mA V V V V
Read/Standby Current
VCC(1) Standby Current VCC Active Current Input Low Voltage Input High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage
VCC = 4.5V to 5.5V ILI ILO IPP1 ISB ICC VIL VIH VOL VOH Notes:
(2)
VIN = 0V to VCC VOUT = 0V to VCC VPP = VCC ISB1 (CMOS), CE = VCC 0.3V ISB2 (TTL), CE = 2.0 to VCC + 0.5V f = 5 MHz, IOUT = 0 mA, CE = VIL -0.6 2.0 IOL = 2.1 mA IOH = -400 A 2.4
A A A A mA mA V V V V
Read/Standby Current
VCC(1) Standby Current VCC Active Current Input Low Voltage Input High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage
1. VCC must be applied simultaneously with or before VPP, and removed simultaneously with or after VPP . 2. VPP may be connected directly to VCC, except during programming. The supply current would then be the sum of ICC and IPP .
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
AC Characteristics for Read Operation
VCC = 3.0V to 3.6V and 4.5V to 5.5V
AT27LV010A -70 Symbol tACC(3) tCE(2) tOE
(2)(3)
Parameter Address to Output Delay CE to Output Delay OE to Output Delay OE or CE High to Output Float, whichever occurred first Output Hold from Address, CE or OE, whichever occurred first
Min
tDF(4)(5)
tOH
ns
Notes:
1. Timing measurement references are 0.8V and 2.0V. Input AC drive levels are 0.45V and 2.4V, unless otherwise specified. 2. OE may be delayed up to tCE - tOE after the falling edge of CE without impact on tCE. 3. OE may be delayed up to tACC - tOE after the address is valid without impact on tACC. 4. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested. 5. Output float is defined as the point when data is no longer driven.
Pin Capacitance
f = 1 MHz, T = 25C(1)
Symbol CIN COUT Note: Typ 4 8 Max 8 12 Units pF pF Conditions VIN = 0V VOUT = 0V
1. Typical values for nominal supply voltage. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested.
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
Programming Waveforms(1)
Notes:
1. 2. 3.
The Input Timing Reference is 0.8V for VIL and 2.0V for VIH. tOE and tDFP are characteristics of the device but must be accommodated by the programmer. When programming the AT27LV010A a 0.1 F capacitor is required across VPP and ground to suppress spurious voltage transients.
DC Programming Characteristics
TA = 25 5C, VCC = 6.5 0.25V, VPP = 13.0 0.25V
Limits Symbol ILI VIL VIH VOL VOH ICC2 IPP2 VID Parameter Input Load Current Input Low Level Input High Level Output Low Voltage Output High Voltage VCC Supply Current (Program and Verify) VPP Supply Current A9 Product Identification Voltage CE = PGM = VIL 11.5 IOL = 2.1 mA IOH = -400 A 2.4 40 20 12.5 Test Conditions VIN = VIL, VIH -0.6 2.0 Min Max 10 0.8 VCC + 0.5 0.4 Units
A
V V V V mA mA V
AC Programming Characteristics
TA = 25 5C, VCC = 6.5 0.25V, VPP = 13.0 0.2V
Limits Symbol tAS tCES tOES tDS tAH tDH tDFP tVPS tVCS tPW tOE tPRT Notes: Parameter Address Setup Time CE Setup Time OE Setup Time Data Setup Time Address Hold Time Data Hold Time OE High to Output Float Delay(2) VPP Setup Time VCC Setup Time PGM Program Pulse Width(3) Data Valid from OE VPP Pulse Rise Time During Programming 1. VCC must be applied simultaneously or before VPP and removed simultaneously or after VPP . 2. This parameter is only sampled and is not 100% tested. Output Float is defined as the point where data is no longer driven see timing diagram. 3. Program Pulse width tolerance is 100 sec 5%. Output Timing Reference Level: 0.8V to 2.0V Input Timing Reference Level: 0.8V to 2.0V Input Rise and Fall Times: (10% to 90%) 20 ns Input Pulse Levels: 0.45V to 2.4V Test Conditions
(1)
Min 2 2 2 2 0 2 0 2 2 95
Max
Units s s s s s s
130
ns s s s ns ns
105 150
50
1. The AT27LV010A has the same Product Identification Code as the AT27C010. Both are programming compatible.
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
Rapid Programming Algorithm
A 100 s PGM pulse width is used to program. The address is set to the first location. VCC is raised to 6.5V and VPP is raised to 13.0V. Each address is first programmed with one 100 s PGM pulse without verification. Then a verification / reprogramming loop is executed for each address. In the event a byte fails to pass verification, up to 10 successive 100 s pulses are applied with a verification after each pulse. If the byte fails to verify after 10 pulses have been applied, the part is considered failed. After the byte verifies properly, the next address is selected until all have been checked. VPP is then lowered to 5.0V and VCC to 5.0V. All bytes are read again and compared with the original data to determine if the device passes or fails.
Ordering Information
tACC (ns) 70 ICC (mA) VCC = 3.6V Active 8 Standby 0.02 Ordering Code AT27LV010A-70JC AT27LV010A-70TC AT27LV010A-70VC AT27LV010A-70JI AT27LV010A-70TI AT27LV010A-70VI AT27LV010A-90JC AT27LV010A-90TC AT27LV010A-90VC AT27LV010A-90JI AT27LV010A-90TI AT27LV010A-90VI AT27LV010A-12JC AT27LV010A-12TC AT27LV010A-12VC AT27LV010A-12JI AT27LV010A-12TI AT27LV010A-12VI AT27LV010A-15JC AT27LV010A-15TC AT27LV010A-15VC AT27LV010A-15JI AT27LV010A-15TI AT27LV010A-15VI Package 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V 32J 32T 32V Operation Range Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C) Commercial (0C to 70C) Industrial (-40C to 85C)
0.02
90
0.02
0.02
120
0.02
0.02
150
0.02
0.02
Package Type 32J 32T 32V 32-Lead, Plastic J-Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC) 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (TSOP) (8 x 20 mm) 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (VSOP) (8 x 14 mm)
10
AT27LV010A
AT27LV010A
Packaging Information
32J, 32-Lead, Plastic J-Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC) Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)
JEDEC STANDARD MS-016 AE
32T, 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (TSOP) Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)*
JEDEC OUTLINE MO-142 BD
.045(1.14) X 45
.025(.635) X 30 - 45 .012(.305) .008(.203) .530(13.5) .490(12.4) .021(.533) .013(.330) .030(.762) .015(.381) .095(2.41) .060(1.52) .140(3.56) .120(3.05)
INDEX MARK
.032(.813) .026(.660)
18.5(.728) 18.3(.720)
20.2(.795) 19.8(.780)
.050(1.27) TYP
0.50(.020) BSC
0.25(.010) 0.15(.006)
1.20(.047) MAX
32V, 32-Lead, Plastic Thin Small Outline Package (VSOP) Dimensions in Inches and (Millimeters)
JEDEC OUTLINE MO-142 BA
INDEX MARK
12.5(.492) 12.3(.484)
14.2(.559) 13.8(.543)
0.50(.020) BSC
0.25(.010) 0.15(.006)
1.20(.047) MAX
11
Atmel Headquarters
Corporate Headquarters
2325 Orchard Parkway San Jose, CA 95131 TEL (408) 441-0311 FAX (408) 487-2600
Atmel Operations
Atmel Colorado Springs
1150 E. Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd. Colorado Springs, CO 80906 TEL (719) 576-3300 FAX (719) 540-1759
Europe
Atmel U.K., Ltd. Coliseum Business Centre Riverside Way Camberley, Surrey GU15 3YL England TEL (44) 1276-686677 FAX (44) 1276-686697
Atmel Rousset
Zone Industrielle 13106 Rousset Cedex, France TEL (33) 4 42 53 60 00 FAX (33) 4 42 53 60 01
Asia
Atmel Asia, Ltd. Room 1219 Chinachem Golden Plaza 77 Mody Road Tsimshatsui East Kowloon, Hong Kong TEL (852) 27219778 FAX (852) 27221369
Japan
Atmel Japan K.K. Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg., 9F 1-24-8 Shinkawa Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033 Japan TEL (81) 3-3523-3551 FAX (81) 3-3523-7581
Fax-on-Demand
North America: 1-(800) 292-8635 International: 1-(408) 441-0732
e-mail
literature@atmel.com
Web Site
http://www.atmel.com
BBS
1-(408) 436-4309
Atmel Corporation 1998. Atmel Cor poration makes no warranty for the use of its products, other than those expressly contained in the Companys standard warranty which is detailed in Atmels Terms and Conditions located on the Companys website. The Company assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in this document, reserves the right to change devices or specifications detailed herein at any time without notice, and does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. No licenses to patents or other intellectual proper ty of Atmel are granted by the Company in connection with the sale of Atmel products, expressly or by implication. Atmels products are not authorized for use as critical components in life suppor t devices or systems. Marks bearing
and/or
are registered trademarks and trademarks of Atmel Corporation. Printed on recycled paper.
0548C10/98/xM
AV/IO Schematic
Video ICs
DC (Min.), AC120VP-P (Min.), f = 70Hz). 2) Circuits for either current control or voltage control are provided on the chip. 3) Compact SIP 5pin or SOP 8pin package.
Block diagram
BA7755A
1 VCC
2 SW
BA7755AF
CTRL1
8 7 6 5
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Video ICs
BA7755A / BA7755AF
CC
= 9V)
Unit A mA A VP-P mV A A V k Conditions Pin4 L or OPEN Pin5 OPEN Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A Pin 4 H, or OPEN, or L Pin 5 OPEN, pin 2 applied voltage 65V f = 70kHz Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A
Video ICs
DC (Min.), AC120VP-P (Min.), f = 70Hz). 2) Circuits for either current control or voltage control are provided on the chip. 3) Compact SIP 5pin or SOP 8pin package.
Block diagram
BA7755A
1 VCC
2 SW
BA7755AF
CTRL1
8 7 6 5
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Video ICs
BA7755A / BA7755AF
CC
= 9V)
Unit A mA A VP-P mV A A V k Conditions Pin4 L or OPEN Pin5 OPEN Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A Pin 4 H, or OPEN, or L Pin 5 OPEN, pin 2 applied voltage 65V f = 70kHz Pin 4 L or OPEN Pin 5 control current: 200A
RS2622
BLOCK DIAGRAM
10
11
12
13
14
15
Q602 (L/R), Q603 (L/R) Audio Amp
16
17
18
19
20
B
FM Ant 43
T Clock 27
18
AM Ant
15
14 GND
Playback Deck A
24 23
20
Tape Left
Rec/Playback Deck B
21 S Clock
20
S Data
14
ALL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND MANY OTHER SEMICONDUCTORS ARE ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE AND REQUIRE SPECIAL HANDLING TECHNIQUES DESCRIBED UNDER "ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES) DEVICES" IN THE SAFETY AND SERVICING PRECAUTIONS PUBLICATION.
18 7
F
Bias OSC AUX IN Left 2
Record Right
IC302 Switch
9 10 7
21
22
COMPONENTS WITH A ! HAVE SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS IMPORTANT TO SAFETY. BEFORE REPLACING ANY OF THESE COMPONENTS READ CAREFULLY THE PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE IN THIS SERVICE DATA. DO NOT DEGRADE THE SAFETY OF THE SET THROUGH IMPROPER SERVICING.
SCHEMATIC NOTES 1. RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS; K=X1000, Meg=X1,000,000. RESISTORS ARE 1/4W 5%, EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/8W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/16W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. m F, 2. CAPACITANCE VALUES 1.0 AND ABOVE ARE IN pF, VALUES BELOW 1.0 ARE IN EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. VOLTAGE RATING IS 50V EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT. 3. DENOTES CHASSIS GROUND. INDICATES CONNECTION VIA POINT-TO-POINT WIRE. -INDICATES JUMPER WIRE. -INDICATES ZERO OHM CHIP COMPONENT.
28
AUX IN Right
Power Transformer
Carousel Motor To IC701 PI001 Slider Down Sensor Drawer Motor To IC701 4 3 To IC701 3 To IC701 3
Filament
I
D515
Filament
-30V 10V
D509-D512
-31V
D505-D508 31V
7 9
TCM Module
To IC701
PAGE 8-1
PAGE 8-1
ANT. PLL Data/CLK/CE.SD.ST COM.SEG MAIN U-COM CD CLK/Data/Storbe/Reset IC-UPD780306 KEY I/O,RMC INPUT Function Keys Remote Sensor Module H.P Jack Attenuator LCD Display
PLL IC-BU2616F
Tuner Pack
VOL CLK / Data Tuner R/L O/P Tape R/L O/P CD R/L O/P Volume+Switch+ PT2253+TC4052 AMP VCC AC Main R/L Mute Circuit
BLOCK DIAGRAM
4
Power Supply Rectifier Circuit
Cassette PRE-AMP-AN7312
R/L
Mech-Deck
AC Power AC Transformer
OKMCO CD Module
43
18
AM Ant
15
Tuner Right
3 CD Data 24 36 CD Clock
14 GND
Playback Deck A
24 23
20
Tape Left
Rec/Playback Deck B 1
21 S Clock
20
S Data
14 GND
18 7
IC302 Switch
9 10 7
21
22
AUX IN Left
28
AUX IN Right
Carousel Motor To IC701 PI001 Slider Down Sensor Drawer Motor To IC701 4 3 To IC701 3 To IC701 3
Power Transformer
-30V 10V
D509-D512
-31V
D505-D508 31V
7 9
TCM Module
To IC701 3
To IC701
43
18
AM Ant
15
Tuner Right
3 CD Data 24 36 CD Clock
14 GND
Playback Deck A
24 23
20
Tape Left
Rec/Playback Deck B 1
21 S Clock
20
S Data
14 GND
18 7
IC302 Switch
9 10 7
21
22
AUX IN Left
28
AUX IN Right
Carousel Motor To IC701 PI001 Slider Down Sensor Drawer Motor To IC701 4 3 To IC701 3 To IC701 3
Power Transformer
-30V 10V
D509-D512
-24V
D505-D508 24V
7 9
TCM Module
To IC701 3
To IC701
4 EMIT
ANO
COL
4 3
R007 R006
100 1/4W
DISC SENSOR
150 1/4W
P027
6 5 4 3 2 1
P026
1 2
(RED DOT) +
CAROUSEL MOTOR M
-
PLAT_SW
PAGE 9-7
PAGE 9-7
CASSETTE SCHEMATIC
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
R304L 47R
2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list
R311L
18K
C314L 2u2F
TAPE_L
AUDIO_L AUDIO_R
AGND R407
1K
AUDIO_L
AGND
RECORD L
R306L 1K2
C308L
C310L
SDATA
SCLK
R303L
JR301
C453R AUX_R
R311
C306L 27nF
R302L
C304R
19 C404R
5n6F
5n6F
ALC-L/CUT
PB/OUT
PB/EQL
PB/NFL
REC/OL
A-I/PR
REC/INL
JP301
VCC
ALC
HI/LO
D-GND
AGND
ROUT
CREF
NC2
TREBLE(R)
R_IN4
NC1
SDA
SCL
BOUT(L)
LOUT
VS
TDA7440D
REC/OUTR
RIPPLE/FIL
PB-OUTR
C407L
N303
BIAS OSC
B-I/PL
A/Rec
REC/INR
PB-EQR
REC/PB
PB-NFR
AB/SWT
O/PGND
MUXOUT(R)
B-I/PR
AB/SW
BOUT(R)
BIN(R)
R301L 15K
10
12
13
C302L 1n2F
R302R 120K
C307R 1uF
100uF C305R
C315R
C315L
C311R
C402R TAPE_R
C401R TUNER_L
C402L
C453L RECORD_L
C401L
GND
2
C306R 27nF
10uF C319
22uF C317
1uF
1uF
1uF
15K
RECORD_R
2u2F
2u2F
2u2F
TAPE_L
2u2F
2u2F
C308R 100pF
R305R 1K2
R301R 15K
C316
R308 27K
R306R
JP302
47R
C303R 2n2F
C302R 1n2F
REC/PLAYBACK DECK B
R30733K
4u7F
1K2
AUX_L
680 R303R
CD_R
CD_L
WHITE
RECORD_R
RECORD_L
RECORD_L
R309
C410L
2u2F
C410R
2u2F
120nF
C407RC408R
120nF
14
11
RED
R403R
5K6
C303L 2n2F
C310R
RECORD_L
AGND
18K 2u2F
R304R
FROM/TO KEY BD
RECORD R
R311R
R342
R341
56K
BIAS OSC
Q305
KTC3198GR
TAPE_R
C314R
1uF
100
C343
IC302
CTRL1
VCC
GND
R340 C348
33nF 47K
CD_SYNCHRO
+10V R325
100
BASE
TAPE_MUTE
STAND_BY P401
CTRL2 3
SW
C341
6n8F
L302
470uH
2 COL KRC107S
P701
1n2F
13
12
11
10
11
12
BIN(L)
R_IN3
R_IN2
R_IN1
L_IN2
L_IN3
L_IN4
L_IN1
IN(R)
IN(L)
YELLOW
Logic Rec/PB
MUXOUTL
120nF
PB Amp (R) + -
Rec AMP(R)
IC401
PLAYBACK DECK A
A/Rec
IC300 AN7348K
+ PB Amp (L)
MUTE
Rec AMP(L)
120nF
ALC
5K6
R403L
TREBLE(L)
C408L
RED
CRO/NOR
A-I/PL 24
27
26
25
24
22
20
21
17
16
15
C301R 3n3F
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
28 2u2F
GND
18 C404L
C301L3n3F
47uF
23 47uF C420
C304L
C305L
C309
C311L
2u2F
2u2F
1uF
WHITE
AGND
47nF
56R
N304
C409R AUDIO_R
C409L AUDIO_L
100uF
120K
C307L
1uF
1uF
1uF
R420
100
GND
680
100pF
C312
100uF
C400
C402
100pF
C403
R408
1K
AUDIO_R
22uF
R305L 1K2
100pF
1n2F
R312
1M5
N501
C320
PROTECTION
+10V
AGND
FIL+ FIL-30V
10 AUX_R AUX_L 1
C342
68nF
220uH
L301
TP60G
L303 470uH
TP60
R401L
10K
CD_L
R324 R326
100K
EMIT
MGND
100nF
C412
R402R
10K
2 3
2SC1815
Q603L
C411 D402
220uF
470uF
TAPE_A
C410
10uF
AGND
KTC3875GR
Q403
R405
560
R406 AGND
10K C601R 100nF 100nF
6.5uH
1.8K
L603L
6.5uH
C605L
R616L
180
R614L 0 R613L 22
1k
330k
C611
R601L 100k
R611L
47k
2SC1815
TAPE MOTOR -
NJ503
P601A
H/P_IN
P601
PAGE 9-3
1uF 50V
C901
10K
R350
Q306
KTC3875GR
9 8 7 1 3 2
Q603R
C601L
L602
R615R
1.8K C604R 1uF R616R 180
R612R
1k R614R 0
6.5uH
R610R
AUDIO_R
R352
1k5
L603R R617R
4K7
C605R
470uF
C606R
100pF
C611R
1uF
R601R 100k
R611R 47k
PAGE 9-3
P101
RECORD
470R
R401
C401
10K
R402
470uF
C600
R615L
R612L
R610L
AUDIO_L
N301
22K
2u2F
KTC3203Y 6.8V
Q401
SW_VCC
KTA1273Y
Q402
+10V
R600
47
H/P_VCC
CD POWER SUPPLY
C333
R401R
10K
CD_R
CASSETTE SCHEMATIC
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
R304L 47R
2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list
R311L
18K
C314L 2u2F
TAPE_L
AUDIO_L AUDIO_R
AGND R407
1K
AUDIO_L
AGND
RECORD L
R306L 1K2
C308L
C310L
SDATA
SCLK
R303L
JR301
C453R AUX_R
R311
C306L 27nF
R302L
C304R
19 C404R
5n6F
5n6F
ALC-L/CUT
PB/OUT
PB/EQL
PB/NFL
REC/OL
A-I/PR
REC/INL
JP301
VCC
ALC
HI/LO
D-GND
AGND
ROUT
CREF
NC2
TREBLE(R)
R_IN4
NC1
SDA
SCL
BOUT(L)
LOUT
VS
TDA7440D
REC/OUTR
RIPPLE/FIL
PB-OUTR
C407L
N303
BIAS OSC
B-I/PL
A/Rec
REC/INR
PB-EQR
REC/PB
PB-NFR
AB/SWT
O/PGND
MUXOUT(R)
B-I/PR
AB/SW
BOUT(R)
BIN(R)
R301L 15K
10
12
13
C302L 1n2F
R302R 120K
C307R 1uF
100uF C305R
C315R
C311R
C315L
C402R TAPE_R
C401R TUNER_L
C402L
C453L RECORD_L
C401L
GND
2
C306R 27nF
10uF C319
22uF C317
1uF
1uF
1uF
15K
RECORD_R
2u2F
2u2F
2u2F
TAPE_L
2u2F
2u2F
C308R 100pF
R305R 1K2
R301R 15K
C316
R308 27K
1n2F
R306R
FOR US
JP302
47R
C303R 2n2F
C302R 1n2F
REC/PLAYBACK DECK B
R30733K
4u7F
1K2
AUX_L
680 R303R
CD_R
CD_L
WHITE
RECORD_R
RECORD_L
RECORD_L
R309
C410L
2u2F
C410R
2u2F
120nF
C407RC408R
120nF
14
11
RED
R403R
5K6
C303L 2n2F
C310R
RECORD_L
AGND
18K 2u2F
R304R
FROM/TO KEY BD
RECORD R
R311R
R342
R341
56K
BIAS OSC
Q305
KTC3198GR
TAPE_R
C314R
1uF
100
C343
IC302
CTRL1
VCC
GND
R340 C348
33nF 47K
CD_SYNCHRO
+10V R325
100
BASE
TAPE_MUTE
STAND_BY P401
CTRL2 3
SW
C341
6n8F
L302
470uH
2 COL KRC107S
P701
13
12
11
10
11
12
BIN(L)
R_IN3
R_IN2
R_IN1
L_IN2
L_IN3
L_IN4
L_IN1
IN(R)
IN(L)
YELLOW
Logic Rec/PB
MUXOUTL
120nF
PB Amp (R) + -
Rec AMP(R)
IC401
PLAYBACK DECK A
A/Rec
IC300 AN7348K
+ PB Amp (L)
MUTE
Rec AMP(L)
120nF
ALC
5K6
R403L
TREBLE(L)
C408L
RED
CRO/NOR
A-I/PL 24
27
26
25
24
22
20
21
17
16
15
C301R 3n3F
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
28 2u2F
GND
18 C404L
C301L3n3F
47uF
23 47uF C420
C304L
C305L
C309
C311L
2u2F
2u2F
1uF
WHITE
AGND
47nF
56R
N304
C409R AUDIO_R
C409L AUDIO_L
100uF
120K
C307L
1uF
1uF
1uF
R420
100
GND
680
100pF
C312
100uF
C400
C402
100pF
C403
R408
1K
AUDIO_R
22uF
R305L 1K2
100pF
1n2F
R312
1M5
N501
C320
PROTECTION
+10V
AGND
FIL+ FIL-30V
10 AUX_R AUX_L 1
C342
68nF
220uH
L301
TP60G
L303 470uH
TP60
R401L
10K
CD_L
R324 R326
100K
EMIT
MGND
100nF
C412
R402R
10K
2 3
2SC1815
Q603L
C411 D402
220uF
470uF
TAPE_A
C410
10uF
AGND
KTC3875GR
Q403
R405
560
R406 AGND
10K C601R 100nF 100nF
6.5uH
1.8K
L603L
6.5uH
C605L
R616L
180
R614L 0 R613L 22
1k
330k
C611
R601L 100k
R611L
47k
2SC1815
TAPE MOTOR -
NJ503
P601A
H/P_IN
P601
PAGE 9-3
1uF 50V
C901
10K
R350
Q306
KTC3875GR
9 8 7 1 3 2
Q603R
C601L
L602
R615R
1.8K C604R 1uF R616R 180
R612R
1k R614R 0
6.5uH
R610R
AUDIO_R
R352
1k5
L603R R617R
4K7
C605R
470uF
C606R
100pF
C611R
1uF
R601R 100k
R611R 47k
PAGE 9-3
P101
RECORD
470R
R401
C401
10K
R402
470uF
C600
R615L
R612L
R610L
AUDIO_L
N301
22K
2u2F
SW_VCC
KTA1273Y
Q402
+10V
R600
47
H/P_VCC
CD POWER SUPPLY
C333
R401R
10K
CD_R
4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety
N701
components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list
6.8n 50V
R311L
18K 1/16W
AUDIO_L
TO KEY BD
ECO
C309L
15
AUDIO_R
RECORD L
47R 1/16W R305L 1K2 1/16W 1K2 1/16W 1M5 R312 1/16W R304L 100pF 50V 1n2F 50V 22uF 50V
PROTECTOR
14
TUNER-12V
13
220uF 10V
C308L
C310L
R306L
C312
C320
12
+10V 3.8V_
100uF 16V
120K 1/16W
C307L
1uF 50V
27nF 50V
47nF 50V
R311
R302L
56R 1/16W
C309
C305L
C306L
C311L
11
50V 1uF
3.8+
10 C408R 5n6F 50V R401 1K 1/16W R402 1K 1/16W 8 C408L 5n6F 50V
-30V
9
24 A-I/PR A-I/PL
23 PB/NFL
22 PB/EQL
21
20 PB/OUT ALC-L/CUT
19 REC/INL
18 REC/OL
17 ALC
16
P
15 HI/LO
14 CRO/NOR
13 VCC
GND
19 18 17
R P R
ALC
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
AGND
ROUT
CREF
LOUT
SDA
NC2
D-GND
R_IN4
NC1
VS
SCL
TREBLE(R)
C350
22uF 50V
RIPPLE/FIL
REC/OUTR
PB-OUTR
REC/INR
O/PGND
PB-EQR
AB/SWT
REC/PB
PB-NFR
AB/SW
B-I/PR
GND
6
15K 1/16W
B-I/PL
REC/PLAYBACK DECK B
470uH
RED
5
Logic A/B
BIAS OSC
YELLOW
4
L302
MUTE
Rec AMP(R) R
Ripple Rejection
BIAS OSC
TREBLE(L)
BOUT(L)
Rec AMP(L)
IC300
16
15
ST-BY
MOTOER
IC401
REC H/P-MUTE
4
Logic Rec/PB
MUXOUT(R)
1
50V 50V 1uF 1uF 1n2F 50V
2
100uF 16V
5
C307R 1uF 50V
6
10uF C319 50V
8
1uF C311R 50V
10
15K 1/16W
11
22uF C317 50V
BIN(R)
BIN(L)
WHITE
7
470uH
BOUT(R)
SDATA
IN(R)
R301L
27nF 50V
IN(L)
C302L
C315R
C315L
C305R
SCLOCK
L303
RESERVE
N303
C306R
AUDIO-MIX
C407L 220N 16V 1
R309
10
C351
100nf 50V 15K R301R 1/16W 1n2F 50V
1K2 1/16W
1K2 1/16W
TAPE_L
4u7F 50V 27K 1/16W
C302R
R305R
1n2F 50V
R306R
C310R
C316
R308
FROM CDM5B
DRAWING NO. CONT ON SHEET
RECORD R
R341 R342
1/16W 10R
1u 16V
1u 16V
RECORD_L
P010
1 10K 1/16W
C410R
C410L
RECORD_R
R402R
R401R
CD_L 10K 1/16W 2
Q305
56K 1/16W
TP60
IC302
C314R 2u2F
10k 1/16W
C309R
50V
1/16W
R340 CTRL1
47K 1/16W
BA7755A
C343 GND VCC
1uF 50V
10k 1/16W
10k 1/16W
SW
C348
33nF 50V
CTRL2 3 4
R409R
CD_R
AUDIO-MIX 5 R325
100 1/16W
C341
6n8F 50V
C342
68nF 50V
L301
220uH
TP60G
100K 1/16W
R324 R326
22K 1/16W
N101
2u2F 50V
H/P-IN R406L
39K 1/16W 39K 1/16W 4
C333
2u2F 50V
C401L
H/P-MUTE
3
Q401
R407L
100R 1/16W
15K 1/16W
R450
+7V
220N 16V
D402
C603
C404
R403 C410
47UF 50V
1/16W 15K
1 1
VVV
N305
GND1
220UF 16V
AUX IN
3
12v
TO BOTTOM
TAPE MOTOR
R328
TAPE MOTOR CKT
Q327 R327
1k 1/16W 22K 1/16W
2
COL
COL
REC
BASE
BASE
1
EMIT
1 MOTOER
TO KEY BD
EMIT
Q328
Q331
N401A
N402
6.8n 50V
R410L
R441 R409L
1/16W 10k
R440
R401L R402L
10K 1/16W 10K 1/16W
SH NO.
+ + -
1 A
4 EMIT
ANO
C
P027
6 5 4 3 2 1
COL
4 3
R007 R006
100 1/4W
DISC SENSOR
150 1/4W
P026
1 2
(RED DOT) +
CAROUSEL MOTOR M
-
PLAT_SW
PAGE 9-6
PAGE 9-6
EXPLODED VIEWS
Page 7-1
Page 7-1
+5VD_AUD
POWER
MAIN POWER CON FROM POWER BD +5VD +3.3V V_+5V +9VM
I2S_DAT1 I2S_DAT2 I2S_DAT3 DGND I2S_BCK I2S_LRCK POWER_DET DAMP_FAIL HP_DET HP_MUTE DAMP_PD1 DAMP_PD2 DAMP_RESET DAMP_I2C_CLK DAMP_I2C_DAT +5VD_AUD DGND SPDIF OUT
CON1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R160 R161 R162 R168 R183 R200 R249 R248 R247 R244 R243 R242 R60 R56
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
DA_DATA3 DA_DATA2 DA_DATA1 DA_BCK DA_LRCK POWER_DET AMP_POW_FAIL HEADPHONE_DET MUTE_PHONE PD1_DAMP PD2_DAMP DAMP_RST I2C_CLK I2C_DAT
CVBS C
Y1
CB CR
+12V_AUD +3V3_AUD ADC_+3.3V
L19
10uH
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CON15
25V 220uF
C190
L_+12VM
L_+5V
LC42
33uH
L43
33uH
33uH
L_MGND
L46 10uH
V_GND
v_gnd
L_+3.3V
L12 L45
10uH
10uH
D7 3.3V
D8 3.3v
CON8
C191 C192 R298 R299 470uF 470uF 2.7K 2.7K 35V 1/8W 1/8W 35V
4 3 2 1
+5VD_AUD
R257 R74
SPDIF_IN IEC958_OUT
AGND
CON5
V_GND
SPDIF_OUT
DGND
DGND
+12V_AUD -12V_AUD
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R209 R210
LT RT
A_IN_MUX_CNTL1_OUT A_IN_MUX_CNTL2_OUT
TTT
+3.3V
D9 R148
1/16W 470
COL
PLL_VDD FRONT_DGNDL9
10uH
L38
10uH
U7
C14 BA4560
1/16W 1K 100P 16V
LATI2S 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1 LRCIN 2 DIN 3 BCKIN 4 MCLK
+5VD
Q1
L39
10uH
+5VD_AUD
C65
EMIT
47K
R80
CON19
BASE
L41
8415_+3.3V 8415_DGND
+3.3V MDGND
AGND
AGND
1/16W +12V_AUD 68
D11
2V2
AGND
C36
DTC323
1/16W 100K
1000uF 10V
Q7 DTC114Y Q2
C16
47uF 16V
R81
U3
2 3
1/16W 3.9K
R52
R54
C13
47UF 16V
100P 16V
220P 16V
C5
R49
R53
WM8728
AGND
BA4560
1/16W 1K 100P 16V
10uH 10uH
10uH 10nF
R154 C70
47uF 10V
C72100nF
16V
C39
0 1/16W
R283
C46
L22 +3.3V
MDGND DGND +1.8V +3.3V C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF C47 100uF 10V +3.3V C54 C55 C58 16V 16V 16V 10nF 10nF 10nF C56 47uF 10V U32 LM1117 OUT
C73
16V 100nF
GND 4
1/16W
Q8
DTC323
C60
100P 16V
1/16W 100K
R145
C44
AGND C71
8 VCC U3 BA4560
3.9K 1/16W
C37 47UF
16V
0 1/16W 0 1/16W
C40
47uF 16V
R311 R312
+3V3_AUD +3.3V
R259
820K
R146
U3
6 5
220P 16V
C38
10K 1/16W
R132
47K 1/16W
R133
C105
10uF 10V
100nF 16V
C102
C106
100nF 16V MUTE_DMIX
AGND
AGND
2
R57 1/16W
VCC GND
220R
C33
1/16W 20K
R134 2 3
R136
U2
BA4560
C34
C42
10uF
R150
R139 C143
16V 100nF
10k 1/16W
C32 10uF
1/16W 150R
R135
C127 C125 C126
1K 1/16W
COL 47K
MDGND
MDGND MDGND
+12V_AUD
C35 10nF
16V
U33
CS5333
10uF 10V
10nF 16V
10nF 16V
R282
1K 1/16W
Q12 DTC114Y
+1.8V
16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF10nF 10nF
+3.3V C61 C62 C63 C64 C66 C67 C74 C75 C87 C88 C85 C86 C25 C26 C27C28C29 C57 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V
C141
47uF 10V
10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF 10nF
AGND
47uF
C18
C142 10V
C111
1/16W 20K
R140
R149
10V
6 5 U2
BA4560
C136
10uF 10V
AGND R137
1/16W 150R 16V 100nF 10V 100nF 10uF 16V
C128 C138 C129 C130
47uF 10V
-12V_AUD
68 1/16W
R151
R138
C10810uF
10K 1/16W
C137
10nF 16V
10uF 10V
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
RST VQ AINL
VL MCLK SCLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Q11 DTC114Y
BASE EMIT
SUB_RST
1/16W R203 33R R290 100R 1/16W 100R 1/16W 100R 1/16W
R291
DA_XCK
DA_BCK CS5333_DATA
R292
DA_LRCK
MDGND
MDGND
MDGND
AGND
AGND
R164 R196
47K 1/16W
R77
AGND
+5VD_AUD 100nF C133 C134 3.3uF R189 28 27 26 25 24 23 U27 SDL AD1 RXP6 RXP5 S H/ VL+ DGND CMCK U INT SDA AD0 AD2 RXP RXN VA+ AGND FILT RST RMCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8415_DGND SUB_RST DIGITAL_A_IN_MUX C124 10nF C119 10nF C31 10uF R142 910R 10nF C118 R188 47K SPDIF_IN R190 33 33 8415_DGND I2C_CLK R199 I2C_DAT Q15 10nF C78 DTC3233 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 U30 OE1 I0 O4 74VHC244 I1 O5 I2 O6 I3 O7 GND Vcc OE2 O0 I4 O1 I5 O2 I6 O3 I7 +3.3V C79 10uF R29710k
39k
MDGND 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 33R CS5333_DATA DA_BCK DA_LRCK RDS_DAT RDS_CLK R31 R46 33R 33R R24 IN_LRCK R192 R265 R262 CON3
TO TUNER
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13.5M 8415_DGND R185 33R R186 NVERR R191 33 R194 RERR 33 33R R187 33R
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
R263
R264
IN_BCK IN_DATA
R258
R193
+12V_AUD 100R
100R
100R
100R
100R
100R
100R
SCART_CNTL1_OUT SCART_CNTL2_OUT V_MUX_CNTL1_OUT V_MUX_CNTL3_OUT A_IN_MUX_CNTL1_OUT A_IN_MUX_CNTL2_OUT R23310K V_MUX_CNTL2_OUT +5VD 10nF 10uF C82 C83 GPIO(01:08)
U6 20 VCC OE 19 V0 D0 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 CP 74HCT245 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GPIO01 GPIO02 GPIO03 GPIO04 GPIO05 GPIO06 GPIO07 GPIO08 DGND DGND
TUNED11
GND 10
10k
TRAY_SENSE AMP_POW_FAIL R84 10k +5VD U16 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10k 10k O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 CP 10k 100nF +5VD 74HCT245 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10k RA05 IN245G OUT245G C80 10nF GPIO01 GPIO02 GPIO03 GPIO04 GPIO05 GPIO06 GPIO07 GPIO08 OUT574CK1 OUT574CK2 OUT574OE
CON14 1 DOOR_M+ DOOR_MDOOR_SNS_OPEN DOOR_SNS_CLS RMC FRONT_DGND +5VD_FRONT LED_STANDBY KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 KEY_SCAN_IN1 2
R86
KEY_SCAN (1:7) RMC VFD_DRV_CS_OUT PROG_FPGA KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 DGND DGND DAT_FPGA CCLK_FPGA 10k 10k 33R R280 33R R279 10k DAMP_RST SUB_RST R278
14 13 12 11 10 9
GND 10 R85 C109 C195 1nF GPIO01 GPIO02 GPIO03 GPIO04 GPIO05 GPIO06 GPIO07 GPIO08
R277
R87
R88
R16
CON7 7 +5VD_FRONT VFD_DAT_OUT VFD_DAT_IN VFD_CLK VFD_CS KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 100 VFD_KEY_IN R221 100 100 KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN7 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 KEY_SCAN6 KEY_SCAN7 KEY_SCAN6 COL 2 3 EMIT Q19 KRA102S BASE 1 DGND RA09 10k 100 R218 R219 100nF 10k 10k 10k R220
3 4
R91
R90
1 2
R89
C200
CON10 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 KEY_SCAN6 KEY_SCAN7 KEY_SCAN_IN1 KEY_SCAN_IN2 LED_STANDBY FRONT_DGND -27V VF1 VF2 CHGND 7
GND 10
C193 1nF
R314 1k
+5VD
CON2 7 6
GPIO01 GPIO02 GPIO03 GPIO04 GPIO05 GPIO06 GPIO07 GPIO08 D32 D33 IN4148 IN4148 DGND
100nF
100nF
3 4
10k
10k
R94
R93
C201
C202
R92
10k
ENCODER_A ENCODER_B FRONT_DGND +5VD_FRONT KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 KEY_SCAN6 KEY_SCAN_IN2
GND 10
Q5 KEY_SCAN1 KEY_SCAN2 KEY_SCAN3 KEY_SCAN4 KEY_SCAN5 C98 100P IN4148 IN4148 FRONT_DGND MDGND C99 100P DTC323 Q6 DTC323 R75 10K Q17
Q16
DGND
DTC323
R76 10K
CON12
10 9
TUNED
AGND
HEADPHONE_DET
0.1u
+5VD
C2
9 7 5 3 1 CON17 10 8 6 4 2
10 8 6 4 2
9 7 5 3 1
ENCODER_A
R307
0 0 0
0.1u C76 U15 BA7623 1 GND OUT1 8 2 IN1 OUT27 3 IN2 OUT36 4 IN3 VCC5
0 0
470uF C180
470uF
R281 1K R227
IEC958_OUT
DA_DATA3
DA_DATA2
DA_DATA0
DA_DATA1
DA_LRCK
DA_BCK
DA_XCK
REF_GND
REF_VDD
DVDD
DVSS
C150
100uH L016
R007
0.1u C204
1.5k R28
1.5k R29
GPIO04 GPIO07
R232
1.8K
156
155
153 GNDP3
154
BCK149 LRCK148
AVDD1143 AVDD2142
126 VDAC_1B
ADATA3/GPIO13
ADATA2/GPIO12
IEC958/GPIO14
VCC 51 PROGRAM 52 I/O 53 I/O 54 I/O 55 I/O 56 I/O 57 I/O 58 I/O 59 I/O 60 I/O 61 I/O 62 VCC 63 GND 64 I/O 65 I/O 66 I/O 67 I/O 68 I/O 69 I/O 70 I/O 71 I/O 72 I/O 73 CCLK 74 VCC 75
158 DAI_DATA/GPIO15 DAI_BCK/GPIO16 159 DAI_LRCK/GPIO17 160 IDC_CL/GPIO18 161 IDC_DA/GPIO19 RTS1 162 GPIO20 163 RXD1/GPIO21 R006 10k 166 GNDP4 167 VDDP4 168 164 TXD1/GPIO22 CTS1 165 GPIO23
112 GNDP2
VCLK 105
DAT_FPGA
V_GND
104 VDD25-7 GND25-7 103 MD31 102 MD28 99 VDD25-6 98 MDQM397 GND25-6 96 MD27 95 MD26 94 MD25 93 MD24 92 MD23 91 MD22 90 MD20 88 VDD25-5 87 MDQM286 GND25-5 85 MD19 84 MD18 83 MD17 82 MD16 81 VDD2 80 GND1 79 MD15 78 MD12 75 VDD25-4 74 MDQM173 GND25-4 72 MD11 71 MD10 70 MD9 69 MD8 68 MD7 67 MD6 66 MD5 65 MD14 77 MD13 76 MD21 89 MD30101 MD29100
MDATA31
50
TESTREG
STABLE0 STABLE1
VCC
VCC
GND
GND
I/O 2 1 GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Q9 DTC323
MODE
NC
DONE 49 GND 48 I/O 47 I/O 46 I/O 45 I/O 44 I/O 43 I/O 42 I/O 41 I/O 40 I/O 39 I/O 38 GND 37 VCC 36 I/O 35 I/O 34 I/O 33 I/O 32 I/O 31 I/O 30 I/O 29 I/O 28 I/O 27 I/O 26 NC 25
76 O,TDO 77 GND I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O 78 79 80 81 SDATA0 82 SDDATA1
+3.3V
33R
R002 10k
MDATA27
RA309 33
169 SDDATA6/GPIO25 170 SDATS5/GPIO26 171 SDDATA4/GPIO27 172 GND3 173 VDD3 174 SDDATA3/GPIO28 175 SDATA2/GPIO29 176 SDATA1/GPIO30 177 SDATA0/GPIO31 178 SDREQ/GPIO32 179 SDEN/GPIO33 GNDP5 180 181 VDDP5
SDDATA7/HDMARQ/GIOP24
U5 XCS05/XL
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
21
11
88 GND 89 VCC 90 SDDATA7 I/O 91 SD_EN I/O 92 SD_ERROR I/O 93 SD_BCLK I/O +3.3V 94 I/O 95 I/O FPGA_MUX_CON 96 I/O 33 97 R130 I/O 33 R252 98 I/O DIGITAL_A_IN_MUX 99 I/O PLL_DAT_IN 100 VCC VFD_KEY_IN SUB_RST
MDQM2
IC001
ZiVA-5-Processor
10k
R285
MDATA16
MDATA17
MDATA18
MDATA19
R012
10k
MDATA15 MDATA12
MDATA14
186 RXD2/SPI_MIOS/GPIO38 187 TXD2/SPI_MOSI/GPIO39 188 CTS2/SPI_CS/GPIO40 189 VNW2 190 GPIO41ALE HSC4 191 GPIO42 HSC3 192 GPIO43 193 HSC2 194 HSC1 195 HSC0 196 VDDP6 197 TRST 33
MDATA13 MDQM1
IN4148
CCLK_FPGA
PROG_FPGA
120
150
GPIO06
GPIO05
PLL_VDD
+3.3V MDGND
R313 10k
1K
GPIO03
GPIO08
+3.3V
+5VD 33 R32
MDATA11
MDATA10
1 Vcc 2 DQ0
IC1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 CON22
R83
33
IN_LRCK IN_BCK
R261
TO TVM502 LOADER
VssQ 52 51 DQ14 50 DQ13 49 VccQ 48 DQ12 DQ1147 46 VssQ W986416CH 45 DQ10 44 DQ9 43 VccQ 42 DQ8 Vss 41 NC 40 39 UDQM 38 CLK 37 CKE NC 36 A11 35 A9 34 A8 33 A7 32 A6 31 A5 30 Vss 28 A4 29
Vss 54 53 DQ15
33 33
0R 0R 0R 0R
R286 R287
R288
R289
MDGND
R131
198 TD0 199 TDI/GPI0 202 RESET 203 ALE 204 GND4 205 VDD4 208
MDATA04
33
MDQM0
MDATA02
9 VccQ 10 DQ5 11 DQ6 12 VssQ 13 DQ7 16 19 WE 17 CAS 18 RAS CS 20 BS0 21 BS1 24 A1 25 A2 14 Vcc 15 LDQM
30 VDD0 31 GND25-0
32 VDD25-0 33 MA9
42 MA0 43 GND25-1
44 VDD25-1 45 MA10
22 HD0 23 HDTACK
26 HLDS 27 HREAD
12 VDDP1 13 GNDP0
VDDP0
20 VPPD2 21 GNDP1
24 HIRQ0 25 HUDS
L_+5V
74VHC573
RA316
RA317
RA318
L018
100uH
L_+12VM dgnd
33
33
UPA20
UPA01
R004 33 R005
R266
R267
L014 L015
100uH 100uH
L_+3.3V
VDD_FLASH U8 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 O1 17 O2 16 O3 15 O4 14 O5 13 O6 12 O7 11 LE D1 3 D2 4 D3 5 D4 6 D5 7 D6 8
C080 68p
UPA01
33
52 MCAS
48 BA0 49 MCS0
50 MCS1 51 MRAS
HD14
HD15
HD13
HD12
HD10
46 MA11 47 BA1
HD11
34 MA8 35 MA7
36 MA6 37 MA5
38 MA4 39 MA3
40 MA2 41 MA1
14 HD6 15 HD5
16 HD4 17 HD3
18 HD2 19 HD1
HA1
28 IRRX1/GPIO0 29 GND0
RESET
DXX_INTERRUPT
R20
MDQM3
+1.8V
MADDR11 MADDR11
MADDR10
22 A10/AP 23 A0 26 A3 27 Vcc
UPA03
UPA02
47R
MADDR06 47R
MADDR09
MADDR07
MADDR08
MADDR05
MADDR04
MADDR03
UPD09
UPD08
UPD07
UPD06
UPD05
UPD04
UPD03
UPD15
UPD14
UPD13
UPD12
UPD10
MADDR01
UPD02
UPD00
UPD01
UPD11
D7 9 10 GND
MADDR02 47R
l_mgnd
UPA(1:20 )
1 2 CON6
TRAY_M-
TRAY_M+
74VHC573
U9 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 O1 D1 3 17 O2 D2 4 16 O3 15 O4 14 O5 13 O6 12 O7 11 LE C139 D3 5 D4 6 D5 7 D6 8
UPD(00:15) UPD08 UPD09 UPD10 UPD11 UPD12 UPD13 UPD14 UPD15 UPA20 UPA17 R37 0R SYS_RST R36 0R
MDGND IC2
UPD(00:15)
R27 R26
Vss 54 53 DQ15
D7 9 10 GND 0.1uF
UPA03
UPA02
UPD09
UPD08
UPD07
UPD06
UPD05
UPD04
UPD03
UPD02
UPD00
UPA01
UPD15
UPD14
UPD13
UPD12
UPD10
UPD01
UPD11
R71 1k
UPA07 1 KIA7034P 3 VCC OUT 2 GND U1 UPA08 0 C3 UPA09 R73 UPA10 UPA11
74VHC573
16 O3 15 O4 14 O5 13 O6 12 O7 11 LE
D3 5 D4 6 D5 7 D6 8
UPA10
UPA09
UPD06 UPD13 UPD12 UPD11 UPD05 UPD04 UPD03 UPD10 UPD01 UPD02 UPD09 UPD08 UPD00
R19
+3.3V
UPA04
UPA05 UPA06
U10 20 VCC OE 1 19 V0 D0 2 18 O1 17 O2 D1 3 D2 4
10uF
D7 9 10 GND
MDGND
MDGND
UPA19 UPA18 UPA08 UPA07 UPA06 UPA04 UPA03 UPA02 UPA01 UPA05
47 M29W800T BYTE 46 VSS1 4 45 A12 DQ15A-1 5 44 A11 DQ7 6 43 A10 DQ14 7 42 A9 DQ6 8 41 A8 DQ13 9 40 U4 NC0 DQ5 10 39 NC1 DQ12 11 38 WE DQ4 12 37 VDD RESET 13 36 NC2 DQ11 14 35 NC3 DQ3 15 34 / RY BY DQ10 16 33 A18 DQ2 17 32 A17 DQ9 18 31 A7 DQ1 19 30 A6 DQ8 20 29 DQ0 A5 21 28 OE A4 22 27 VSS A3 23 26 CS A2 24 25 A1 A0 3 A14 A13
W986416CH
UPA16
A15
A16
MDATA17 MDATA16
9 VccQ 10 DQ5 11 DQ6 12 VssQ 13 DQ7 16 19 WE 17 CAS 18 RAS CS 20 BS0 21 BS1 24 A1 25 A2 14 Vcc 15 LDQM
MDATA12
MDATA14 MDATA15
MDATA13
UPD07
MDQM2 SYS_RST 33
VDD_FLASH
C012 47u
10
10
12
12
14
14
16
16
U20 15
18
18
20
20
22
22
24
24
26
26
28
28
30
30
32
32
MADDR10
22 A10/AP 23 A0 26 A3 27 Vcc
.1uf
11
11
13
13
15
17
17
19
19
21
21
23
23
25
25
27
27
29
29
31
31
Vss 28
MEDUSA_CS
ALE
MDGND
R47 1k
X001 13.5Mhz
R309 1K
R310 1K
mdgnd MDGND
R308
GPIO02
GPIO01
R48
1k
100uF
C181
2 3
R080
1k
100uF
470uF C183
C182
0.1u
GPIO(01,08)
+5VD R30 1k
MINI_EN
+3.3V
R081 1k 1k R82
13.5M 100R225
C11 0.1u
C8 0.1u
C10 47u
C9
U18 BA7623 1 GND OUT1 8 2 IN1 OUT27 3 IN2 OUT36 4 IN3 VCC5 U19 BA7623 1 GND OUT1 8 2 IN1 OUT27
6k8
1K
1K
1K
V_GND CON4 G B R
1K
1K
R230
VDAC_VDD
R144
2SC2874
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
LEFT SURFACE
RIGHT SURFACE
1 3
6 8
10
BACK SURFACE
BOTTOM SURFACE
15
14
13
12
11
17
16
19
18
21
20
RS2620 DISASSEMBLY
Top Cover Removal (Contd) 2. Remove top panel by lifting upward from rear and separating tabs from backside of front plate asshown in figure 2.
1.
Top Cover
Side Panel
Back Panel
Page 2-1
Page 2-2
Page 2-3
Page 2-4
CD Mechanism Assembly
CD Tray
CD Arm
Rear of Unit
Fig. 6 CD Mechanism Removal
RS2620 DISASSEMBLY
CD Mechanism Removal
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.
Plug unit in and extend the CD tray. While extended unplug the unit. Remove top cover. Remove side panels. Remove the back panel Remove one (1) screw from the CD Arm Stop as shown in figure 6.
CD Tray
CD Arm
Rear of Unit
Fig. 2 CD Mechanism Removal
Remove the screws located on the back of the unit Screw and terminal location may vary
RS2622 DISASSEMBLY
RS2622 DISASSEMBLY
Remove four (4) srews fron CD Mechanism Assembly as shown in figure 7. Release one (1) wire from catch on bottom of CD Tray. Release CD Mechanism Assembly from mount by pulling towards the rear and lifting gently.
10. Disconnect one (1) Ribon wire from CD Mechanism Assembly as shown in figure 8.
CD Mechanism Assembly
Page 2-3
Page 2-4
NOTES:
P701
15
A. All resistor values are in ohms, FOR AUTOSCAN THRESHOLD B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
1/16w
FL701
A7
14
A7
TUNER_12V
13
+10V
12
2
TAPE CD
4
AUX TUNER
MODEL
RS2302/CS550 FOR EU VERSION---24/12 HOURS FOR EU VERSION---LW/MW FOR EU VERSION---AM 9K/10K FOR EU VERSION---FM 50K/200K FOR RDS CD PUCK Volume Control
US
EU
3.8V+
11
3.8V
10
-30V
9
GND
8
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
STANDBY 7
A13
2K2
AUDIO-MIX C722
10V 4U7
R880
220K
+5V
D709
3.8V+ 50v 47nF
P13
P11
P10
G15
P12
P16
P7
G14
P9
P8
P6
P5
P15
G12
G11
G7
G6
G5
G4
G13
G10
P14
G9
G8
G3
P3
470R
C715
10V 4u7
C708
Q710
27R
10V
H/P-MUTE
SDATA
A11
R883
D718
10UF
+5V
R701
330
SDATA
3 SCLOCK 2
D717
CPU5V D703
R881
12K
10V
10V
50V
D701
C701
C702
C704
C705
50V
C706
47UF 10V
G5
G6
G7
P1
G10
P2 P3
6V8
G14
P4
G1
G2
G4
G8
G9
G13
100uF
100nF
AUDIO-MIX
R889 R890 R891 R892
1K 10K I-RDS-COLCK R783 9
100nF
47uF
G12
G15
G3
SCLOCK
10UF 10V
G11
P5
47nF 50V
REC-PALY 5
D704
10V 4u7
Q702
C716
+10V
C707
MOTOER 6
G2
P4
G1
P2
P1
D714
L701 100uH
D715
-30V
-30V
R893
R894
C728 GND A4 C750 A2 VCC3 I-PLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GND I-REC-DET S4 VCC2 CISC-SW CD-RESET HOOK-OUT SDATE TRAY-2 IC703 E2 C709 SCL C710 MODE VSS
22k 50V 100p 1 3
10K
10K
10K
10K
1K
10K
R885 P87/FIP20 80 P6 CD-PUCK D714 VLOAD 79 78 P90/FIP21 P91/FIP22 P92/FIP23 P93/FIP24 P94/FIP25 P95/FIP26 P96/FIP27 P97/FIP28 P100/FIP29 P101/FIP30 P102/FIP31 P103/FIP32 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 I-RDS-DATE 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 PLL-CE PLL-DI I-PLL-COLK TUNER-LED protector TUNER-DATA-O ST-BY H/P-MUTE
TUNER-POWER OPTION
FIP0
FIP1
FIP2
FIP3
FIP4
FIP5
FIP6
FIP7
FIP8
FIP9
FIP10
FIP11
FIP12
R782
RDS.DATA 8
P80/FIP13
P81/FIP14
VDD3 P37
P101
-30V
P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 I-AM9K_10K I-FM_50K_200K I-RDS_SET I-AM/LM I-CLK_SET D707 D708 D709 D710 D711 FOR EU MODEL D715 VOLUME CONTROL
PLL-CE R788 1K
7 PLL-DI 6 1K
A3
CD-SYNCHRO O-SOLAL
P36/BUZ P35/PCL P34/TI2 P33/TI1 P32/TO2 P31/TO1 P30/TO0 RESET X2 X1 IC(VPP) XT2 P04/XT1 VDD2 P27/SCK0 P26/SO0/SB1 P25/S10/SB0 P24/BUSY P23/STB P22/SCK1 P21/SO1 P20/SI1 AVSS P17/ANI7 P16/ANI6 P03/INTP3/CI0 P00/INTP0/TI0 P15/ANI5 P12/ANI2 P11/ANI1 P10/ANI0 AVDD P14/ANI4 P13/ANI3 IC701
R723
A1
D-OUT I-TAPE-DET
PLL-COLCK
5
R789 1K R715 1K
A5 A9 A12
D-IN
vol vol
DATA-O
4
GND
R717
TUNER-VCC 3
R720 1K
10V
X2-DSC X1-DSC
68K
1/16 47N
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
1k
A6
10k
R718
1k
TUNER-LED
2
Q716
10k
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
33pF 50V
GND 1
C703 R711
22K
+5V
Y701
Q717
33pF 50V
4000KHZ
R758
47uF
R739
1K
C726
R801
P104/FIP33 P105/FIP34 P106/FIP35 P107/FIP36 P110/FIP37 P111/FIP38 P112/FIP39 P113/FIP40 P114/FIP41 P115/FIP42 P116/FIP43 P117/FIP44 P120/FIP45 P121/FIP46 P70 VDD1 P127/FIP52 P126/FIP51 P125/FIP50 P124/FIP49 P122/FIP47 P123/FIP48
1K
R725 R896
22K
R719
2.2k
R726 1K
A10 R738
22K 1K
8 R803 1 2 3 6
150K
E0 E1
SDA
47k
VCC
47k
A2 A3
A1
TAPE-DET
+5V
R809
1K
I-S1 CHK-UP A
EN701 MOTOER
B GND
GND H-VCC
100K
R808
GND
R806
50V
25 26 27
100p
4 R804
H-OUT
4
28 29 30
P02/INTP2
P01/INTP1
A807 Q805
GND1
Q806
O-SCLK DISC5
100R 68K
AVREF
VSS
P74
P73
P72
1K
P71
SOL-A
6
R811 R813
22k
15k
A14
R802
PLAY1
R816
KEY1
KEY3
I-RMC
SCLK
VC1
PLAY1
AVDD
AVDD
10K
+10V
KEY2
C751 1 VOUT
10K
R886
D802
R812
1K
50V 100nF
1/16 100N
1K
I-POWER_DET
I-RDS-COLK
L0
10K
+10V
100R
VCC
Q712
10K
1K
DISC3
L1 R779
A4
Q713
DISC4
R887
M2IN2
M2IN1
R721
47K
DISC1
10K
Q714
R790
Q705
10K
+5V
R708
10K
KEY1
100nF
FWD-SKIP
SW701
SW702
SW704
SW705
SW706
SW707
SW709
SW708
R735
R776 POWER-LED
1K
+10V
4.7uf 10V
SW703
10K
D702
5.6V
Q703 R707
47NF 50V 10K
Q701 C721
R704
100
C790
R709
12K
C755 50V
100nf
4.7K
Q704
KEY2
R705
R706
R710
4.7K
SW711
SW712
SW713
SW714
SW715
SW716
SW717
SW718
10K
10K
SW719
C791
R747 R748 R749 R750 R751 R752 R754 R756 R757
1K
R888
R760 47K
R818
R797
10K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
KEY3
CD-RESET
GND HOOK-OUT
22K
1K
CHK-UP
SDATE
TRAY-2
DISC-SW
D-OUT
SCLK
M2IN1
S1
M1IN2
M2IN2
M1IN1
+5V
D-IN
SW721
SW722
SW723
SW724
SW725
SW726
P703B
P703A GND
GND
SW727
39K
R810
R895
COM
REC-PALY
A11
R780
D725
330R
R713
D724
330R
DISC2 L2 R714
R778
D723
330R
R773
10K
R777
D722
330R
R795 1k 50V
R796 820R
R791 1.5K
R792 2.2K
R793 3.3K
R794 4.7K
R728 R745
R774
6.8K
10K
Q715 L4 R786
10K
+5V
D721
330R
R767
47K
47K
R798 1K 50V
R799 820R
R742 1.5K
R743 2.2K
R729
R734
R731
3.3k
4.7K
6.8K
10K
R732 L7
+5V
330R
R815
100nF
L5
10K
Q711 D726
330R
1k
R759
R741 1K
R740 820R
R736 1.5K
R737 2.2K
R733
R744
3.3K
4.7k
R781
R772
NOTES:
P701
15
A. All resistor values are in ohms, FOR AUTOSCAN THRESHOLD B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
1/16w
FL701
A7
14
A7
TUNER_12V
13
+10V
12
2
TAPE CD
4
AUX TUNER
MODEL
RS2302/CS550 FOR EU VERSION---24/12 HOURS FOR EU VERSION---LW/MW FOR EU VERSION---AM 9K/10K FOR EU VERSION---FM 50K/200K FOR RDS CD PUCK Volume Control
US
EU
3.8V+
11
3.8V
10
-30V
9
GND
8
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
STANDBY 7
A13
2K2
AUDIO-MIX C722
10V 4U7
R880
220K
+5V
D709
3.8V+ 50v 47nF
P13
P11
P10
G15
P12
P16
P7
G14
P9
P8
P6
P5
P15
G12
G11
G7
G6
G5
G4
G13
G10
P14
G9
G8
G3
P3
470R
C715
10V 4u7
C708
Q710
27R
10V
H/P-MUTE
SDATA
A11
R883
D718
10UF
+5V
R701
330
SDATA
3 SCLOCK 2
D717
CPU5V D703
R881
12K
10V
10V
50V
D701
C701
C702
C704
C705
50V
C706
47UF 10V
G5
G6
G7
P1
G10
P2 P3
6V8
G14
P4
G1
G2
G4
G8
G9
G13
100uF
100nF
AUDIO-MIX
R889 R890 R891 R892
1K 10K I-RDS-COLCK R783 9
100nF
47uF
G12
G15
G3
SCLOCK
10UF 10V
G11
P5
47nF 50V
REC-PALY 5
D704
10V 4u7
Q702
C716
+10V
C707
MOTOER 6
G2
P4
G1
P2
P1
D714
L701 100uH
D715
-30V
-30V
R893
R894
C728 GND A4 C750 A2 VCC3 I-PLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GND I-REC-DET S4 VCC2 CISC-SW CD-RESET HOOK-OUT SDATE TRAY-2 IC703 E2 C709 SCL C710 MODE VSS
22k 50V 100p 1 3
10K
10K
10K
10K
1K
10K
R885 P87/FIP20 80 P6 CD-PUCK D714 VLOAD 79 78 P90/FIP21 P91/FIP22 P92/FIP23 P93/FIP24 P94/FIP25 P95/FIP26 P96/FIP27 P97/FIP28 P100/FIP29 P101/FIP30 P102/FIP31 P103/FIP32 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 I-RDS-DATE 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 PLL-CE PLL-DI I-PLL-COLK TUNER-LED protector TUNER-DATA-O ST-BY H/P-MUTE
TUNER-POWER OPTION
FIP0
FIP1
FIP2
FIP3
FIP4
FIP5
FIP6
FIP7
FIP8
FIP9
FIP10
FIP11
FIP12
R782
RDS.DATA 8
P80/FIP13
P81/FIP14
VDD3 P37
P101
-30V
P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 I-AM9K_10K I-FM_50K_200K I-RDS_SET I-AM/LM I-CLK_SET D707 D708 D709 D710 D711 FOR EU MODEL D715 VOLUME CONTROL
PLL-CE R788 1K
7 PLL-DI 6 1K
A3
CD-SYNCHRO O-SOLAL
P36/BUZ P35/PCL P34/TI2 P33/TI1 P32/TO2 P31/TO1 P30/TO0 RESET X2 X1 IC(VPP) XT2 P04/XT1 VDD2 P27/SCK0 P26/SO0/SB1 P25/S10/SB0 P24/BUSY P23/STB P22/SCK1 P21/SO1 P20/SI1 AVSS P17/ANI7 P16/ANI6 P03/INTP3/CI0 P00/INTP0/TI0 P15/ANI5 P12/ANI2 P11/ANI1 P10/ANI0 AVDD P14/ANI4 P13/ANI3 IC701
R723
A1
D-OUT I-TAPE-DET
PLL-COLCK
5
R789 1K R715 1K
A5 A9 A12
D-IN
vol vol
DATA-O
4
GND
R717
TUNER-VCC 3
R720 1K
10V
X2-DSC X1-DSC
68K
1/16 47N
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
1k
A6
10k
R718
1k
TUNER-LED
2
Q716
10k
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
33pF 50V
GND 1
C703 R711
22K
+5V
Y701
Q717
33pF 50V
4000KHZ
R758
47uF
R739
1K
C726
R801
P104/FIP33 P105/FIP34 P106/FIP35 P107/FIP36 P110/FIP37 P111/FIP38 P112/FIP39 P113/FIP40 P114/FIP41 P115/FIP42 P116/FIP43 P117/FIP44 P120/FIP45 P121/FIP46 P70 VDD1 P127/FIP52 P126/FIP51 P125/FIP50 P124/FIP49 P122/FIP47 P123/FIP48
1K
R725 R896
22K
R719
2.2k
R726 1K
A10 R738
22K 1K
8 R803 1 2 3 6
150K
E0 E1
SDA
47k
VCC
47k
A2 A3
A1
TAPE-DET
+5V
R809
1K
I-S1 CHK-UP A
EN701 MOTOER
B GND
GND H-VCC
100K
R808
GND
R806
50V
25 26 27
100p
4 R804
H-OUT
4
28 29 30
P02/INTP2
P01/INTP1
A807 Q805
GND1
Q806
O-SCLK DISC5
VSS
P74
P73
P72
1K
P71
68K
AVREF
100R
SOL-A
6
R811 R813
22k
15k
A14
R802
PLAY1
R816
KEY1
KEY3
I-RMC
SCLK
VC1
PLAY1
AVDD
AVDD
10K
+10V
KEY2
C751 1 VOUT
10K
R886
D802
R812
1K
50V 100nF
1/16 100N
1K
I-POWER_DET
I-RDS-COLK
L0
10K
+10V
100R
VCC
Q712
10K
1K
DISC3
L1 R779
A4
Q713
DISC4
R887
M2IN2
M2IN1
R721
47K
DISC1
10K
Q714
R790
Q705
10K
+5V
R708
10K
KEY1
100nF
SW704
FWD-SKIP
SW701
SW702
SW705
SW706
SW707
SW709
SW708
R735
R776 POWER-LED
1K
+10V
4.7uf 10V
SW703
10K
D702
5.6V
Q703 R707
47NF 50V 10K
Q701 C721
R704
100
C790
R709
12K
C755 50V
100nf
4.7K
Q704
KEY2
R705
R706
R710
4.7K
SW711
SW712
SW713
SW714
SW715
SW716
SW717
SW718
10K
10K
SW719
C791
R747 R748 R749 R750 R751 R752 R754 R756 R757
1K
R888
R760 47K
R818
R797
10K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
KEY3
CD-RESET
GND HOOK-OUT
22K
1K
CHK-UP
SDATE
DISC-SW
TRAY-2
SCLK
D-OUT
M2IN1
S1
M1IN2
M2IN2
M1IN1
+5V
D-IN
SW721
SW722
SW723
SW724
SW725
SW726
P703B
P703A GND
GND
SW727
39K
R810
R895
COM
REC-PALY
A11
R780
D725
330R
R713
D724
330R
DISC2 L2 R714
R778
D723
330R
R773
10K
R777
D722
330R
R795 1k 50V
R796 820R
R791 1.5K
R792 2.2K
R793 3.3K
R794 4.7K
R728 R745
R774
6.8K
10K
Q715 L4 R786
10K
+5V
D721
330R
R767
47K
47K
R798 1K 50V
R799 820R
R742 1.5K
R743 2.2K
R729
R734
R731
3.3k
4.7K
6.8K
10K
R732 L7
+5V
330R
R815
100nF
L5
10K
Q711 D726
330R
1k
R759
R741 1K
R740 820R
R736 1.5K
R737 2.2K
R733
R744
3.3K
4.7k
R781
R772
Notes : 1. All resistance values are indicated in ohms (K=1000 ohms, M=1000 Kohms). 2. All capacitance values are indicated in F (p=10-6 F). 57 58
Notes : 1. All resistance values are indicated in ohms (K=1000 ohms, M=1000 Kohms). 2. All capacitance values are indicated in F (p=10-6 F).
EXPLODED VIEW
36 37 35
32 31 30 29 28 20 23 19
57
27
26 25
18
54
21 15 14 22 24 16 17
38
12
11
40 39 56 45 44 42 49 48 47 43 7 50 52 1 3 51 53 4 47 6 43 8 9 10 41
13
46
55
32
33
EXPLODED VIEW
36 37 35
32 31 30 29 28 20 23 19
56
27
26 25
18
54
21 15 14 22 24 16 17
38
12
11
40 39 53 45 44 42 49 48 47 43 7 50 52 1 3 51 53 4 47 6 43 8 9 10 41
13
46
55
32
33
EXPLODED VIEW
0090
0200 0450 0760 0490 0710 0130 0700 0600 0730 0485
MAIN BD
CDM5B ASM
0800
0860
0080
0100
0510 0040
0890
0100
0110
0770 0820
0900 0780
0070
0502
0870 0805
0880
0430
0410
0120
0400 0390
0340 0330
0440
0250
0210
0220
0300
0825
0050
POWER BD
0560 0550
TRANSFORMER BD
0815
0850
0840
Page 7-1
Page 7-1
www.fairchildsemi.com
FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Bi-directional DC Motor Driver
Features
Built-in brake function for stable brake characteristics. Built-in element to absorb a surge current derived from changing motor direction and braking motor drive. Motor speed control by an external voltage. Stable motor direction change. Interfaces with CMOS devices. Built-in the thermal shut down circuit (165C). Low standby current. (6.5mA)
Description
The FAN8082 is a monolithic integrated circuit designed for driving bi-directional DC motor with braking and speed control, and it is suitable for the loading motor driver of VCR, CDP, and TOY systems. The speed control can be achieved by adjusting the external voltage of the speed control pin. It has two pins of logic inputs for controlling the forward/ reverse and braking.
8-DIP-300
Typical Applications
Compact disk player (CDP) tray or changer Low current DC motor such as audio or video equipment. General DC motor
Ordering Information
Device FAN8082 Package 8-DIP-300 Operating Temp. 25C ~ +75C
FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Pin Assignments
GND VO1
VO2
PVCC
VCTL
FAN8082
3 6
SVCC
VIN1
VIN2
Pin Definitions
Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin Name GND VO1 VCTL VIN1 VIN2 SVCC PVCC VO2 I/O O I I I O Ground Output 1 Motor speed control Input 1 Input 2 Supply voltage (Signal) Supply voltage (Power) Output 2 Pin Function Description
GND VO1
DRIVER OUT
VO2
PVCC
TSD
BIAS
SVCC
VIN1
LOGIC SWITCH
VIN2
FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Equivalent Circuit
Description Output Pin No. 2, 8
Vcc Vcc
Internal circuit
2 8
Speed control
3
Vcc Vcc
VCC
Input
4, 5
Vcc Vcc
VCC
4 5
SVCC PVCC
6 7
6 7
VCC
FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Application Information
1. THERMAL SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT
I Q1 V1 R1 Q2 V2 R2 Q3
When Ta = 25C, Q2 & Q3 are Turned-off and output stage operates normally. V1 = I (R1 + R2) V2 = R2 / (R1 + R2) V1 = 0.37V When Ta = 165C, Q2 & Q3 Turn-on and it turns-off the output stage. 0.70V - 0.37V = 330mV (When Q2 & Q3 are Turn-on, VbeQ2 = VbeQ3 = 0.70V) And temperature coefficient of Q2 = Q3 = 2mV / C T.S.D: 330mV / 2mV = 165C 2. LOGIC INPUT & OUTPUT TABLE Input Pin #4 Low High Low High INPUT High is above 2.0V. INPUT Low is below 0.7V. *Low : All Power TRs are off-state. But internal Bias makes output Voltage low state. Pin #5 Low Low High High Pin #2 *Low High Low *Low Output Pin #8 *Low Low High *Low Motor Brake Forward Reverse Brake
www.fairchildsemi.com
FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Bi-directional DC Motor Driver
Features
Built-in brake function for stable brake characteristics. Built-in element to absorb a surge current derived from changing motor direction and braking motor drive. Motor speed control by an external voltage. Stable motor direction change. Interfaces with CMOS devices. Built-in the thermal shut down circuit (165C). Low standby current. (6.5mA)
Description
The FAN8082 is a monolithic integrated circuit designed for driving bi-directional DC motor with braking and speed control, and it is suitable for the loading motor driver of VCR, CDP, and TOY systems. The speed control can be achieved by adjusting the external voltage of the speed control pin. It has two pins of logic inputs for controlling the forward/ reverse and braking.
8-DIP-300
Typical Applications
Compact disk player (CDP) tray or changer Low current DC motor such as audio or video equipment. General DC motor
Ordering Information
Device FAN8082 Package 8-DIP-300 Operating Temp. 25C ~ +75C
FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Pin Assignments
GND VO1
VO2
PVCC
VCTL
FAN8082
3 6
SVCC
VIN1
VIN2
Pin Definitions
Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin Name GND VO1 VCTL VIN1 VIN2 SVCC PVCC VO2 I/O O I I I O Ground Output 1 Motor speed control Input 1 Input 2 Supply voltage (Signal) Supply voltage (Power) Output 2 Pin Function Description
GND VO1
DRIVER OUT
VO2
PVCC
TSD
BIAS
SVCC
VIN1
LOGIC SWITCH
VIN2
FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Equivalent Circuit
Description Output Pin No. 2, 8
Vcc Vcc
Internal circuit
2 8
Speed control
3
Vcc Vcc
VCC
Input
4, 5
Vcc Vcc
VCC
4 5
SVCC PVCC
6 7
6 7
VCC
FAN8082 (KA3082N)
Application Information
1. THERMAL SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT
I Q1 V1 R1 Q2 V2 R2 Q3
When Ta = 25C, Q2 & Q3 are Turned-off and output stage operates normally. V1 = I (R1 + R2) V2 = R2 / (R1 + R2) V1 = 0.37V When Ta = 165C, Q2 & Q3 Turn-on and it turns-off the output stage. 0.70V - 0.37V = 330mV (When Q2 & Q3 are Turn-on, VbeQ2 = VbeQ3 = 0.70V) And temperature coefficient of Q2 = Q3 = 2mV / C T.S.D: 330mV / 2mV = 165C 2. LOGIC INPUT & OUTPUT TABLE Input Pin #4 Low High Low High INPUT High is above 2.0V. INPUT Low is below 0.7V. *Low : All Power TRs are off-state. But internal Bias makes output Voltage low state. Pin #5 Low Low High High Pin #2 *Low High Low *Low Output Pin #8 *Low Low High *Low Motor Brake Forward Reverse Brake
P702
Q701
2sd2012
R707
1k
P701
From Power Amp N758
47u 25v
R701
12.6v
D703
10k
R705
10k
GND1
1k
DDD
1k 3.3k GND1
D702 R708 C701
R704
R702
R703
1k
Q702
2sc1815
12.6v
471R
47u 25v
GND1
Fan Board
DDD
LEFT FPA
RIGHT FPA
MOTOR CONTROL
HEADPHONE ASSEMBLY
DOOR CONTROL
TITLE
FL431
HNV-11SM19 ST
TUNED
RDS
C438
100NF 16V
C436
47NF 16V
C437
47NF 16V
GP1U287R
RM431
10K
100kR 1/16W
R470
R472
R474
R476
R478
R480
R482
R484
R486
R488
R490
R494
R496
R499
TO U-COM BOARD
NC11B
10uF
10K
R515
100K 1/16W
10K 1/16W
R514
ENCODER_DW ENCODER_UP
470R 1/16W
C440
IR_DATA
D501
1ss133
47uF 16V
100K 1/16W
STAND_BY
R511
KEY_IN 5.5V
100K 1/16W
100K 1/16W
10K 1/16W
100K 1/16W
R510
100K 1/16W
10K 1/16W
C441
100nf 50V
SW435
1k 1/16W
1k 1/16W
R512
D_GND
POWER_DOWN
100k 1/16W
R513
100K 1/16W
100K 1/16W
100K 1/16W
100k 1/16W
SW431
N10B2
GRID11 GRID10 GRID9 GRID8 GRID7 GRID6 GRID5 GRID4 GRID3 GRID2 GRID1
SW451
SW439
SW432
SW433
SW436
SW437
SW438
SW450
SW434
18K 1/16W
R509
8K2 1/16W
R508
5K6 1/16W
R507
3K3 1/16W
R506
2K7 1/16W
R505
2K2 1/16W
R504
1K5 1/16W
R503
1k2 1/16w
R502
R501
1k 1/16w
D438
5.5V
LED-
NC20A
NC20B
5.5V
5.5V
D_GND
LEDR469
180R 1/16W
POWER_DOWN 3.3VAC+
DTA114YK
Q401 NC15B
3.3VAC-
Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK DAC DATA
Defintion
Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information
DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN
DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable
I2SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX S S-Video SA SAT
Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect
Integrating Capacitor Output Relay Reset Right Channel Audio In Reciver Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS)
SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK WS X XTLI XTLO
Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Seriaal Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock Word Select input/output; I S-Bus Crystal Input Crystal Output
2
Y Z
Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR AUX B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CRSMTR CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK
Defintion
Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Auxiliary Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Carousel Motor Control Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock
DAC DATA DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DISC_SW DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FIL FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I
Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In Disc Detection SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Filament Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel
IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN I SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MGND MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX
2
Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable Select Auxiliary or Normal input
Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Motor Ground Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect
S S-Video SA SAT SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDATA SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK
Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS) Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Serial Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock
WS X XTLI XTLO Y Z
Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK DAC DATA
Defintion
Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information
DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN
DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable
I2SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX S S-Video SA SAT
Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect
Integrating Capacitor Output Relay Reset Right Channel Audio In Reciver Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS)
SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK WS X XTLI XTLO
Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Seriaal Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock Word Select input/output; I S-Bus Crystal Input Crystal Output
2
Y Z
Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR AUX B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CRSMTR CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK
Defintion
Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Auxiliary Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Carousel Motor Control Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock
DAC DATA DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DISC_SW DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FIL FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I
Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In Disc Detection SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Filament Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel
IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN I SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MGND MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX
2
Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable Select Auxiliary or Normal input
Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Motor Ground Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect
S S-Video SA SAT SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDATA SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK
Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS) Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Serial Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock
WS X XTLI XTLO Y Z
Glossary Abbreviation A ACK ADC: A-GND AIL AIR AMP AOL1 AOR1 AUDIOL AUDIOR AUX B BCLK BS BUS C C CDMUTE CD-R CD-RW CEN CHMODE CK CL CLD CLI CLK CLO1 CLO2 CLO3 CLO4 CLKSEL COPY CPU CRSMTR CT CS CTRLMODE CUR PRO CUS CVBS D DA DA_BCLK
Defintion
Acknowledge Analog to Digital Converter Audio Ground Audio Bitstream Input Left Audio Bitstream Input Right Amplifier Audio Bitstream Output Left Audio Bitstream Output Right Audio Left Channel Audio Right Channel Auxiliary Bit Clock Block Sync; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode A number of wires drawn as one line Center Channel Audio Mute for CD CD Recordable CD Rewritable Data Enable; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Channel Status, 0=professional - 1=consumer Clock Clock; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation DAC Clock Bitstream External VCO Input (SLAVE-VCO mode only) Clock Clock Output 1, 768fso Clock Output 2, 384fso Clock Output 3, 256fso Clock Output 4, 128fso System Clock Select; 0=384fs - 1=256fs Copyright Status, 0=copyright asserted - 1=no copyright asserted Central Processing Unit (Microprocessor) Carousel Motor Control Center Channel Chip Select Select, Microprossor/Stand-Alone, 0=microprocessor - 1=stand-alone Current Protection Data Bit; Channel Status/User Channel/CD Subcode Composite Video Bit Stream Data Control Line; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 Stand Alone Operation D to A Converter Bit Clock
DAC DATA DC PRO DEEM D-GND DI DISC_SW DI1D DI1O DI2C DI2D DI2W DI1S DIG Disc SW DO DO1W DO1D DO1C DO2C DO2D DO2W Drawer + Drawer DSP DVD DWR SW E EQSEL EM F FIL FL FL-AC FOW F-L F-R FOD FSL G GRID GND H HP Left HP Right I
Digital to Analog Converter Digital Information DC Voltage Protection Pre-emphasis Output, 0=no pre-emphasis - 1=pre-emphasis Digital Ground Data In Disc Detection SA=0 IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'D'; SA=1 MSO Control Line IEC 958 Digital Audio Input 'O' Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Bit Clock Output Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Data Serial Digital Audio Input 2; Word Select IEC958 Digital Audio Input 'S" Digital Disc Sensor Data out Digital Audio Output 1; Word Select Input/Output (fso) Digital Audio Output 1, Serial Data Digital Audio Output 1; Bit Clock Input/Output (48fso) Digital Audio Output 2 DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; data. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Left Inverted DLO=0; Serial Digital Audio Output 2; Word Select Output. DLO=1 Bitstream Audio Output Right Inverted Drawer CCW Control Drawer CW Control Digital Signal Processor Digital Video Disc Drawer Position Sensor Equalizer Select? IEC 958 Source Pre-emphasis Flag Filament Florescent Display Filament Voltage Florescent Display Florescent Display Filament Voltage Front Left Channel Front Right Channel Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Bit Clock (64fso) Serial Digital Audio Feature Output; Data Grid Ground Headphone Audio Left Channel Headphone Audio Right Channel
IECO IIS or I2S INVALID I2SOEN I SSEL J K L L-IN LADDR LCLK LD LDATA LMODE LPF LOCK M MD MGND MU MUTE N NC O OP OPT P P/C PD Platter + Platter PLAT SW PLL P-Mute PWRDET Q R Rcint RLY RST R-IN RX
2
Digital Audio Output Stereo Digital Audio Interface Audio Sample Validity 1=valid sample - 1=invalid sample Serial Audio Output Enable; 0=enable - 1=disable Select Auxiliary or Normal input
Left Channel Audio In Microprossor Address Switch, 0=000001 - 1=000010 Microprossor Clock Line Input Load Read/Write; SA=0 Microprossor Operation; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Microprossor Data Line Input/Output Microprossor Interface Mode Line Input Low Pass Filter ADIC Lock Flag (active high) Mode Display Motor Ground Mute Flag Audio Mute, 0=permanent mute - 1=mute on error No Connection Optical Input/Output+C148 Optical Connection Power Control Power Down, 0=normal - 1=standby+C19 Carousel CCW Control Carousel CW Control Carousel Position Sensor Phase Lock Loop Power on Mute Power Detect
S S-Video SA SAT SCK SCL SDAUX SD SDATA SDA SEG SL SMD SMPS SR ST-BY SPDIF: ST STROBE Sub_Q SYSCLKI SYSCLKO SV SW SW(x) SYSPOWER T TEST TST2 TST1 TU TV TX U UDAVAIL UNLOCK V VCC VDDA VF VDDD VFD VOL VSSD W WCLK
Super Video (Separate Luminance and Chroma Signal) Stand Alone Selection; SA=1 stand Alone Operation Satellite (DBS) Serial Audio Clock Input/Output; I2S bus Serial Clock Input Auxiliary Serial Data Input, I2S Bus Serial Audio Data input/output; I2S Bus Serial Data Serial Data Segment Surround Left Channel Surface Mounted Device Switch Mode Power Supply Surround Right Chennel Stand By Sony/Philips Digital Interface Stand By Strobe Input Subcode Q, part of Red Book System Clock Input System Clock Output S-Video Sub-Woofer Switch System Turn On/Off Factory Test Test 2, (low for normal operation) Test 1, (low for normal operation) Tuner Television Transmitter Output Data Syncronization, 0=data available - 1=no data PLL Lock Status, 0=unlocked - 1=locked Votage Source Digital Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Control Analog Supply Voltage Vacuum Fluorescent Display Volume Digital Ground Word Clock
WS X XTLI XTLO Y Z
u s e r m a n
DISC
CHANGER
A N D L O A D
U S S I M U L T A N E O
P L A Y
S Y S T E M
CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE
N CLOS E PE O
ON
DISC SKIP
IR SENSOR
ST ANDBY
STANDBY
L
SOURCE GAME MP3
PRESET EQ TIMER
DIGITAL
TUNING
TUNE PRESET
R
PROG SET DIMMERDEMO CLOCK BAND
REPEAT
BASS BOOST
VO
LUME C ONT
RO
DECK DECK
1
PLAYBACK/ RECORD
PLAYBACK
W E RE D
S OU N D
S SY
E T
IMPORTER Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5 0151
EXPORTER Thomson multimedia Inc. P.O. Box 1976 Indianapolis, IN 46206-1976 2002 Thomson multimedia Inc. Trademark(s) Registered Marca(s) Registrada(s) Marque(s) Depose(s) 55570940 (EN/F/E) www.rca.com www.rca.com/LatinAmerica Printed In China / Impreso en China
W E RE D
S OU N D
S SY
E T
RS2620
It is important to read this instruction book prior to using your new product for the first time. Es importante leer este manual antes de usar por vez primera su euipo.
FCC Information
EN FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture.
Safety Information
Technical specification
Product: 5CD Audio System Brand: RCA Model: RS2620
THE LIGHTNING FLASH AND ARROWHEAD WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WA R N I N G S I G N ALERTING YOU OF "DANGEROUS VOLTAGE" INSIDE THE PRODUCT.
CAUTION
EN
Electrical Consumption:
Power Supply: 120V~60Hz Power consumption: 80 Watts IMPORTER Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5
Table of Contents
FCC Information Safety Information Getting Started . . . . . . .2
Unpacking the system . . . . . . . .2 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Loading Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Play and Load Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . .7 Skipping a Disc . . . . . . . . . . .7 Searching Through a CD . . .7 Shuffling the Play Order . . .7 Sampling Tracks . . . . . . . . . . .7 Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Setting Up a CD Program . . .7 Playing a Program List . . . . .7 Displaying the Program List .7 Deleting Program List . . . . . .7
General Controls . . . . . .3
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . .4
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
Important Information 12
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . .12 Important Battery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Headset Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Dont Infringe . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Technical Specification . . . . . .12
Display Settings
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Showing Demonstration . . . . .5 Display Clock / Timer . . . . . . . . .5 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . .5 Setting the Timer . . . . . . . . .5 Activating the Timer . . . . . . .5 Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Selecting Tuner Band . . . . . . . .8 Tuning to a Station . . . . . . . . . .8 Using Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Auto Preset Programming (FM only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Manually Setting Presets . . . . .8 Suppressing Stereo Signal . . . .8
Have a Blast- Just Not in Your Eardrums Make sure you turn down the volume on the unit before you put on headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level only after headphones are in place.
Sound Features . . . . . . .6
Preset Equalizer Curves . . . . . .6 Creating Custom curves . . . . . .6 Bass Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Muting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Tape Player
Playing a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Continuous Play . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 From Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 From CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Tape to Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide.
CD Player
Notes on CD-R/RW Disc . . . . . . .6
Getting Started
EN Unpacking the system:
You should have the following: one main unit (with 2 main speakers); one remote control; one AM loop antenna; one users guide; one safety leaflet. Owner and registration Card
General Controls
Connecting the Speakers
Match the red wire (on the left speaker) to red terminal for the left speaker (L) on the back of the unit and the black wire (on the left speaker ) to the black terminal for left speaker (L). Follow the same procedure to connect the right (R) speaker.
Speaker Wire Connection
CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE
Main Unit
DIGITAL TUNING (SKIP BACKWARD) Decrements radio frequency, preset down, goes to the previous CD track or setting option. DIGITAL TUNING (SKIP FORWARD) Increments radio frequency, preset up, goes to the next CD track or setting option. PLAY / PAUSE Plays or pauses CD. TUNEPRESET Stops CD track, Sets tune or preset mode. PROGSET - Enters program mode for CD and Tuner; Applies new settings for Clock and Timer modes. BAND/AUTO PROG. Changes between FM and AM tuner bands. Enters auto preset program in FM mode. BASS BOOST Turns BASS BOOST on or off. REPEAT - Selects among repeat modes. DISC SKIP Skips to the next CD in the tray VOLUME UP/DOWN Increases/ decreases volume.
N CLOS PE E O
DISC SKIP
LUME CONT R
OL
EN
DISC
CHANGER
A N D L O A D S Y S T E M
S I M U L T A N E O U S
P L A Y
Back View
Push Speaker terminal tab down to insert wire. Release tab to lock wire in the terminal.
ON
ST A N DB Y
IR SENSOR
STANDBY
L
GAME MP3 SOURCE TIMER
PRESET EQ
DIGITAL
TUNING
TUNE PRESET
R
DIMMERDEMO CLOCK PROG SET BAND REPEAT
CD DISPLAY
AUTO PROG
BASS BOOST
NOTE: Make sure the insulation is completely removed from the ends of the speaker wires at all connection points.
DECK
1
VO
DECK
PLAYBACK/ RECORD
PLAYBACK
Installation
AM LOOP
FM ANTENNA
To ensure sufficient ventilation, keep the spacings shown below free from other surfaces: 2 Front View
4 inches
+
R L MAIN SPEAKERS 6
3
~
4 inches
ON
DISC
CHANGER
A N D L O A D S Y S T E M
S I M U L T A N E O U S
P L A Y
CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE
N CLOS PE E O
ST A N DB Y
IR SENSOR
DISC SKIP
STANDBY
L
GAME MP3 SOURCE TIMER
PRESET EQ
DIGITAL
TUNING
TUNE PRESET
R
DIMMERDEMO CLOCK PROG SET BAND REPEAT
CD DISPLAY
AUTO PROG
BASS BOOST
VO
LUME CONT R
OL
DECK
DECK
PLAYBACK/ RECORD
PLAYBACK
Tip: In STANDBY mode (press ON/STANDBY off), the system displays the time. Press ON/STANDBY to turn the system on in the previously used mode. Press CD, TAPE, TUNER or AUX (Remote Only) to select the corresponding mode. Look at the display icons to identify the current mode. GAME MP3 L / R - Jack for auxiliary connection. PHONES Jack for connecting headphones OPEN/CLOSE Opens or closes the disc tray. SOURCE Selects the CD player/ tuner/ tape player. DIMMERDEMO/CD DISPLAY Turns the feature demonstration on or off, adjusts display brightness, selects among displaying disc details. TIMER Enters timer setting mode and turns the timer on/off. CLOCK Shows clock time and enters clock setting mode. PRESET EQ selects among the different EQ modes.
Tape Player
RECORD PLAY REWIND FAST-FORWARD STOP/EJECT PAUSE
Side View
2 inches
4 inches
General Controls
EN Remote Control
TUNER CD
E Q
Display Settings
Display EN
BASS SURROUND
SOURCE
TAPE AUX
B.BO
OST
DEMO/ DIMMER
ON
VOL
E PR
EX
RE
FW
VOL
OPEN/CLOSE
STOP
REPEAT
FM ST.
DISC SKIP
INTRO
DNPRESETUP
SLEEP
ON Turns power on or off from STANDBY mode. CD Selects CD player and change CD display information in CD playing mode. TUNER Selects radio tuner and change radio band in Tuner mode. TAPE Selects tape player. AUX Selects Aux; turns the system on. EQ Selects equalizer presets. B BOOSTTurns Bass Boost on or off. DEMO/DIMMER Turns the feature demonstration on or off; adjusts display brightness. VOL+ or VOL- Increases/ decreases volume. PLAY/PAUSE Plays and pauses current CD. NEXT /FWD In CD mode - Skips forward to the next CD track; In Tuner mode - Tunes up radio frequency. PREV /REV In CD mode - Skips backwards to the previous CD track; In Tuner mode - Tunes down radio frequency. OPEN/CLOSE Opens and closes CD disc tray. STOP Stops playing CD. REPEAT Repeats a track, CD, or all CDs. MUTE - mutes sound. SHUFFLE Turns on/off random playback. FM ST. - Toggles between FM stereo and mono. DISC SKIP Skips to next CD. INTRO - Turns INTRO mode on or off to play the first 10 seconds of each track. PRESET UP/DN Selects next/ previous preset station. SLEEP - selects the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off.
Showing Demonstration
Not operational in CD mode. Press DIMMERDEMO/CD DISPLAY to turn on/off demonstration mode. The demonstration scrolls through all display operations.
6. Press TIMER to set volume. Press VOLUME CONTROL up or down to set desired volume level. 7. Press PROGSET to save settings or STOP to quit setting.
Press and release TIMER to turn on/off the timer. The timer is active when the clock icon is lit.
NOTE: Cassette functions can not be operated from the remote control.
Note: When system is ON, you can press CLOCK to display the current time for about 2 seconds.
Sleep Mode
You can select the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off automatically. Press SLEEP on the remote to select among OFF, 90, 60, 45, 30, 15 and 5 minutes. (Remote Only)
Installing Batteries
The remote control must be inserted with 2 AAA or R3 or UM 4 batteries prior to use. Follow the steps below to ensure correct installation. 1. Open the battery compartment door (located at the back of the remote control) by sliding the cover out. 2. Before inserting the batteries, observe the polarities (that is, + and -) of the battery then relate the polarities to the engraved diagram inside the battery compartment. Now insert the batteries. 3. After installation of the batteries, place the lit to cover the batteries. Lightly push it closed with a snap.
Sound Features
EN Preset Equalizer Curves
Press PRESET EQ on the main unit or EQ on the remote to toggle among FLAT, ROCK, POP, JAZZ, CLASS and CUSTOM. The display shows the selection briefly.
CD Player
BASS BOOST
Press BASS BOOST to turn on/off boosting the bass frequency.
Setting Up a CD Program
You can program the CD player to play up to any 32 tracks on the CDs in the tray. 1. While the CD player is stopped, press PROGSET to enter program mode. The system displays the next available program number: - - P:01, with - - flashing, prompts you for the first track in the program list.
EN
Muting Audio
Press MUTE (Remote Only) on the remote to cut the sound.
Skipping a Disc
Press DISC SKIP.
MUTE
Searching Through a CD
Press and hold SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to search through a CD while it is playing.
5 P:01
2. Press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to select a track (press DISC SKIP to select a track from a different disc). 3. Immediately press PROGSET to assign the selected track to the program number. After 3 seconds, you are prompted for the next track in the program list. (In CD program mode, PROG icon will be lit.)
BAS+08
CD Player
Loading Discs
CD-R / RW
Press SHUFFLE to turn on/off the playing of tracks in random order. (Remote Only)
1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD mode. 2. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the drawer. 3. Insert up to five discs with label face up. (Press DISC SKIP to rotate the disc carrier.) 4. Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the drawer. Loaded disc position icon lights.
Note: You may also press REPEAT to select 1 disc or all discs before activating INTRO & SHUFFLE functions
Playing Discs
Press PLAY/PAUSE to begin or pause play, and STOP to stop play. Press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD to select a specific track. Tip: While playing a CD, press and hold SKIPFORWARD or BACKWARD for more than 2 seconds to search through the CD.
Repeat
Press REPEAT to repeat the current track, current disc, all discs, or turn REPEAT mode off.
Tips: You can create a program of up to 32 tracks. Press CD DISPLAY repeatedly to view elapsed track time, track number, track remain time and disc remain time. Caution: Do not push to force closing of the tray during CD playback or tray opening.
Radio
EN Selecting Tuner Band
1. Press SOURCE to select TUNER. 2. Press BAND to select between AM or FM radio band.
Tape Player
Auto Preset Programming
(FM only)
Press and hold BAND button for 2 seconds to scan stations in FM band. The stations will then be stored as preset channels. A maximum of 32 stations can be stored. Beware of your preset channels being erased accidentally because the scanning and storing process is automatic upon pressing the button. You can stop the automatic scan by pressing any button, but the erased stations cannot be recovered.
CD DISPLAY AUTO PROG BASS BOOST
VO
LUME CONT R
OL
Continuous Play
1. Insert a tape into deck 2 and start playback. 2. Insert a tape into deck 1 and press PLAY and PAUSE together. 3. When the tape in deck 2 finishes playback, PAUSE at deck 1 will be released automatically and start playback.
EN
DECK
DECK
PLAYBACK/ RECORD
PLAYBACK
Tuning to a Station
Press SKIP BACKWARD select frequencies. / SKIP FORWARD to
Tape Player
RECORD PLAY REWIND FAST FORWARD STOP/EJECT PAUSE
Recording
From Tuner
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TUNER and press BAND to access the desired radio band. 3. Tune to the station to be recorded. 4. Press RECORD to begin recording. 5. Press STOP to end recording.
87.50 MHz
AUTO
Using Presets
The tuner can be in either TUNE or PRESET mode. When in PRESET mode, the PROG light is on. Press TUNEPRESET to toggle TUNE and PRESET mode. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD on the main system or PRESET UP or DOWN on the remote control to access the previous or next preset station. The display first shows the preset program number and after a few seconds, the frequency will be displayed. (FMPR:01 is FM preset 1)
Playing a Tape
Tip: You can play a tape from either deck.
1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TAPE. 2. Press STOP/EJECT to open the cassette door. 3. Insert a tape into the door and push the door closed. 4. Press REWIND/FAST FORWARD to position the tape to the desired starting position. (Deck 1 Only) 5. Press PLAY to begin playback.
From CD
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Insert a tape into deck 1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD. Insert the disc(s) to be recorded. Select the track, CD, or program to be recorded. Press RECORD to begin recording when CD begins to play. 6. Press STOP to end recording.
Tape to Tape
1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the destination tape in deck 1. Insert the source tape into deck 2. Press PAUSE and then RECORD on deck 1. Press PLAY on deck 2. The playback and recording start simultaneously.
PR:01
Troubleshooting Tips
EN
Problem Solution
System will Check power cord for a secure not turn on connection. Unplug the unit for a moment, and then plug into power source again. Check the outlet by plugging in another device. No sound Increase the volume setting. Check connection to speakers. Check that you have selected the appropriate function: CD, TAPE, Tuner. Make sure mute is off. Make sure headphones are not plugged in. Check antenna connection. Move antenna. Turn off nearby electrical appliances, such as hair dryer, vacuum cleaner, microwave, fluorescent lights.
Maintenance
Disconnect the audio system from the power source before performing any maintenance.
Problem Solution
CD button will not respond, or does not change discs when you press DISC SKIP Switch to another function (TAPE, Tuner) and then back to CD.
Handling CDs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold CDs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. CDs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) CDs
EN
Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.
CD Player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician.
Cleaning CDs
Dirty CDs can cause poor sound quality. Always keep CDs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. If a CD becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on CDs. Also, never clean CDs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface
Distorted or Inspect the tape head, clean it if noisy tape necessary. recordings Remote control does not work Check that the batteries are properly installed. Replace weak batteries. Check the system is plugged into power source. Point the remote directly at the systems front panel. Move closer to the system. Remove any obstacles between the remote and the system.
Tape Player
To prevent deterioration of sound quality, periodically open the door of each deck and clean the magnetic heads, pinch roller, and capstan with a cotton bud dipped in alcohol. Also, demagnetize the head by playing a demagnetizing cassette (available through an audio equipment store). To protect recordings on one or both sides of a tape, remove the corresponding tab. If you later want to record on the tape, affix a piece of adhesive tape over the hole. Quit Slacking - A little bit of slack in your tapes can cause scratches on the tape, or worse yet, the tape could break. If you notice some slack in the tape, use a pencil to tighten it up before you insert it.
Side A Protection
A
Side B Protection
B
CD Lens Care
When your CD lens gets dirty it can also cause the system to output poor sound quality. To clean the lens you will need to purchase a CD lens cleaner which can maintain the output sound quality of your system. For instructions on cleaning the CD lens, refer to the ones accompanying the lens cleaner.
CD does not Check that CD is in the tray. play Check that CD label is facing up. Check that PAUSE mode is not on. Check that CD function is selected. Use CD lens cleaner. Clean the disc. Try another CD. CD sound skips Clean the disc. Check disc for warping, scratches, or other damage. Check if something is causing the system to vibrate. If so, move the system. Make sure the speakers are at least 3 feet away or on a different surface from the main unit.
10
11
Important Information
EN Safety Precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not use your System immediately after transporting it from a cold place to a warm place, as condensation may cause the system to malfunction. Keep your unit away from humid areas and abnormally hot places. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This compact disc player uses a laser to read the music on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. To keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens, do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping and splashing.
Headset Safety
Do not play your headset at high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use with extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air designed to let you to hear outside sounds, do not turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.
EN
Dont Infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia.
Technical Specification
Power supply: 120V~60Hz Dimensions ( H x W x D inches): Unit size - 12.2 x 12 x 15.4 Main Speaker - 12.2 x 8.5 x 7 Tape deck: Response curve: 125Hz-8kHz (-5dB) CD player: Response curve (+/- 2dB): 60Hz to 15 kHz Rating Plate: Look for it at the back of the set.
Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.
The descriptions and characteristics given in this document are given as a general indication and not as a guarantee. In order to provide the highest quality product possible, we reserve the right to make any improvement or modification without prior notice. The English version serves as the final reference on all products and operational details should any discrepancies arise in other languages.
12
13
EN
Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.
Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.
14
15
16
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 2
L
PROGSE T
IMPORTADOR Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5 0151
EXPORTER Thomson multimedia Inc. P.O. BOX 1976 Indianapolis, IN 46206-1976 2003 Thomson multimedia Inc. Trademark(s) Registered Marca(s) Registrada(s) Marque(s) dpose(s) 55641280 (REV. 0) (EN/F/E) www.rca.com www.rca.com/LatinAmerica Printed in China / Impreso en China
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 3
u s e r m a
U S T A N E O S I M U L
DISC
P L A Y
R CHANGE M S Y S T E A D
A N D L O
OP
*CLO S EN
CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE
RS
2622
ON
DISC SKIP
IR SENSOR
STANDBY
TUNER PRESET
STANDBY
PRESET TIMER EQ
DIGITAL
TUNING
L
GAME MP3
SOURCE
BAND
B. BOOST
OL VOLUME CONTR
DEMO
DECK DECK
1
PLAYBACK
RECORD PLAYBACK/
AUTOMATI
RS2622
It is important to read this instruction book prior to using your new product for the first time. Es importante leer este manual antes de usar por vez primera su euipo.
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 4
FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
Have a Blast- Just Not in Your Eardrums Make sure you turn down the volume on the unit before you put on headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level only after headphone are in place.
CAUTION
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 5
FCC Information
For Your Records
In the event that service should be required, you may need both the model number and the serial number. In the space below, record the date and place of purchase, and the serial number: Model No. Remote Control No. Date of Purchase Place of Purchase Serial No. in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide.
EN
Technical specification
Power Supply: 120V~60Hz Power consumption: 135 Watts
Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained
IMPORTER Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5
CONTENTS
FCC Information Getting started . . . . . . .3 General controls
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . .5 B Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Muting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Tape Player
Playing a Tape . . . . . . . . . .10 Continuous Play . . . . . . . . .10 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 From Tuner . . . . . . . . . . .10 From CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Tape to Tape . . . . . . . . . .10 From an Auxiliary Input .10
CD Player
Loading Discs . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Shuffling the Play Order . . .7 Sampling Tracks . . . . . . . . . .7 Repeating the Play Order . .8 CD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Setting Up a CD program . .8 Playing a Program List . . . . .8 Displaying the Program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Deleting a Program List . . . .8 Skipping a Disc . . . . . . . . . . .8 Searching through a CD . . .8
Display settings
Showing the Demonstration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Display Timer/Clock . . . . . . .6 Setting the Time . . . . . . . . .6 Setting the Timer . . . . . . . . .6 Activating the Timer . . . . . .6 Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Radio
Tuning to a Station . . . . . . .9 Using Presets . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Auto Preset Program (for FM only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Setting Presets . . . . . . . . . . .9 Suppressing Stereo Signal . .9
Sound Features
Using Preset Equalizer Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Creating a Custom Curve . . .7
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 6
Getting Started
EN
1. AM Loop Antenna Connector 2. Main Speaker Jacks 3. FM Antenna Jacks
3
AM LOOP
1
+ R + L -
Unpacking the system: You should have: one main unit (with 2 speakers); one remote control; one AM loop antenna; T-Type FM antenna wire; one users guide; one safety leaflet. owner registration card
To ensure sufficient ventilation, keep the spacings shown below free from other surfaces:
10cm / 4
75
10cm / 4
DISC
CHANGER
A N D L O A D S Y S T E M
S I M U L T A N E O U S
P L A Y
5cm / 2
CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE
10cm / 4
L
GAME MP3
ON
RS
2622
*CLO EN P
IR SENSOR
DISC SKIP
STANDBY
STANDBY
10cm / 4
E S
DIGITAL TUNING
TUNER PRESET
R
DIMMER
CLOCK
PROGSET
BAND
REPEAT
DEMO
AUTO PROG
X-SURR.
B. BOOST
VOLUME CONTROL
DECK
DECK
PLAYBACK/ RECORD
PLAYBACK
NOTE: Make sure the insulation is completely removed from the ends of the Antenna and speaker wires at all connection points.
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 7
General Controls
Main Unit
OPEN/CLOSE Opens or closes the disc tray. DISC SKIP Skips to the next CD in the tray. ON/STANDBY Turns power on or off (STANDBY mode). PHONES Jack for connecting headphones. SOURCE Selects the CD player/ tuner/ tape player/ external source DIMMER/DEMO Turns the feature demonstration on or off, adjusts display brightness.
5 DISC CHANGER
A N D L O A D S Y S T E M S I M U L T A N E O U S P L A Y
EN
ON
RS
2622
CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE
*CLO EN P
E S
DISC SKIP
IR SENSOR
STANDBY
STANDBY
L
PRESET EQ DIGITAL TUNING TUNER PRESET
GAME MP3
SOURCE
TIMER
R
DIMMER
CLOCK
PROGSET
BAND
REPEAT
DEMO
AUTO PROG
X-SURR.
B. BOOST
STOP / TUNER / PRESET Stops CD track, sets tune or preset mode. SKIP FORWARD Increments radio frequency, CD tracks or setting options. SKIP BACKWARD Decrements radio frequency, CD tracks EQ selects among the different or setting options PLAY/PAUSE Plays EQ modes. X-SURR. Press once to actior pauses CD. RECORD vate X-SURROUND. PLAY VOLUME Increases/ decreases CLOCK Shows clock time and REWIND volume. enters clock setting mode. FAST-FORWARD GAME MP3 Aux in for TIMER Enters timer setting STOP/EJECT mode and turns the mode on/off. various inputs. PAUSE BAND/AUTO PROG. Changes between FM and AM tuner bands. Enters autopreset program in FM mode. REPEAT - Selects among repeat modes. PROG./SET - Enters program or setting mode for CD and tuner Tip: In STANDBY mode (press mode. POWER off), the system disB BOOST Turns B BOOST on or plays the time. Press POWER to off. turn the system on in the previously used mode. Press CD, TAPE, TUNER, or AUX (Remote Only) to select the corresponding mode. Look at the display icons to identify the current mode.
DECK
1
VOLUME CONTROL
DECK
PLAYBACK/ RECORD
PLAYBACK
Tape Player
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 8
General Controls
EN
Remote Control
ON Turns power on or off (STANDBY mode). TUNER Selects tuner CD Selects CD player TAPE Selects tape player AUX Selects external input. B-BOOST Turns BASS BOOST on or off VOL+ or VOL- Increases/ decreases volume EQ Selects equalizer presets PLAY/PAUSE Plays or pauses current CD STOP Stops playing CD NEXT/FWD Increments CD track; searches through CD PREV/REV Decrements CD track; searches through CD (Press NEXT/FWD or PREV/REV to tune up/ down tuner frequency) DISC SKIP Skips to next CD REPEAT Repeats a track, CD, or all CDs MUTE mutes sound SHUFFLE Turns on/off random listening FM ST. Toggles between FM stereo and mono INTRO Turns INTRO mode on or off to play the first 10 seconds of each track. PRESET UP/DOWN Selects next/ previous preset station OPEN/CLOSE opens/closes cd tray door SLEEP selects the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off X-SURROUND enables/disables X-surround feature
TUNER CD
SOURCE
TAPE AUX
E Q
B.BOOS
ON
X-SURROUND
VOL
EV
PR
NE
XT
RE
V
VOL
FW
OPEN/CLOSE
STOP
REPEAT
FM ST.
DISC SKIP
INTRO
DNPRESETUP
SLEEP
RS
2622
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 9
Display Settings
EN
DISPLAY TIMER/CLOCK
Setting the Time
1. Press and hold CLOCK until the hour flashes on the display. 2. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD to set the hour and then press CLOCK to shift to minute digits. 3. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD to set the minute. 4. Press SET to save settings and STOP to quit setting. Note: When system is ON, you can press CLOCK to display the current time for about 2 seconds.
Sleep Mode
You can select the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off automatically. Press SLEEP on the remote to select among 120, 90, 60, 45, 30, 15 & 5 minutes. (Remote Only)
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 10
Sound Features
EN Using Preset Equalizer Curves
Press EQ on the main unit or on the remote to toggle among FLAT, ROCK, POP, JAZZ, CLASSIC & CUSTOM. The display shows briefly the selection.
Bass Boost
Press B.BOOST to turn on/off boosting the bass frequency.
MUTE
X-Surround
Press X-SURROUND to enjoy enriched sound quality. This feature gives you: 1. Better width and depth for vocal and instrumental sound. 2. More powerful presence for studio recording. 3. Enhanced surround effects with greater flexibility in positioning speakers.
TRE+08
CD Player
Loading Discs
1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD mode. 2. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the drawer. 3. Insert up to five discs with label face up. (Press DISC SKIP to rotate the disc carrier.) 4. Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the drawer. Loaded disc position icon lights.
Sampling Tracks
Press INTRO to play the first 10 seconds of each track on the current disc, all discs in the tray, or turn INTRO mode off. (Remote Only) (Note: You may also press REPEAT to select 1 disc or all discs before activating INTRO & SHUFFLE functions).
Playing Discs
Press PLAY/PAUSE to begin or pause playing, and STOP to stop playing. Select a specific disc by pressing DISCSKIP. Press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to select a specific track.
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 11
CD Player
Repeating the Play Order
Press REPEAT to repeat the current track, current disc, all discs, or turn REPEAT mode off.
EN
Setting Up a CD Program
You can program the CD player to play up to any 32 tracks on the CDs in the tray. 1. While the CD player is stopped, press PROG/SET to enter program mode. The system displays the next available program number: - - P:01, with - - flashing, prompts you for the first track in the program list. 2. Press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to select a track (press DISC SKIP to select a track from a different disc). 3. Immediately press PROG/SET to assign the selected track to the program number. After 3 seconds, you are prompted for the next track in the program list. (In CD program mode, PROG icon will be lit.)
Skipping a Disc
Press DISC SKIP.
Searching Through a CD
Press and hold SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to search through a CD as it is playing.
--P:01
Tips: You can create a program of up to 32 tracks. Press CD repeatedly to view elapsed track time, track number, track remain time and disc remain time(remote only). Caution: Do not push to force closing of the tray during CD playback or tray opening.
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 12
Radio
O
EN
RS
2622
CD-R / RW COMPATIBLE
*CLO EN P
E S
DISC SKIP
IR SENSOR
Setting Presets
1. Press TUNE/PRESET button to enter TUNER mode. 2. Press SKIP FORWARD / BACKWARD to access the desired frequency. 3. Press the PROG/SET button once. 4. The most recently accessed program location will be displayed. 5. If a different program location is preferred, press SKIP BACKWARD / FORWARD to move to the desired preset number (1-32). 6. Press PROG/SET to store the selected frequency at that preset.
STANDBY
DIGITAL TUNING
TUNER PRESET
DIMMER
CLOCK
PROGSET
BAND
REPEAT
DEMO
AUTO PROG
X-SURR.
B. BOOST
1. Press SOURCE to select TUNER. 2. Press BAND to select between AM or FM radio band.
Tip: Your audio system has 32 preset stations.
Tuning to a Station
Press SKIP FORWARD to select frequencies. / BACKWARD
Using Presets
87.50 MHz
The tuner can be in either TUNE or PRESET mode. When in PRESET mode, the PROG light is on. Press SKIP BACKWARD or SKIP FORWARD on the main system or PRESET UP or DOWN on the remote control to access the previous or next preset station. The display first shows the preset program number and after a few seconds, the frequency and preset program number will be displayed. (FMPR:01 is FM preset 1)
PR:01
Press and hold BAND button for 2 seconds to scan stations in FM band. The stations will then be stored as preset channels. A maximum 32 stations can be stored. Beware of your preset channels being erased accidentally because the scanning and storing process is automatic upon pressing the button. You can stop the automatic scan by pressing any button, but the erased stations cannot be recovered.
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 13
Tape player
VOLUME CONTROL
DECK
DECK
EN
PLAYBACK/ RECORD
PLAYBACK
Playing a Tape
Tip: You can play a tape from either deck.
1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TAPE. 2. Open the cassette door. 3. Insert a tape into the door and push the door closed. 4. Press REW /F.FWD to position the tape to the desired starting position. (Deck 1 Only) 5. Press PLAY to start playback .
From CD
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD. 3. Insert the disc(s) to be recorded. 4. Select the track, CD, or program to be recorded. 5. Press RECORD to begin recording. 6. CD begins to play. 7. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.
Tape to Tape
Continuous Play
1. Insert a tape into deck 2 and start playback. 2. Insert a tape into deck 1 and press PLAY and PAUSE together. 3. When the tape in deck 2 finishes playback, PAUSE at deck 1 will be released automatically and start playback.
1. Insert the destination tape in deck 1. 2. Insert the source tape into deck 2. 3. Press PAUSE and then RECORD on deck 1. 4. Press PLAY on deck 2. The playback and recording start simultaneously.
Recording
From Tuner
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TUNER and press BAND to access the desired radio band. 3. Tune to the station to be recorded. 4. Press RECORD to begin recording. 5. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.
10
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 14
Troubleshooting Tips
EN
Problem Solution
System will Check power cord for a secure not turn on connection. Unplug the unit for a moment, and then plug into power source again. Check the outlet by plugging in another device. No sound Increase the volume setting. Check connection to speakers. Check that you have selected the appropriate function: CD, TAPE, Tuner. Make sure mute is off. Check antenna connection. Move antenna. Turn off nearby electrical appliances, such as hair dryer, vacuum cleaner, microwave, fluorescent lights. Check that CD is in the tray. Check that CD label is facing up. Check that PAUSE mode is not on. Check that CD function is selected. Use CD lens cleaner. Clean the disc. Clean the disc. Check disc for warping, scratches, or other damage. Check if something is causing the system to vibrate. If so, move the system. Make sure the speakers are at least 3 feet away or on a different surface from the main unit.
Problem Solution
CD button Switch to another function (TAPE, will not Tuner) and then back to CD. respond, or does not change discs when you press DISC SKIP
Distorted or Inspect the tape heads, clean it if noisy tape neccessary. recordings Remote control does not work Check that the batteries are properly installed. Replace weak batteries. Check the system is plugged into power source. Point the remote directly at the systems front panel. Move closer to the system. Remove any obstacles between the remote and the system.
CD sound skips
11
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 15
Important Information
Disconnect the audio system from the power source before performing any maintenance.
Safety Precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not use your System immediately after transporting it from a cold place to a warm place, as condensation may cause the system to malfunction. Keep your unit away from humid areas and abnormally hot places. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This compact disc player uses a laser to read the music on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. To keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens, do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping and splashing.
EN
Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.
CD Player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician.
Tape Player
To prevent deterioration of sound quality, periodically open the door of each deck and clean the magnetic heads, pinch roller, and capstan with a cotton bud dipped in alcohol. Also, demagnetize the head by playing a demagnetizing cassette (available through an audio equipment store). To protect recordings one or both sides of a tape, remove the corresponding tab. If you later want to record on the tape, affix a piece of adhesive tape over the hole. Quit Slacking - A little bit of slack in your tapes can cause scratches on the tape, or worse yet, the tape could break. If you notice some slack in the tape, use a pencil to tighten it up before you insert it.
Side A Protection
A
Side B Protection
B
12
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 16
Important Information
EN Headset Safety
Do not play your headset at high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use with extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air designed to let you to hear outside sounds, do not turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.
Dont Infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia.
Technical Specification
Power supply: 120V~60Hz Dimensions ( H x W x D inches): Unit size - 12.2 x 12 x 15.4 inches Speaker - 12.2 x 9.4 x 7.7 inches Tape deck: Response curve: 125Hz-8kHz (-5dB) CD player: Response curve (+/- 2dB): 60Hz to 20 kHz Rating Plate: Look for it at the back of the set.
Handling CDs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold CDs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. CDs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) CDs
Cleaning CDs
Dirty CDs can cause poor sound quality. Always keep CDs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. If a CD becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on CDs. Also, never clean CDs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface
CD Lens Care
When your CD lens gets dirty it can also cause the system to output poor sound quality. To clean the lens you will need to purchase a CD lens cleaner which can maintain the output sound quality of your system. For instructions on cleaning the CD lens, refer to the ones accompanying the lens cleaner.
13
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 17
EN
14
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 18
Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.
15
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 19
EN
16
RS2622 EN
12/11/02
5:28 PM
Page 20
17
IC FUNCTION
RS2620
AUDIO SYSTEM: CD DRAWER: IC001 FAN8082 IC002 FAN8082 MAIN BOARD: IC001 TEA5757H IC300 AN7348K IC302 BA7755A IC401 TDA7440D POWER SUPPLY: IC501 IC502 TDA7296 TDA7296
FUCTION: Motor Drive Motor Drive AM/FM IC Cassette Driver Switch Tone Control and Audio Processor
DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y
IC FUNCTION
RS2622
AUDIO SYSTEM: CD DRAWER: IC001 FAN8082 IC002 FAN8082 MAIN BOARD: IC001 TEA5757H IC300 AN7348K IC302 BA7755A IC401 TDA7440D POWER SUPPLY: IC501 IC502 TDA7296 TDA7296
FUCTION: Motor Drive Motor Drive AM/FM IC Cassette Driver Switch Tone Control and Audio Processor
DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y
IC FUNCTION
RTDVD1
AUDIO AMPLIFIER: IC610 IC612 IC613 IC614 NJM4556A LM4766T LM4766T LM4766T Dual High Current Op-Amp Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y
DVD CONTROL BOARD: Individual ICs are not stocked for the DVD, replace the complete DVD assembly stock number; 257124 MAIN BOARD: IC74 IC75 IC84 IC86 IC87 IC88 KIA4558F LC78211 SM7346 KIA4558F KIA4558F KIA4558F Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Analog Switch 6 Channel Volume Control Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Y Y Y Y Y Y
MP3 and DSP: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 IC7 IC8 IC11 IC12 IC14 IC18 IC19 CS4228A TC74VHC574F TC74VHC574F AT27LV010A CS493263 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 CS8415A TC74VHC244MX TC74VHC244MX 24-Bit, 96 kHz Codec 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 1Meg EEPROM dts/Dolby Decoder Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp 96kHz Digital Audio Interface Receiver Octal Bus Buffer Octal Bus Buffer Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y
POWER SUPPLY: IC655 IC656 IC657 IC658 KIA7805API KA278R33 KIA7815PI KIA7915PI 5 volt Voltage Regulator 3.3 volt Voltage Regulator 15 volt Voltage Regulator -15 volt Voltage Regulator Y Y N Y
SYSTEM CONTROL and KEYBOARD: IC501 IC502 CXP82860-345Q M24C16WMN6 8 bit System Control Micro EEPROM Y Y
VIDEO BOARD: IC550 IC551 IC552 IC553 IC554 MM1501XN MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Y Y Y Y Y
IC FUNCTION
RTDVD1
AUDIO AMPLIFIER: IC610 IC612 IC613 IC614 NJM4556A LM4766T LM4766T LM4766T Dual High Current Op-Amp Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y
DVD CONTROL BOARD: Individual ICs are not stocked for the DVD, replace the complete DVD assembly stock number; 257124 MAIN BOARD: IC74 IC75 IC84 IC86 IC87 IC88 KIA4558F LC78211 SM7346 KIA4558F KIA4558F KIA4558F Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Analog Switch 6 Channel Volume Control Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Y Y Y Y Y Y
MP3 and DSP: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 IC7 IC8 IC11 IC12 IC14 IC18 IC19 CS4228A TC74VHC574F TC74VHC574F AT27LV010A CS493263 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 CS8415A TC74VHC244MX TC74VHC244MX 24-Bit, 96 kHz Codec 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 1Meg EEPROM dts/Dolby Decoder Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp 96kHz Digital Audio Interface Receiver Octal Bus Buffer Octal Bus Buffer Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y
POWER SUPPLY: IC655 IC656 IC657 IC658 KIA7805API KA278R33 KIA7815PI KIA7915PI 5 volt Voltage Regulator 3.3 volt Voltage Regulator 15 volt Voltage Regulator -15 volt Voltage Regulator Y Y N Y
SYSTEM CONTROL and KEYBOARD: IC501 IC502 CXP82860-345Q M24C16WMN6 8 bit System Control Micro EEPROM Y Y
VIDEO BOARD: IC550 IC551 IC552 IC553 IC554 MM1501XN MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Y Y Y Y Y
IC FUNCTION
RTD130
AUDIO AMPLIFIER: IC610 IC612 IC613 IC614 NJM4556A LM4766T LM4766T LM4766T Dual High Current Op-Amp Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y
DVD CONTROL BOARD: Individual ICs are not stocked for the DVD, replace the complete DVD assembly stock number; 257124 MAIN BOARD: IC74 IC75 IC84 IC86 IC87 IC88 KIA4558F LC78211 SM7346 KIA4558F KIA4558F KIA4558F Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Analog Switch 6 Channel Volume Control Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Y Y Y Y Y Y
MP3 and DSP: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 IC7 IC8 IC11 IC12 IC14 IC18 IC19 CS4228A TC74VHC574F TC74VHC574F AT27LV010A CS493263 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 CS8415A TC74VHC244MX TC74VHC244MX 24-Bit, 96 kHz Codec 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 1Meg EEPROM dts/Dolby Decoder Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp 96kHz Digital Audio Interface Receiver Octal Bus Buffer Octal Bus Buffer Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
POWER SUPPLY: IC655 IC656 IC657 IC658 KIA7805API KA278R33 KIA7815PI KIA7915PI 5 volt Voltage Regulator 3.3 volt Voltage Regulator 15 volt Voltage Regulator -15 volt Voltage Regulator Y Y N Y
SYSTEM CONTROL and KEYBOARD: IC501 IC502 CXP82860-345Q M24C16WMN6 8 bit System Control Micro EEPROM Y Y
VIDEO BOARD: IC550 IC551 IC552 IC553 IC554 MM1501XN MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Y Y Y Y Y
IC FUNCTION
RTD130
AUDIO AMPLIFIER: IC610 IC612 IC613 IC614 NJM4556A LM4766T LM4766T LM4766T Dual High Current Op-Amp Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier Audio Power Amplifier DATA SHEET Y Y Y Y
DVD CONTROL BOARD: Individual ICs are not stocked for the DVD, replace the complete DVD assembly stock number; 257124 MAIN BOARD: IC74 IC75 IC84 IC86 IC87 IC88 KIA4558F LC78211 SM7346 KIA4558F KIA4558F KIA4558F Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Analog Switch 6 Channel Volume Control Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Y Y Y Y Y Y
MP3 and DSP: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 IC7 IC8 IC11 IC12 IC14 IC18 IC19 CS4228A TC74VHC574F TC74VHC574F AT27LV010A CS493263 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 KIA4558 CS8415A TC74VHC244MX TC74VHC244MX 24-Bit, 96 kHz Codec 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 8-Bit D type Flip Flop 1Meg EEPROM dts/Dolby Decoder Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp Dual Low Noise Op-Amp 96kHz Digital Audio Interface Receiver Octal Bus Buffer Octal Bus Buffer Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
POWER SUPPLY: IC655 IC656 IC657 IC658 KIA7805API KA278R33 KIA7815PI KIA7915PI 5 volt Voltage Regulator 3.3 volt Voltage Regulator 15 volt Voltage Regulator -15 volt Voltage Regulator Y Y N Y
SYSTEM CONTROL and KEYBOARD: IC501 IC502 CXP82860-345Q M24C16WMN6 8 bit System Control Micro EEPROM Y Y
VIDEO BOARD: IC550 IC551 IC552 IC553 IC554 MM1501XN MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF MM1228XF Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Video Switch Y Y Y Y Y
ST24C02
Control Logic
64 X 32 Memory Core
X Decoder
32
32 Y Decoder
A2 A1 A0 Vss
3 2 1 4
ACK
BU2616F
XOUT XIN CE DA CK DO SD IFIN P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 18 Vss 17 PD2 16 PD1 15 VDD 14 FMIN 13 AMIN 12 P2 11 P1 10 P0
+ CH2 300
LA4270
1 NF1
2 INPUT1
3 RIP
4 GND
5 INPUT2
6 NF2
7 OUTPUT2
8 GND
9 VCC
10 OUTPUT1
48
AN7312
Vcc 14
R.F ALC IN 2 OUT 2 P.C. 2 NF 2 IN 2
13
12
11
10
1
GND
2
ALC Const.
3
ALC IN1
4
OUT
5
P.C.1
6
NF 1
7
IN 1
TA7291S
BD4742G
Vcc 5 Vout 4
1
IN2
2
Vcc
3
OUT2
4
NC
5
GND
6
VS
7
OUT1
8
VREF
9
IN1
1 NC 2 SUB 3 GND
PT2253 TC4052B
VDD 2X 1X 0X 3X
VSS
L-OUT1 L-IN1 A-GND L-IN2 L-OUT2 INH DCO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
16 15 14
VCC
R-OUT1 R-IN1 A-GND R-IN2 R-OUT2 U/D OSC
X-COM
A 10 7 VEE
16
15
14
13
12
11
PT2253
13 12 11 10 9
1 0Y
2 2Y
3 Y-COM
4 3Y
5 1Y
6 INH
49
Vss
B 9 8
24
1
KI3 KI2 KI1 KI0 *KI7 *KI6 *KI5 *KI4
LA1844
FM I input
23
2 24 23 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 AFC
Key Input Sweep
PT2222
REG
4 19 AM detector output 19
KI/O2
AM IF input
OSCI
11
GND
TU-LED
10
OSC.
OSCO
Encode
LA1844/M
Timing&Control
Vss
AM/FM IF 15
Output Control
50
18 18 FM demodulation out.
KI/O3
7 17 17
KI/O4
VDD
8 16 15 14
FM-DET
PLL input
12
10
22
13
11
SEL
LMP
CCS
REM
12
UPD780306
P25/SI0/SB0 P80/S39 P81/S38 P82/S37 P83/S36 P84/S35 P85/S34 P86/S33 P87/S32 P90/S31 P91/S30 P92/S29 P93/S28 P94/S27 P95/S26 P96/S25 P97/S24
S23
S22 82
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
P26/SO0/SB1 P27/SCK0 P70/SI2/RxD P71/SO2/RxD P72/SCK2/ASCK IC X2 X1 VDD1 XT1/P07 XT2 RESET P00/ INTP0/TI00 P01/ INTP1/TI01 P02/INTP2 P03/INTP3 P04/INTP4 P05/INTP5 P110/SI3 P111/SO3 P112/SCK3 P113/TxD P114/RxD P115 P116 P117 AVss P10/ANI0 P11/ANI1 P12/ANI2
S21 81
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
S20 S19 S18 S17 S16 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0 VSS0 VLC2 VLC1 VLC0 BIAS COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
VDD0
P13/ANI3
P14/ANI4
P15/ANI5
P16/ANI6
P17/ANI7
AVREF
VSS1
P35/PCL
51
P36/BUZ
P100
P101
P102
P103
P30/TO0
P31/TO1
P32/TO2
P33/TI1
P34/TI2
P37
SOURCE
POWER
PRESET -
IMPORTADOR COMERCIALIZADORA THOMSON DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V SIERRA CANDELA NO. 111, PISO 11 COL. LOMAS DE CHAPULTEPEC DEL. MIGUEL HIDALGO MEXICO D.F. C.P. 11000 R.F.C. CTM-980723 KS5
THOMSON multimedia Inc. 10330 N.Meridian St. Indianapolis, IN 46290 2001 Thomson multimedia Inc. Trademark(s) Registered Marca(s) Registrada(s) Marque(s) Depose 55135910 (EN/F/E) www.rca.com
u s e r m a n
VOLUME BAND/APP
D I G I TA L
BASS/TREBL
RPT/PGM
TEST
mp3
SURROUND TUNE TUNE +
PRESET +
PHONES
RTD130
FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture.
Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide
PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH DHHS RULES 21CFR SUBCHAPTER J, APPLICABLE AT DATE OF MANUFACTURE.
MANUFACTURED:
344A2634-0001
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme du NMB-003 du Canada.
CAUTION
Table of Content
FCC Information Getting Started
Unpacking the DVD Receiver . . . . . . . . .2 Unpacking the Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Inserting Batteries into Remote Control .3 Set Up and Maintenance of the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Protect your Components from Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Connecting to Audio-Visual Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Digital Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Connecting Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Connecting the Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Connecting the Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . .6 Positioning your Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Front Speaker Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Preferred Surround Placement . . . . . . . .8 Advanced Surround Setting . . . . . . . . . .8 Test Tone / Channel Balance . . . . . . . . . .9 Connecting for Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Factory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
CD/MP3 Player
MP3 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Loading and Playing an Audio CD . . . .30 On-Screen Banner Display for CD Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 On-Screen Display for MP3 playback . . .35
EN
Radio
Operating the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Language Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Limited Warranty (US) . . . . . . . . .46 Limited Warranty (Canada) . . . . .47
DVD Player
Basic Playback Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Quick Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Freeze Frame and Frame Advance . . . .19 Slow Motion Playback (DVD only) . . . . .20 On-Screen Banner Display . . . . . . . . . . .20 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Getting Started
Unpacking the DVD Receiver
You should receive the following items:
+
SOURCE SURROUND
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
mp3
D I G I TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
VOLUME
DVD
RPT/PGM
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
CD
/C H+
TAPE
VOL
PHONES
VOL
/
MUTE
IDE GU
CH-
O BAC
INFO
RD
SHIFT
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
SURR
SUBTITLE LANG
ANGLE
FRAME
u n i v e r s a l
one instruction book; one safety leaflet; one Quick Connection Guide
SUBWOOFER
D IS K
G
Getting Started
Inserting Batteries into Remote Control
Insert two AA(R6) batteries according to the + and - signs on the battery compartment. To use the remote control, point it directly at your receiver.
EN
About CDR, CDRW, Audio MP3, Compact Disk Audio (CDA), DVD Video, DVD Audio
This model RTD130 is compatible to play CDR, CDRW, Audio MP3, Compact Disk Audio (CDA), Video Compact Disk (VCD) and DVD Audio. When playback a DVD-Audio disk, this model is able to play any Dolby Digital 5.1 (AC3) Surround mix content only, but not the DVD-Audio Advanced Resolution Surround sound (6 channels) or Stereo sound (2 channels) content. Please watch the format of your disk and read the disk information for further contents information.
mp3
D I G I TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
VOLUME
10 cm/ 4"
RPT/PGM
PHONES
10 cm/4"
5 cm/ 2"
Do not connect to the AC power cords until all connections are completed. Do not use your set immediately after transferring it from a cold place to a warm place: there is risk of condensation. Do not expose your set to water and excessively high temperatures. After having disconnected your set, clean the case with a soft cloth, or with a slightly damp leather chamois. Never use strong solvents.
CD-R/RW discs that are recorded by personal computers or some CD-R/RW recorders may not be played on this unit due to the difference in recording platforms. Do not affix any type of labels to either side (recordable or labeled side) of a CD-R/RW disc as this may result in the unit malfunctioning. To avoid damages to the CD-R/RW disc, do not open the disc compartment door while the disc is being read. Do not load an unrecorded CD-R/RW disc into the unit. This may take a longer time to read the disc. Playback capability for CD-RW discs may vary due to variations in the quality of the CD-RW disc and the recorder used to create the disc.
Getting Started
Connecting to Audio-Visual Components
ANALOG INPUT
Alternatively, if you have no VCR or SAT (or you do wish to connect them to this unit), you can connect any other compatible components like TAPE player, TV to your DVD receiver via the VCR/SAT input. VCR
to VIDEO OUT (VCR) to VIDEO IN (VCR)
DIGITAL INPUT
Connect components capable of outputing Dolby Digital (e.g. SAT) or standard PCM (CD) format digital signals. Read section on "Input Signal Setting" under "Advanced Sound Control" carefully to adjust the matching input settings.
DI GI TAL AUDI O
VCR
OUT
A U D I O
to AUDIO IN (VCR)
VCR IN
DIGITAL OUTPUT
Connect components capable of recording digital signals (e.g. MD, CD recorder player) equiped with a optical input.
SAT
IN S A T
VCR OUT
SAT IN
COAXIAL IN
MON OUT
V I D E O
D I G I TA L
to VIDEO IN (TV)
TV
SAT
S-VIDEO
S-video provides the best connection for the video portion of the signal. When connecting S-video cable, a Composite video cable (yellow RCA connector) must also be used. If you use a S-video cable to connect any audio-visual components to your DVD receiver, you must also use a S-video cable between your TV and receiver. VCR audio/video out will have output signal in SAT, DVD/CD and TUNER modes. When VCR (source) is selected, there will be no audio/video signal from VCR audio/video out.
Getting Started
Digital Connections
If you have a SAT receiver DVD player or CD player with a digital output, you can make use of an optical digital connecting cord (not supplied) or coaxial digital connecting cord (not supplied) to carry the audio portion of the signal and enjoy Dolby Digital or digital stereo sound quality. One optical or coaxial cable is needed for each SAT receiver, DVD player or CD player. When optical or coaxial cable is used, the analog audio cables are still needed if recording through a tape or VCR is desired. This receiver provides one optical and one coaxial digital input for the connection of your components. Please connect your components (e.g. DVD, SAT or CD) to the appropriate digital inputs and select the appropriate source (see below).
VCR IN
1
R L FM 75
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operaton is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations
VCR
IN L OUT
SAT
IN
60Hz
S A T
SAT IN
R REAR
MON OUT V I D E O
S P E A K E R S
D I G I TA L
The AM and FM antennas connect to the AM and FM terminals on the systems back panel. They must be hooked up in order to receive clear reception.
NOTE
Optical and coaxial cables carry only the audio portion of the signal. A video connection must also be established by connecting a video cable to the (SAT) video input.
AM LOOP
Read instructions carefully when connecting components to the receiver. Digital In Jacks can accept Dolby Digital (AC-3), or PCM signals when compatible components are connected.
FM 75
OPTICAL DIGITAL IN (AUDIO) Optical Fiber Cable Connect to optical digital output of DVD, CD, SAT or other compatible devices. SAT / DVD / CD Player
SAT
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Connect to recording device like CD, CDRW player, DVD recorder, mini disc etc.
HINT
For FM reception, extend antenna to its full length and arrange the Antenna at different parts of the room until the reception is optimized. For AM reception, rotate the antenna horizontally to get better reception.
COAXIAL DIGITAL IN (AUDIO) Connect to coaxial digital output of DVD, CD, SAT or other compatible devices. SAT / DVD / CD
S A T
S P E A K E R S
CENTER FRONT
SUB
AM LOOP
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "Pro Logic 2" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ' 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
VCR IN
1
R L FM 75
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operaton is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations
VCR
IN L OUT
SAT
IN
60Hz
S A T
SAT IN
R REAR
MON OUT V I DE O
SPEAKER S
D I G I TA L
Getting Started
Connecting the Speakers
SUBWOOFER
To ease speaker connections, the speaker cords and the terminals are color-coded. Red/Black (Front Speakers), Blue/Black (Center Speaker) Grey/Black (Rear Speakers). Brown/Black (Subwoofer) Connect the speaker wire (red/black wire) to the back of L, R front speakers (red / black terminals) and to the corresponding color terminals on the rear of the receiver. Do the same for center speaker (with blue/black terminal), rear speakers (with grey/black terminals) and the subwoofer (with brown/black terminal).
FRONT SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
FRONT SPEAKER
L
RED / BLACK
CENTER FRONT R
SUB
RED / BLACK
Speaker Polarity
When connecting the speakers, make sure the polarities (+ speaker wire to + on the receiver) of speaker wires and terminals are matched. If the cords are reversed, the sound will be distorted and will lack bass (out of phase effect).
GREY / BLACK
REAR
GREY / BLACK
S P E A K E R S
REAR SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
Speakers
There are 6 speakers equipped with the unit (2 front, 1 center, 2 rear, 1 subwoofer). In order to enjoy good surround effects all six speakers need to be connected to the receiver At least two front speakers (left and right) are required. For better sound quality, Center speaker, rear speakers and Subwoofer should also be connected. Adding center and rear speakers will enhance surround effects. Adding a Subwoofer will increase bass response. If you want to enjoy full range of sound effects, it is a must to use the subwoofer with the speakers to maintain adequate bass signal.
Speaker cords
1 for each speaker, is needed for connection. Twist the stripped ends of speaker cord about 2/3 inch (15 mm). Press down on the tab to open the terminal and insert the wire. Snap the tab closed.
Antenna and Speaker Wire Connection
Getting Started
Positioning your speaker
1 Left, Right (Front Speakers)
They carry primarily music and sound effects
Alignment
Align the center speaker evenly with (A), or slightly behind (B), the left and right speakers, but not ahead of them.
EN
2 Center
In surround mode, the center speaker carries much of the dialogue as well as music and effects. It should be set between the left and right speakers.
Subwoofer
A subwoofer is designed to reproduce powerful low bass effects (explosions, the rumble of spaceships, etc.) which dramatically heightens involvement with the action on the screen. It is therefore recommended to connect subwoofers when small speakers are used.
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories
Advanced Setting
Angle
Placing the left and right speakers to form a 45-degree angle with your favorite viewing position will duplicate the soundtrack mixer's perspective.
Magnetic shielding
Speakers placed less than two feet from the TV set must be magnetically shielded in order to prevent picture distortion. Front and center speakers provided with RTDVD1 are magnetically shielded to protect your TV set. It is not recommended to place the rear speakers near the TV set.
3 1
1 3
Height
The mid- and high-frequency drivers of the three front speakers should be as close as possible to the same height. This often requires placing the center speaker directly atop (A) or beneath (B) the TV set.
A
Getting Started
Preferred surround placement
Location
If possible, place surround speakers to either side of the listening area, not behind it.
Height
If space permits, install surrounds 2-3 feet above viewers. This helps to minimize localization effects.
No adjacent walls
Surrounds can go on stands facing each other to approximate the preferred sidewall mounting (A), or to the sides or rear of the viewing area aimed upwards. In the latter case, they can go right on the floor, or preferably, a few feet off the floor such as on end tables (B).
Aiming
Aiming surrounds straight across the room, not down at viewers, helps create a more open, spacious surround sound field.
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories
Getting Started
Test Tone / Channel balance
Channel balance
Your receiver is equipped with a test signal generator for balancing the channels. As the signal "travels" from channel to channel, adjust the level controls until each channel plays at the same loudness level. (details see operation of test/setup)
EN
Using Headphones
To listen privately through your audio system, use the PHONES jack on the receiver. However, make sure you turn down the volume before you put on the headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level after headphones are in place. Once headphones are connected, HEADPHONE DOWNMIX 2 CHANNEL will scroll on display. This feature automatically converts multi-channel outputs to 2 channel stereo for your listening pleasure.
Factory Setting
The RTDVD1 is preset to the following setting when you first turn on the power Source = DVD/CD Volume setting = 45 dB Bass & Treble = 0 dB
NOTE
The system is equipped with Dolby Digital, and manufactured under License from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby Digital Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Pro Logic II and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
NOTE
All preset radio stations and surround sound setting will be lost after factory setting is restored.
11
13
12
10
SOURCE
SURROUND
mp3
D I G I TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
VOLUME
RPT/PGM
PHONES
14
Receiver Controls
1. POWER / STANDBY To turn the unit on/ off. When the system is turned on, the unit will go to Standby mode, then press the SOURCE button on the unit to power the unit up in the last mode used. When the unit is in standby mode, press the Source button to power on the unit. 2. Source Buttons To select input source. For example, DVD/CD, VCR1 etc. Press and hold for delay settings. 3. SURROUND Press repeatedly to select the surround sound setting or Digital Sound Processor (DSP) mode you want. Refer to Advanced Sound Control on page 16.) Press and hold to activate speaker Test Tone, use the Adjustment buttons on the remote to adjust the settings. 4. PRESET - / SKIP REVERSE To move back to the beginning/previous preset memory location in tuner mode. To skip to the previous track in CD mode and the beginning/previous chapter in DVD mode (only while playing). 5. PRESET + / SKIP FORWARD To go to the next preset memory location in tuner mode. To skip to the next track in CD mode and the next chapter in DVD mode (only while playing). 6. BAND /APP / RPT / PGM In Tuner mode, press to select between radio BANDS or press and hold to enter AUTO PROGRAM mode. In DVD/CD mode, press to select among REPEAT options (only while playing) or press and hold to enter PROGRAM mode (only in stop mode).
7. BASS/TREBLE To adjust BASS or TREBLE, press relevant button and turn the volume knob to adjust level. Press and hold for Random function in CD/MP3 playback. 8. TUNE - / FAST REVERSE In tuner mode, press to tune down on the radio frequency or press and hold to to search down . In CD and DVD mode, press to fast reverse. Press repeatedly to vary the speed of fast reverse. In pause mode, press for slow reverse. 9. TUNE + / FAST FORWARD In tuner mode, press to tune up the radio frequency or press and hold to search down. In CD and DVD mode, press to fast forward. Press repeatedly to vary the speed of fast forward. In pause mode, press for slow forward. 10. VOLUME Turn the knob to adjust volume level. 11. PLAY/PAUSE To play and pause DVD/CD playback. 12. STOP/ EJECT To stop DVD/CD playback. Press to eject disc tray. 13. Display To display current status of the receiver. 14. PHONES Plug your headphones (not supplied) into it for your private enjoyment. Speakers will be off when phones are inserted.
10
EN
1
VCR 1 ON OFF TV
DVD
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
CD
TAPE
/C H+
VOL
VOL
4
MUTE
IDE GU
5
M RD
CH-
O BAC
INFO
D IS K
G
SHIFT
6 7
OK
FUNCTION
9
MENU CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
10
SURR
14
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME
13
u n i v e r s a l
12 11
NOTE
The remote buttons GUIDERDM, INFO & INPUTSEEK do not work in tuner mode.
1. ON/OFF To turn on or off the receiver and other auxiliary components (see page 14 Using the Remote to Control Additional Components). 2. Source Buttons To turn on and select various audio/ video sources. 3. CH+, CH- (Channel Buttons) To select programmed stations in TUNER mode. To skip to the next or previous chapter or track in DVD, CD & MP3 mode. 4. VOL (Volume Buttons) To adjust the volume.
After using AUDIO, DIGITAL, LEVEL or SURR keys on the remote control in DVD/CD function mode, you must press the DVD/CD or SHIFT key to use other DVD keys.
11
LS LFE RS
CHAP
Chapter location at which DVD is currently at.
AUTO D I G I TA L
Auto programming in tuner mode is activated Audio output is in Dolby Digital mode. (For DVD only)
PROG. PRO.LOGIC
Program mode is activated. Audio output is in Dolby PL II Movie, Dolby PL II Music or Dolby Prologic mode. TUNED
INTRO
Track sampling activated.
ST RANDOM
Random playback mode activated. Tuner stereo signal detected.
KHz / MHz
Currently in pause mode. Tuner frequency unit.
TITLE
C
TRACK
Track number being played.
12
EN
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
POWER PRE
DVD VCR 2 AMFM SATCABLE
SOURCE
SURROUND
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
DVD CD
/C H+
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
TAPE
WER PRESET PRESET +
CD
/C H+
TAPE
SOURCE
SURROUND
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
DVD
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
ER PRESET PRESET +
CD
/C H+
TAPE
Example 1: If you connect a VCR player to the VCR input (audio + video) on the receiver and press the SOURCE button until VCR1/ANL shows on the display. You will be able to have the sound and image transmitted by the VCR.
Standby: when the receiver is on, press the ON/OFF on the remote to return to standby mode. To switch off the unit completely, press the POWER button on the receiver.
SOURCE
SURROUND
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
NOTE
Your receiver has a back up memory to keep your settings like preset radio station for about 2 weeks in case electricity cut occurs. If the receiver is unplugged for more than 2 weeks, all the settings will be lost and re-setting will be necessary.
DVD
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
ER PRESET PRESET +
CD
/C H+
TAPE
Example 2: Based on example 1, the VCR input is selected. If DVD is selected, image and sound from the DVD receiver source will replace the VCR.
SOURCE
SURROUND
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
DVD
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
ER PRESET PRESET +
CD
/C H+
TAPE
13
3. Press and hold the corresponding Source Button (like VCR1, SAT/CABLE, TV) on the remote while entering the code from the code list using the Number Buttons.
MENU CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
DVD VCR 2 AMFM SATCABLE
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
CD
/C H+
TAPE
INPUT SEEK REVERSE
0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
When a source is selected, the source name will be shown on the display. Example: Press VCR to select VCR as the source to the amplifier. 4. Release the component button, then press ONOFF to see if the component will turn off.
VCR 1 ON OFF TV
DVD
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
CD
/C H+
TAPE
LS LFE RS
5. If this does not work, repeat steps 3 and 4 by trying to use the next code (if available) listed for the brand of your component until the component responds to the remote command.
NOTE
1. Your receiver has a built in tuner. Just connect the appropriate antenna on the back of the receiver and you will be able to listen to radio stations. (See details in Tuner section) 2. The receiver is also equipped with DVD/CD player. Press the SOURCE button on the main unit or DVD button on the remote to activate the feature. 3. Other sources can be connected to this unit (VCR, SAT etc). 4. Refer to the "Connecting To Audio-Visual Components" section for details on connection.
NOTE
Once your remote is encoded, you can press ON/OFF on the remote once to turn off the component and then followed by the second time quickly to turn off the receiver (i.e. this unit). If you only want the receiver to be turned off, select FM/ AM while the unit is ON before pressing ON/OFF.
HINT
This remote may not operate all models of the brands shown. If batteries are removed from the battery compartment of the remote control, all memory will be lost. You need to re-enter all previously programmed codes again. The buttons on the remote may not work correspondingly with those on other brand components. Experiment with the remote and your components to see which buttons work. If only a few functions operate, check to see if another code set will work with more buttons.
14
Dolby Digital
The Dolby Digital mode lets you enjoy full digital surround from software processed in the Dolby Digital format. Dolby Digital provides better sound quality and more powerful presence than conventional Dolby Surround. This unit is equipped with Dolby Digital 5.1-channel so that you can enjoy enhanced full digital surround sound. Being different from Dolby Pro Logic in which only four channels ( Front Left, Front Right, Centre and Rear ) are used, the new system provides stereo separation of the rear speakers (Rear-Right, Rear-Left ). These 5 channels, together with the subwoofer channel for bass sounds ( counted as 0.1 channel ), constitute as 5.1-Channel ( or 6 Channels ) Input for Dolby Digital that brings you the most sophisticated sound enjoyment.
EN
Center Speaker
Subwoofer
Listening Zone
This surround system reproduces theater-like surround sound from Dolby-encoded software. The 3 Stereo mode will redirect the Surround signals to the front left and right speakers when only the front and center speakers are used.
Center Speaker
Listening Zone
15
Night Mode
By using Dynamic Range Compression technology (pressing SHIFT and OK), you can enjoy enhanced Dolby Digital sound quality at night without interrupting your roommates or neighbors. Night Mode will compress the difference in volume between normal voices and sound like explosions, while still enjoying a Dolby Digital enable component (DVD, SAT). Night Mode can be activated by pressing the SHIFT button then the OK button repeatedly until NORMAL appears on the display. While Normal is still on the display, press the LEFT or RIGHT Adjustment buttons on the remote control,around the OK button, on the remote control until you select the desired mode. Night mode can also be activated by pressing the AUDIO button, then OK button repeatedly then LEFT or RIGHT Adjustment buttons. There are three modes (NORMAL, SOFT, SOFTER) for you to choose the extents of compression.
NOTE
Only SAT input setting can be changed to coaxial or optical. SOURCE SAT DVD/CD VCR1 AVAILABLE INPUT ANL/Optical/Coaxial Built-in ANL/ - / -
CAUTION!
DO NOT CONNECT A LD PLAYER WITH RF COAXIAL OUTPUT TO YOUR COAXIAL INPUT.
Analog Input
Select this setting to play analog signals from a cassette deck, VCR or SAT.
Default Settings
Source/ Source/ Input DVD/CD SAT VCR TUNER If Digital Input (optical or coaxial) is selected Dolby Digital Dolby Digital/ N/A N/A If PCM bitstream If Analog Input selected
NOTE
SAT and VCR are just generic names. You can connect other compatible audio/video components to these inputs like TV, TAPE, MINI DISC, CD-RW player, etc.
PRO-LOGIC II PRO-LOGIC 2 MOVIE MOVIE PRO-LOGIC II PRO-LOGIC 2 MOVIE MOVIE N/A PRO-LOGIC 2 MOVIE N/A PRO-LOGIC 2 MOVIE
The receiver will keep the last selection in memory as long as it doesnt enter standby mode.
16
Speaker Configurations
You can also change the delay of the speakers by pressing and holding the SOURCE button. Available Selections: Front Speaker distance Center Speaker distance Rear Speaker distance 0-40 ft 0-40 ft 0-40 ft
EN
Pressing SOURCE repeatedly while the display is still showing speaker distance setup. Set speaker selections or speakers distance by pressing PRESET +/ PRESET - on the main unit or the LEFT / RIGHT arrows on the remote control.
NOTE
Always use the subwoofer for optimum sound quality.
SOURCE
SURROUND
mp3
IDE GU
RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
PRESET -
PRESET +
1
C
2
C
3
C
Advanced Setting
Factory Default Setting
The receiver speaker distance default settings are the following:
Front Left Front Left
Center
C ch L/R L/R
SUR
SUR
Rear Left
Rear Left
15 ft 15 ft 10 ft
CH
17
Speaker Icons
The receiver shows you the speakers settings on the display with the following icons:
Front Speakers
SOURCE SURROUND
LFE
Subwoofer Present
2. While the Display is showing FRNT 15 FT, press PRESET + or PRESET - on the main unit or LEFT or RIGHT arrow on the remote control to adjust the delay setting.
SOURCE SURROUND
MUTE
O BAC
IDE GU
RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
PRESET -
PRESET +
MENU
FUNCTION
CLEAR
D
G
mp
CH-
SOURCE
SURROUND
SOURCE
SURROUND
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
It is important to note, however, that not all Dolby Digital sources are encoded with the full complement of five channels plus LFE*. Speaker icons show how many and which speaker you have enabled (See Fine Setting of the Speakers) and the letters inside the speaker icons show which channel is present in the source information. For example, the diagram shown means you have all the five speakers and subwoofer enabled and the digital sources you played have five channels plus LFE complemented. (Dolby Digital 5.1 Channels) * LFE stands for Low Frequency Effect. The indication LFE appears if the digital source contains LFE information. In this case, the bass signal will be delivered to the subwoofer, offering more dynamic deep bass sound effects. If the letter is flashing, the signal is either too weak or just gone.
DVD
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
CD
/C H+
TAPE
PRESET -
PRESET +
5. When set up is done, wait for 5 seconds to automatically save your settings or press any source key to save your selection and set up mode.
18
DVD Player
Basic Playback Features
1. Press SOURCE on the main unit until DVD/CD appears on the display or DVD source key on the remote to select DVD/CD input source. Press STOP once to stop playback and go into resume mode.
REPEAT
RANDOM
PROGRAM
EN
0
D I G I TA L
BAND/APP
PLAY
ANT-FMS FORWARD
RPT/PGM
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
SOURCE
SURROUND
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
SURR
ER PRESET PRESET +
CD
/C H+
TAPE
NOTE
L C R LS LFE RS
RESUME MODE: The next time PLAY is pressed, the unit will begin playback at the location where it was last stopped. Press STOP on the remote control to cancel the resume mode.
D I G I TA L
BAND/AP
2. Open disc tray for loading discs with label side facing up. Press again to close it.
RPT/PGM
Quick search
1. While playing a disc, press REVERSE on the remote control to scan backwards through the disc. Press FORWARD on the remote for scanning forward. Press repeatedly to change searching speed to 1,2 or 3 times for VCD and 1,2,3 or 4 for DVD. 2. Press PLAY at any time to resume normal playback.
C C
TUNE -
3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the unit or PLAY on the remote control to start playback Press PLAY/PAUSE on the unit or PAUSE to pause playing during playback. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PLAY on the remote to resume normal playback.
REPEAT
RANDOM
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
SURROUND
mp3
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
PROGRAM
1
RECORD STOP
1 2
P AUSE AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL SURR
SURROUND
mp3
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
PRESET +
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
SURR
PRESET +
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME
Press SKIP REVERSE to go back to the previous chapter or SKIP FORWARD to move to the next chapter.
SOURCE
SURROUND
mp3
VOL
CD
/C H+
TAPE
PRESET -
PRESET +
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
D IS K
VOL
3. Press SHIFT then press SURR/FRAME repeatedly to move backward in still frame.
REPEAT
RANDOM
G
SHIFT
PROGRAM
INFO
SURROUND
mp3
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
SURR
PRESET +
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME
n i v e r s a l
19
DVD Player
Slow motion playback (DVD only)
1. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PAUSE in the remote control to freeze the picture during playback.
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
SURROUND
mp3
INPUT SEEK REVERSE
0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
SURR
PRESET +
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME
2. Advance picture in slow motion. Press FAST FORWARD on the unit or FORWARD on the remote control for slow motion in forward direction and FAST REVERSE or REVERSE in reverse direction. Press repeatedly to change speed to 1/16 times, 1/8 times, 1/4 times and 1/2 times.
C C
Subtitles
Bookmarks
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
A L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
INPUT SEEK REVERSE
0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
RPT/PGM
RECORD STOP P AUSE
Time indicator
TUNE -
TUNE +
SURR
SUBTITLE LANG
ANGLE
FRAME
General use
3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PLAY on the remote control to resume normal playback.
7
REPEAT
1. Press INFO on the remote control during playback to show on-screen banner.
V
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
SURROUND
mp3
INPUT SEEK REVERSE
0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD MUTE
/
M RD
CH-
O BAC
SHIFT
IDE GU
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
INFO
SURR
OK
PRESET +
SUBTITLE LANG ANGLE FRAME FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows on the remote control to move cursor on the banner. Selected feature icon will be highlighted.
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
IDE GU
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
IDE GU
M RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
20
D IS K
G
D IS K
G
D IS K
G
DVD Player
Selecting a title
1. Refer to previous page General use to open the title menu. 2. Enter title number using the number keys on the remote control. Add 0 in front of single-digit title number (e.g. 9 = 09). 2. Press SHIFT and DIGITAL/LANG or OK repeatedly until the audio language you want appears on the banner.
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD
VOL
EN
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
D IS K
VOL
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
G
SHIFT
SURR
IDE GU
OK
u n i v e r s a l
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
VOL
CH-
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
MUTE
O BAC
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
IDE GU
RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
FUNCTION
NOTE
Some discs have one title only.
NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with multiple audio tracks.
Selecting a chapter
1. Refer to previous page General use to open the title menu. 2. Enter chapter number using the number keys on the remote control. Add 0 in front of single-digit chapter number (e.g. 9 = 09)
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
CH-
O BAC
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
DM
SHIFT
INFO
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
IDE GU
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
NOTE
The chapter feature will not work if the disc is not formatted with separate chapters.
VOL
D IS K
D IS K
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
SURR
IDE GU
OK
SUBTITLE LANG
ANGLE
FRAME
u n i v e r s a l
FUNCTION
NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with subtitles.
D IS K
G
VOL
VOL
21
DVD Player
Selecting camera angle
1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the camera angle menu.
Using bookmarks
The bookmark feature allows you to mark a point on the disc that you can go to quickly. You can store up to 9 bookmarks.
Adding bookmarks
2. Press SHIFT and LEVEL/ANGLE to select the camera angle you want.
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD
VOL
VOL
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
D IS K
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
G
SHIFT
SURR
OK
u n i v e r s a l
FUNCTION
2. Use the arrows on the remote to move the cursor (yellow frame) to the Mark check line, then press OK to add bookmark when you reach the scene you want to do so.
MUTE
O BAC
IDE GU
/
RD
CH-
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
SHIFT
INFO
OK
IDE GU
IDE GU
OK
NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with multiple angles.
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
1
C
2
C
3
C
3. To add another bookmark, move the cursor to the right with arrow button and then press OK when you reach another scene you want to do so. 4. Move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.
Recalling bookmarks
1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the bookmark menu. 2. Use the arrows on the remote to move cursor (yellow frame) to the Go To check line and to the bookmarked scene you want to recall. 3. Press OK to recall bookmarked scene. 4. Move cursor by using the arrows to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.
Clearing bookmarks
The bookmarks are cleared each time a disc is removed from the player or when the power is turned off completely. If all 9 bookmarks are in use, you can still mark new scenes but the previous bookmarks will be erased starting from the earliest one.
22
DI
G
DVD Player
Repeat (During Playback Only)
1. During playback, press the RPT/PGM button on the main unit or SHIFT and 7/REPEAT repeatedly on the remote control to select among the repeat modes - Repeat Disc > Repeat Title > Repeat Chapter > Repeat Off > (Repeat Chapter). Selected mode is displayed in the banner display on screen.
EN
1
C
2
C
3
C
TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
7
RPT/PGM
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
2. The box under Title will be highlighted automatically. Use the arrows on the remote to select title and chapter.
D IS K
0
PLAY
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
TUNE -
TUNE +
RECORD STOP P AUSE
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
O BAC
INFO
IDE GU
IDE GU
SHIFT
SHIFT
INFO
OK OK
NOTE
Random playback is not available in DVD mode.
1
C
2
C
3
C
3. Add will be highlighted automatically after chapter is selected. Press OK to add selected track and chapter(s) onto playlist.
/
MUTE
CHO BAC
IDE GU
M RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
RPT/PGM
TUNE -
TUNE +
4. Move to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return normal playback with program saved), then press OK to start program playback or return to stop mode.
IDE GU
MENU CLEAR MUTE
DI
VOL
D IS K
IDE GU
1 4
C
2 5
C
3 6 9
PROGRAM
OK
M RD
SHIFT
INFO
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
FUNCTION
OK
O BAC
INFO
SHIFT
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
MENU
FUNCTION CLEAR
IDE GU
OK
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
1
C
2
C
3
C
MENU
CLEAR
FUNCTION
1
C
2
C
3
C
NOTE
You can select at maximum 32 items by repeating steps 2 - 3.
RD
SHIFT
INFO
CH-
O BAC
DI
G
DI
G
ANT-FMS FORWARD
VOL
23
DVD Player
Delete program
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT and 9/PROGRAM to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the arrows on the remote to select and highlight the programmed item you want to delete on the playlist.
MENU MUTE
O BAC
3. Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrows to select Title or Chapter, then the UP and DOWN arrows to select the number.
MUTE
O BAC
IDE GU
M RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
FUNCTION
/
RD
CLEAR
CH
1
C
2
C
3
C
SHIFT
INFO
IDE GU
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
4. Use the LEFT and DOWN arrows to highlight Insert and then press OK.
RD
D
G
CH
1
C
2
C
3
C
SHIFT
INFO
MUTE
IDE GU
OK
IDE GU
RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
FUNCTION
/
MUTE
CH-
DI
MENU
O BAC
IDE GU
M RD
SHIFT
INFO
1
C
2
C
3
C
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
5. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to delete additional items. 5. Use the arrows to select and highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.
Cancel program
Program will be cancelled when; 1. disc tray is opened; 2. power is turned off; 3. STOP is pressed twice. The red PGM indicator will disappear on display and player will resume normal playback mode. Nevertheless, the program will remain in memory and can be recalled by pressing PROGRAM again.
Insert chapter
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT and 9/PROGRAM to display program edit playlist.
2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select and highlight item on the playlist where you want to insert a chapter before it.
MUTE
O BAC
IDE GU
M RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
24
CH-
MUTE
O BAC
CH-
O BAC
DI
G
G G G
DVD Player
Set up menu
Audio language
This step will define the default audio language. Choosing an audio language from the on-screen banner display will only overwrite this setting temporarily.
NOTE
After using AUDIO, DIGITAL, LEVEL or SURR keys on the remote control in DVD/CD function mode, press the DVD/CD or the SHIFT key to use other DVD keys.
EN
NOTE
If language selected is not available on disc, the language designated as default by each disc will be selected..
General use
1. Press MENU in stop mode to display the set up menu on screen. The menu shows current settings.
NOTE
if you press during disc playback, the discs own menu will be displayed.
RD
SHIFT
INFO
IDE GU
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
2. Use UP and DOWN arrows to select language and then press OK.
For languages other than options available: 3. Press DOWN to select Other and then press OK.
2. Use arrow buttons to highlight options and press OK to open selected menu.
D IS K
/
MUTE
CH-
/
MUTE
CH-
O BAC
O BAC
INFO
IDE GU
IDE GU
M RD
SHIFT
M RD
SHIFT
INFO
DI
G
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
4. Enter language code into boxes and then select OK to return to main menu. Press OK on the remote.
/
CHO BAC
3. Press LEFT arrow to go back to the previous menu or press GO BACKDISC to exit the setup menu completely.
DI
MENU
CLEAR
MUTE
IDE GU
1 4
2 5
C
3 6 9
PROGRAM
RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
/C H+
O BAC
7
VOL
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
FUNCTION
SHIFT
INFO
IDE GU
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
MENU
CLEAR
/
FUNCTION MUTE
RD
CH-
D I SC
OK
1
C
2
C
3
C
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
MENU
CLEAR
IDE GU
1
C
2
C
3
C
OK
DI
G
VOL
25
DVD Player
Subtitle language
This step will define the default subtitle language. Choosing a subtitle language from the on-screen banner display will only overwrite this setting temporarily. 4. Enter language code into boxes and then select OK to return to main menu. Press OK button on the remote.
IDE GU
MUTE
IDE GU
OK
DM
SHIFT
INFO
FUNCTION
OK
NOTE
If language selected is not available on disc, the language designated by each disc as default will be selected.
MENU
CLEAR
FUNCTION
1
C
2
C
3
C
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
Menu language
This step will define the language of menus and other short messages shown on screen. 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open menu language menu.
2. Press UP and DOWN arrow to select language and then press OK.
D IS K
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
O BAC
INFO
IDE GU
IDE GU
SHIFT
SHIFT
INFO
DI
2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll the selections and select the language and then press OK to return to main menu.
3
C
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
26
RD
INFO
CH-
O BAC
DI
G
SHIFT
DVD Player
Rating (Parental control)
This step will disable the playing of some DVDs (especially U.S. type) which are not suitable for some audience, e.g. children. Such kind of DVDs is encoded with a specific rating level. If the rating level of the disc is higher than the preset level (to be set in this step), the playing will be prohibited unless the password (see next step) is entered. 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the rating menu.
EN
2. Select Rating and then press OK to return to main menu. Ratings highlighted in blue require password.
D IS K
2. Select Set Password and press OK. 3. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK.
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
O BAC
INFO
IDE GU
IDE GU
SHIFT
SHIFT
INFO
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
The rating systems is based on information encoded on the DVD disc being played, so movies may carry a rating symbol, the disc may or may not contain that rating in its software. In addition to the five standard (MPAA) rating symbols of G (level 2), PG (Parental Guidance, level 4), PG13 (Parental Guidance and 13 years old, level 4), R (Restricted, level 6) and NC17 (from 17 years old, level 7), the DVD will accommodate a total of 8 rating steps, as set by the DVD makers. These additional steps allows for more critical control of program playback for all audiences. Level 8: All DVDs can be played (Factory preset). Level 7 to 2: DVDs for general audiences/ children can be played. Level 1: DVDs for children can be played, DVDs for adults/ general audiences are prohibited.
DI
G
27
DVD Player
NOTE
When incorrect password is entered, new password menu appears and you can enter and confirm password again. A lock icon shows on unit display when password is required to view rated discs. Important: keep the password in a safe place or remember it reliably as access to rated discs or rating/ password menus requires the correct password. 4. Use the number buttons to enter new password and then press OK. 5. Repeat the above step to confirm password and return to password menu. Use the LEFT arrow to return to the main menu.
Change password
Current password must be entered first to change password. 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the password menu.
Clear password
2. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK.
/
MUTE MENU CLEAR
RD
1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the password menu. 2. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK. 3. Move up or down the menu using the UP or DOWN arrows and select Clear Password. Use the LEFT arrow to return to the main menu.
CH-
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
1
C
2
C
3
C
IDE GU
OK
4
C
5
C
6
FUNCTION
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
MENU
CLEAR
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
1
C
2
C
3
C
3. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to select Change Password and then press OK.
D IS K
K K
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
O BAC
INFO
IDE GU
IDE GU
SHIFT
SHIFT
INFO
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
28
DI
G
DI
G
DVD Player
TV aspect
This step selects the TV aspect, wide-screen (16:9) or conventional (4:3). 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the TV aspect menu.
Dynamic range
This step enables Dolby Digital recordings to be played back with full dialogue intelligibility while reducing peak levels and increasing low levels by 1/4 to 1/3. This smooth level compression prevents abrupt loud transitions from disturbing others without the impact of the digital source perceptibly. This function only works with Dolby Digital DVD and in conjunction with Night mode (see p.16): - when dynamic range is off, normal audio range is selected. - when dynamic range is on and Night mode is off, normal audio range is selected. - Dynamic compression is activated only when dynamic range on DVD and night mode is on. 1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the Dynamic Range menu.
EN
2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select TV aspect and then press OK to return to main menu.
D IS K
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
O BAC
INFO
IDE GU
IDE GU
SHIFT
SHIFT
INFO
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
DI
G
- For 16:9 movie you will get Only PCM data (Stereo, 2ch.) will be output.
If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, - if you select 4:3 letterbox for 16:9 movie, you will get
- if you select 4:3 Pan Scan for 16:9 movie, you will get (the left and right edges are hidden)
2. Select Dynamic range on/ off and then press OK to return to main menu.
29
CD / MP3 Player
MP3 Recommendations
Use .mp3 as the extension when converting audio files into MP3 for saving onto CD-R(W) or CD-ROM, e.g. Rocky08.mp3. Do not use any other extension e.g. .doc, .pdf. Do not use the .mp3 extension for other text or non-audio data files as this may result in serious malfunction and harmful noise interference. Many common CD creator softwares can make files compatible for the system but do not forget to finalize your disc after creation. This set cannot read DirectCD recordings. In order to get audio CD quality, you need to record your MP3 CD at 128 kbps. You can record up to 256 kbps. Beyond 256 kbps, the unit might not read the CD. Do not combine CD Audio and MP3 tracks onto a CD-R(W) or CD-ROM. The player will only playback CD audio tracks from mixed CD formats.
BA
RP
The disc will be read to detect whether an audio CD or MP3 CD has been inserted.
NOTE
If the CD is a MP3 audio CD, reading may take up to 1 minute.
NOTE
ID3 tag (Album, song, artist name) is not supported. If over 400 items (songs/folders) are on the disc, only the first 400 songs can be played. Resume function does not operate in MP3 mode. 2. Playback begins automatically after the disc has been read. An audio CD CD or MP3 icon MP3 will show on the left of the display. 3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PAUSE on the remote control to pause playback. Press PLAY/PAUSE again on the main unit or PLAY on the remote to resume normal playback. The CD/MP3 playback function works in a similar way as the features available for DVD . Press SOURCE on the main unit or DVD source key on the remote to select DVD/CD input source.
OUND
mp3
REPEAT
PROGRAM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
ET +
SURR
SUBTITLE LANG
ANGLE
FRAME
n i v e r s a l
SOURCE SURROUND
VCR 1 ON OFF TV
DVD
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
CD
TAPE
/C H+
LS LFE RS
ER PRESET PRESET +
LS LFE RS
30
CD / MP3 Player
4. Press SKIP REVERSE on the main unit or CH- on the remote to return to the previous track. Press SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or CH + on the remote to go to the next track.
SOURCE SURROUND
Repeat
There are 3 repeat options for CD playback. Repeat DISC Repeat Track Standard play (for MP3) REPEAT REPEAT TRACK REPEAT OFF (for audio CD)
EN
mp3
CD
/C H+
TAPE
VOL
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
D IS K
PRESET -
PRESET +
VOL
The corresponding icon will be shown on the top of the display. 1. Press RPT/PGM on the main unit or SHIFT and number 7 / REPEAT repeatedly to toggle among repeat options. When playing an audio CD Repeat can only be activated while playing.
5. Press STOP/EJECT on the main unit or STOP on the remote control to end playback.
D I G I TA L
BAND
INPUT SEEK REVERSE
0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
G I TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
RPT/
RECORD STOP P AUSE
RPT/PGM
TUN
SURR
SUBTITLE LANG
ANGLE
FRAME
TUNE -
TUNE +
u n i v e r s a l
VOL VOL
MENU
CLEAR
1
D IS K
C
2
C
3
C
IDE GU
NOTE
When playback is interrupted, the location at which it stopped will be memorized. Playback will resume at the position it was last stopped. Resume playback does not work on MP3 music.
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
1. Press and hold BASS/TREBLE on the main unit or press SHIFT and number 8 / RANDOM for random playback.
CLEAR
VOL
VOL
1
C
2
C
3
C
D IS K
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
IDE GU
OK
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
0
RPT/PGM
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
TUNE -
TUNE +
AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL SURR
NOTE
Random playback does not work on MP3 music.
2. Press PLAY on the main unit or the remote to resume normal playback.
OUND
mp3
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
SET +
RECORD STOP P AUSE
SURR
31
CD / MP3 Player
On- screen banner display for CD playback
Track Intro icon Bookmarks Disc type
Selecting a track
1. Refer to General use to open the track menu. 2. Enter track number. Add 0 in front of single-digit track number (e.g. 9 = 09).
MENU CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
Time indicator
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
General use
1. Press INFO on the remote control to hide and show on- screen banner. (Only audio CD banner)
VOL VOL
NOTE
You must be in playback mode for track selection. Shortcut: enter track number directly using number buttons to select a track during playback.
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
IDE GU
OK
FUNCTION
D IS K
G
IntroScan plays the first few seconds of each track. 1. Refer to General use to open the IntroScan menu. IntroScan will start automatically after you have pressed OK. 2. Press OK again, PLAY or PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit to end IntroScan. The track that you stopped at will be played normally.
OUND
CH-
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
IDE GU
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
D IS
G
mp3
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
PLAY
ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
MUTE
D
G
/
RD
CH-
SHIFT
SURR
INFO
IDE GU
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
NOTE
IntroScan ends when all the tracks have been played.
32
CD / MP3 Player
Bookmarks (Audio CDs Only) Clearing bookmarks
The bookmarks are cleared each time a disc is removed from the player or when the power is turned off completely. If all 9 bookmarks are in use, you can still mark new points but the previous bookmarks will be erased. The bookmark feature allows you to select certain points on the disc where you want to jump to quickly. 9 bookmarks can be selected.
EN
2. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (green frame) to the Mark check line, then press OK to add bookmark when you reach the point you want to do so.
DI DI
MUTE
O BAC
IDE GU
DM
SHIFT
INFO
OK
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
/
MUTE
R
CH-
FUNCTION
O BAC
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
DM
SHIFT
INFO
MENU
CLEAR
IDE GU
IDE GU
1
OK
OK
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
1
C
2
C
3
C
3. To add another bookmark, move the cursor to the right and then press OK when you reach another point you want to do so. 4. Move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.
Recalling bookmarks
1. Refer to General use on page 32 to open the bookmark menu. 2. Use the UP arrow to move the cursor (green frame) to the Go To check line and use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow to the bookmarked point you want to recall. 3. Press OK to recall bookmarked point.
VOL
D IS
G
D IS K
MUTE
IDE GU
D IS
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
O BAC
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
SHIFT
D IS
IDE GU
IDE GU
VOL
G G
VOL
1
C
2
C
3
C
/
RD
CH-
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
O BAC
G
SHIFT
INFO
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
OK INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
FUNCTION
VOL
1
C
2
C
3
C
OK
OK
D IS K
MUTE
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
/
RD
CH-
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
O BAC
G
SHIFT
IDE GU
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
INFO
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
OK INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
FUNCTION
4. Use the arrow buttons to move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.
NOTE
Press Select among the 5 options until the desired one shows on banner.
33
CD / MP3 Player
Program playback Edit program
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT 9 / PROGRAM on the remote control to display program edit playlist. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional tracks to the program. 5. Move to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK to confirm program playback.
NOTE
I G I TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
RPT/PGM
TUNE -
VOL
MENU
CLEAR
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
D IS K
O BAC
VOL
1
C
2
C
3
C
Delete Program
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT 9 / PROGRAM on the remote control to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow to select Playlist, then use the UP or DOWN arrows to select and highlight the programmed track you want to delete on the playlist. 3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Delete and then press OK to delete track. 4. Highlight Play (to start program playback) or Done (to return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
G
SHIFT
INFO
IDE GU
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
Insert track
2. The box under TRACK will be highlighted. Press UP or DOWN arrow buttons or number buttons to select track. Press OK.
D IS K
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT 9 / PROGRAM on the remote control to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the arrows to highlight item on the playlist where you want to insert a track before it.
/
MUTE
R
CH-
O BAC
DM
SHIFT
MENU
CLEAR
INFO
1
C
2
C
3
C
IDE GU
3. Refer to Edit program to select a track to be inserted. 4. Highlight Insert and then press OK 5. Highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.
OK
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
FUNCTION
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
MENU
CLEAR
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
3
D
O BAC
/
MUTE
CH-
IDE GU
M RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
G
FUNCTION
Cancel program
CLEAR
MENU
1
C
2
C
3
C
3. Add will be highlighted automatically after track is selected. Press OK to add selected track onto playlist.
Program will be cancelled when; 1. disc tray is opened; 2. power is turned off; 3. STOP is pressed twice. The red PGM indicator will disappear on display and player will resume normal playback mode. Nevertheless, the program will remain in memory and can be recalled by pressing PROGRAM again.
34
CD / MP3 Player
On- screen display for MP3 playback
Refer to General Use on page 32 for basic operations.
Folder mode
1. Use the arrow buttons on the remote to select the folder you wish to play.
/
MUTE
CH-
EN
O BAC
IDE GU
M RD
SHIFT
INFO
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
CH-
O BAC
SHIFT
INFO
IDE GU
OK
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
DI
2. Press OK to enter the folder and PLAY when in stop mode or OK when currently playing to begin playback of all the files in the folder.
OUND
mp3
DI
G
2. Press PLAY on the main unit or on the remote control to start playback. If you are currently playing, then press OK button to select a different MP3 to play. All the files or folders will be played starting with the one you have selected.
OUND
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
SET +
RECORD STOP P AUSE
SURR
mp3
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
3. To exit a folder, use the arrow buttons to select the RETURN arrow.
SET +
RECORD STOP P AUSE
SURR
35
CD / MP3 Player
Program Play
1. In stop mode, Press RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT and 9/PROGRAM on the remote to access the program display. The PROG. icon will show on the display. 5. Press STOP or RPT / PGM on the main unit or STOP or SHIFT 9/PROGRAM to end program playback.
D I G I TA L
BAND/APP
RPT/PGM
D I G I TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
RPT/PGM TUNE -
TUNE D I G I TA L
TUNE +
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
1
VOL
2
C
3
C
RPT/PGM
TUNE -
TUNE +
/
MUTE
CH-
D IS K
O BAC
VOL
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
G
SHIFT
IDE GU
M RD
INFO
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
VOL
VOL
1
C
2
C
3
C
OK
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
D IS K
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
FUNCTION
O BAC
G
SHIFT
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
INFO
IDE GU
0
OK INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
FUNCTION
6. To play program again, press and hold RPT / PGM on the main unit or SHIFT 9/PROGRAM while in stop mode to reactivate program playback. Press PLAY to begin.
2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows on the remote to select the folder on the left that you wish to add to the program list. 3. Press OK to move the file or folder to the right programming list.
D IS
MUTE
O BAC
MUTE
O BAC
IDE GU
/
RD
CH-
/
RD
CH-
D IS
RD
SHIFT
IDE GU
CH-
INFO
OK
G
SHIFT
INFO
SHIFT
INFO
OK
FUNCTION
IDE GU
IDE GU
OK
OK MENU
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
1
FUNCTION FUNCTION CLEAR
C
2
C
3
C
1
MENU CLEAR MENU CLEAR
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
1
C
2
C
3
C
Delete All
1. In stop mode, use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows to select ALL CLEAR icon and press OK to clear all.
DI
/
MUTE
RD
CH-
MUTE
O BAC
O BAC
INFO
IDE GU
IDE GU
SHIFT
RD
SHIFT
INFO
MENU
CLEAR
1 1
C
2
C
3
C
2
C
3
C
4. Once all the files or folders have been selected, Press PLAY to being program playback.
OUND
mp3
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
SET +
RECORD STOP P AUSE
SURR
36
Radio
Operating the Radio
The receiver has a built-in tuner that allows for AM/FM radio function. 5. Tune the stations by pressing TUNING + or - on the main unit or FAST FORWARD or FAST REVERSE on the remote control repeatedly until the desired station is found. Alternatively, you can press and hold the respective buttons for about one second to activate the automatic SEARCH function. In this mode the receiver will automatically tune frequencies until it finds a station
7
TA L
EN
Manual tuning
1. Connect the FM and AM antenna accordingly (see "Connecting the Antenna" on page 5 section for details) 2. Press POWER on the main unit.
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
REPEAT
0
RPT/PGM
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
TUNE -
TUNE +
AUDIO DIGIT AL LEVEL SURR
POWER PR
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3
LS LFE RS
3. Press SOURCE until tuner mode is selected or press AM/FM on the remote control.
SOURCE
SURROUND
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
Select sound effect if needed by pressing SURROUND or SURR/FRAME sound (see "Advance sound section" on page 15 and 16 for details)
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT FMS FORWARD
DVD
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
CD
/C H+
TAPE
SOURCE
SURROUND
mp3
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
SURR
4. To select band, press the BAND/APP on the main unit or AM/FM button on the remote again to toggle between AM/FM mode. When an FM station broadcast Stereo sound, ST is displayed.
SUBTITLE LANG
ANGLE
FRAME
u n i v e r s a l
PRESET PRESET +
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
D I G I TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
DVD VCR 2 AMFM SATCABLE
NOTE
1. If there is interference, modify the location of the antenna until the optimal sound is heard. TV and other electronic devices could be the cause of interferences so try to position the antenna away from them. 2. Weak signal can affect the "auto Search function". Adjust the antenna for better reception for more efficient search.
RPT/PGM
CD
/C H+
TAPE
TUNE -
TUNE +
VO
37
Radio
Storing radio stations:
The receiver can store up to 30 radio stations in memory. You can enter every single radio station yourself or the receiver can store all available radio station automatically in an ascending order. 3. Press MENU on the remote control. "PROG" will appear on the display
ID GU E
RDMP
INFORDS
MENU
TY
OK
FUNCTION
CLEAR
1 4
2 5
3 6
LS LFE RS
I G I TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
VCR 1
ON OFF
TV
RPT/PGM
DVD
VCR 2
AMFM SATCABLE
CD
TAPE
/C H+
TUNE -
TUNE +
4. While the word "PROG " is still flashing, input your desired preset number (1-30) using the numeric keys on the remote control to store the radio station.
MENU CLEAR
2
C
3
C
2- Press and hold BAND/APP/RPT/PGM for 3 seconds to start automatic preset programming. AUTO will be flashing during the automatic storing process.
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
D I G I TA L
BAND/APP
BASS/TREBLE
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
RPT/PGM
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
TUNE -
TUNE +
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3 D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3
LS LFE RS
LS LFE RS
Radio frequencies will be browsed and radio stations stored automatically. When all available radio stations are stored or if all 30 memory locations are full, the auto preset will stop.
NOTE
Weak signal can affect the "Automatic Preset Storing function" efficiency. Adjust the antenna for the best reception for more efficient search.
mp
CD
/C H+
TAPE
VOL
/
MUTE
R
CH-
O BAC
DM
SHIFT
INFO
Manual preset
1. Select the band by pressing AM/FM repeatedly 2. Tune to a radio station (see "Manual tuning" on page 37 above for details)
38
D IS K
G
PRESET -
PRESET +
VOL
Troubleshooting Tips
Power
No power ?
Correctly connect the AC Power Cord to an AC Outlet.
Remote control
EN The remote control does not work ?
Load the batteries with their polarities (+ and ) aligned correctly. Batteries are low. Replace with new ones. Point the remote control to the front of the player. Operate the remote control within an 26 ft range from the player. Remove any obstacles between the remote control and the red LED on the player.
The keys do not activate the functions they control (unit and / or remote control).
Set the STANDBY key to OFF (light on) and back to ON again. Alternatively, turn off the power, disconnect the power plug and then re-connect it (The player may not be operating properly due to lightning, static electricity or some other external factors). If keys still do not activate the functions they control even when the above mentioned corrective actions are taken, contact your RCA retailer.
Playback
Playback does not start when the PLAY key is pressed ?
Make sure that the disc (single sided) is loaded correctly with the title label facing up. Make sure you are in the proper source mode.
No "Surround" sound ?
Check speaker configuration in the menu.
Noise interference appears on the TV, while watching a TV program and the DVD player is left on ?
Turn off DVD player. The TV is too close to the audio system.
Volume level differences playing different disc types (DVDs, audio / video CDs).
Adjust the master volume .
39
Troubleshooting Tips
Subtitle, language, camera angle etc.
Disc menu operation and contents may differ from disc to disc. Please refer to the instructions accompanying the disc.
VIDEO SECTION:
Input ( Sensitivity/ Impedance ):1Vp-p/ 75ohm Output (Level/ Impedance): 1Vp-p/ 75 ohm Frequency Response: 10Hz to 6MHz at +/- 3dB Signal to noise ratio: 40dB Crosstalk @3.58MHz: 40dB
AM TUNER SECTION:
Frequency Response: 80Hz 2kHz +/-6dB Usable Sensitivity: 800uV/m @ S/N 20dB Signal to Noise: 38dB Image Ratio: 27dB @ 1000kHz IF Rejection: 35dB
FM TUNER SECTION:
Frequency Response: 40Hz 15kHz +/-3dB Quieting: 24dBu Signal to Noise: 60dB(stereo) / 65dB(mono) Image Ratio: 40dB IF Rejection: 50dB
Audio (spoken) and / or subtitle language is not the one selected during the initial player set-up ?
If the audio or subtitle language is not available on the DVD disc, the language selected during initial player set-up will not be heard or seen. The disc's priority language (default language) is selected automatically. If you want another language, press menu during playback, if the disc has its own language selection menu (Refer to page 21).
Radio
STEREO indicator is off.
Adjust the antenna.
40
Safety precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This player uses a laser to read the data on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. Also, to keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses.
Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.
EN
The player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician. Never move the player during playback. Never put more than one discs on a tray or put a disc slipping out of the guide area.
Handling discs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold discs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. Discs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) discs.
T
son Digita hom
V id e o D i s c
Cleaning discs
Dirty discs can cause poor sound and visual quality. Always keep discs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. Never wipe the disc in a circular motion since circular scratches are likely to occur and could cause noise during playback. If a disc becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on discs. Also, never clean discs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface
Headset safety
Do not play your headset at a high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience a ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air type designed to let you hear outside sounds, dont turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.
Dont infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia Inc.
41
Remote Codes
CABLE CODES
ABC ANTRONIX ARCHER CABLETENNA CABLEVIEW CENTURY CITIZEN COLOUR VOICE COMTRONICS CONTEC EASTERN GARRARD GC ELECTRONICS GEMINI GENERAL INSTRUMENT HAMLIN HITACHI HYTEX JASCO JERROLD MAGNAVOX MEMOREX MOVIE TIME NSC OAK PANASONIC PARAGON PHILIPS PIONEER PULSAR RCA REALISTIC REGAL REGENCY REMBRANDT RUNCO SAMSUNG SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA SIGNAL SIGNATURE SL MARX SPRUCER STARCOM STARGATE STARQUEST TANDY TELEVIEW TOCOM TOSHIBA TUSA TV86 UNIKA UNITED ARTISTS UNITED CABLE UNIVERSAL VIDEOWAY VIEWSTAR ZENITH 5002, 5008, 5008, 5008 5008 5011 5011 5012, 5014, 5016 5017 5011 5009 5018, 5003 5020, 5003 5002 5011 5003, 5024, 5025 5026 5002, 5002, 5002, 5048, 5026 5011, 5030, 5033, 5026 5047, 5009, 5022, 5017 5003 5026 5014, 5006, 5014, 5003 5014 5052 5007, 5014, 5018 5040 5014 5004, 5026 5018 5027 5008, 5002 5053 5008, 5044 5015, 5026, 5003, 5004, 5005, 5006, 5009, 5053 5009 5009, 5010, 5011
VCR CODES
ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA AKAI 2113 AMERICAN HIGH ASHA AUDIO DYNAMICS AUDIOVOX BELL & HOWELL BEAUMARK BROKSONIC CALIX CANDLE CANON CAPEHART CARVER CCE CITIZEN COLORTYME COLT CRAIG CURTIS-MATHES CYBERNEX DAEWOO DAYTRON DBX DIMENSIA DYNATECH ELECTROHOME ELECTROPHONIC EMERSON 2131 2026 2027 2002, 2026 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008, 2111, 2112, 2021 2013 2009, 2014 2011 2013 2012, 2014 2013, 2018, 2021, 2020, 2062 2027, 2013, 2018, 2009 2061 2013, 2000, 2018, 2013 2015, 2027, 2110 2009, 2000 2002, 2014, 2014 2002, 2026, 2029, 2037, 2038, 2047, 2065, 2011, 2118 2021, 2002, 2026 2000, 2120 2009, 2026 2026 2009 2061 2011 2002, 2111, 2023 2021 2021 2009, 2021, 2059, 2055, 2009, 2111, 2009, 2058, 2061 2014, 2002, 2061 2014 2021, 2108, 2013 2009, 2021, 2014 2021 2021
5013 5015
2010
2025 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2019 2022, 2114 2110 2061 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2019, 2027
5027, 5028 5027, 5028 5016, 5029 5052 5012, 5013, 5019, 5025, 5031, 5032 5034 5049, 5052 5049 5035
2014, 2023, 2061 2002, 2009, 2013, 2016, 2021, 2022, 2024, 2115 2017, 2019, 2025, 2026, 2028, 2110 2010 2026 2029 2012, 2014, 2015, 2021, 2024, 2025, 2030, 2032, 2033, 2034, 2035, 2036, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042, 2044, 2045, 2105, 2113, 2116, 2117, 2130 2023, 2048, 2049, 2050, 2051, 2052, 2119 2026 2001, 2013, 2021, 2022, 2053, 2115, 2014, 2018, 2054, 2121
FISHER 5018, 5053 5018 FUJI FUNAI GARRARD GE GOLDSTAR GRADIENTE HARLEY DAVIDSON HARMAN KARDON HARWOOD HEADQUARTER HITACHI HI-Q INSTANT REPLAY JCI JC PENNEY
5023, 5041
5009, 5011
JENSEN JVC KENWOOD KLH KODAK LLOYD LOGIK LXI MAGNAVOX MAGNIN MARANTZ MARTA MASUSHITA MEI
2010, 2022, 2060, 2056, 2010, 2123 2010, 2111, 2021 2026
2022, 2062, 2063, 2104, 2124 2010, 2011, 2016, 2018, 2058, 2062, 2064
42
Remote Codes
MEMOREX MGA MGN TECHNOLOGY MIDLAND MINOLTA MITSUBISHI 2002, 2104, 2029, 2013 2053 2055, 2029, 2070, 2123 2075, 2021, 2002, 2002, 2009, 2076, 2014 2013 2021 2014, 2096 2035 2021, 2016, 2018 2021, 2021, 2014 2010, 2016, 2000, 2061 2104 2011 2011 2021, 2000, 2082, 2089, 2002, 2026, 2014 2014 2128 2104 2005, 2104, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2093, 2011, 2051, 2002, 2004, 2013 2002, 2021, 2002, 2021, 2002, 2124 2002, 2002, 2014 2058, 2002, 2021, 2002, 2013, 2015, 2013, 2013 2009, 2010 2009, 2013 2002, 2029, 2103, 2021, 2009, 2004, 2011, 2013, 2014, 2021, 2023, 2026, 2131 2065, 2113
TV CODES
ABEX ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AKAI ALLERON AMTRON ANAM NATIONAL AOC AUDIOVOX BELCOR BELL & HOWELL BRADFORD BROKWOOD CANDLE CAPEHART CELEBRITY CENTURION CITIZEN CLAIRTONE COLORTYME CONCERTO CONTEC/CONY CRAIG CROWN CURTIS MATHES CXC DAEWOO DAYTRON DIMENSIA DUMONT DYNATECH ELECTROBAND ELECTROHOME EMERSON 1172 1001, 1174 1016 1002 1046 1038 1003, 1004, 1038 1004 1001, 1038 1004 1004, 1175 1002 1009 1004, 1174, 1176 1004, 1004, 1012, 1038 1038, 1000, 1038 1004, 1171 1004, 1000 1004, 1178 1002, 1003, 1004, 1025, 1031, 1038, 1047, 1179, 1004, 1048, 1046 1038, 1038 1000, 1055, 1181 1004, 1004, 1058, 1038, 1004, 1038 1004, 1135, 1142, 1179 1038 1062 1174 1062 1002 1000, 1054, 1128, 1004, 1012, 1089, 1173
EN
2056, 2107 2055, 2056, 2065, 2066, 2067, 2069, 2071, 2072, 2073, 2074, 2106, 2113, 2131 2131 2013, 2013, 2010, 2078,
MONTGOMERY WARD MOTOROLA MTC MULTITECH NEC NIKKO NOBLEX OLYMPUS OPTIMUS OPTONICA ORION PANASONIC PENTAX PENTEX RESEARCH PHILCO PHILIPS PILOT PIONEER PORTLAND PROSCAN PROTEC PULSAR QUARTER QUARTZ QUASAR RCA
2026 2016, 2026, 2053, 2061 2011, 2016, 2018, 2058, 2064, 2079, 2111, 2123
1083, 1162
2131
2022, 2109, 2125, 2126, 2127 2055, 2056, 2107, 2120 2022, 2062, 2063 2062, 2096, 2124 2055, 2080, 2081, 2123 2017, 2019, 2110 2001
1006, 1008, 1016, 1038, 1105, 1171, 1177 1006 1006 1013, 1014, 1038, 1176 1171 1004, 1006, 1015, 1105, 1162, 1171 1005,1006, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1127, 1006, 1171 1151 1176 1004, 1006, 1026, 1032, 1039, 1123, 1191 1006 1049, 1046 1003, 1004, 1006, 1022, 1052, 1054, 1087, 1164, 1165, 1166, 1167, 1168, 1151 1005, 1006, 1012, 1019, 1056, 1057, 1155, 1156, 1171, 1172 1046, 1171 1006 1006, 1012, 1013, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1136, 1137, 1138, 1139, 1140, 1141, 1143, 1144, 1145, 1146, 1148, 1150,
RADIOSHACK/REALISTIC RADIX RANDEX RICOH RUNCO SAMSUNG SANKY SANSUI SANYO SCOTT SEARS SHARP SHINTOM SHOGUN SIGNATURE SINGER SONY STS SYLVANIA SYMPHONIC TANDY TASHIKO TATUNG TEAC TECHNICS TEKNIKA TMK TOSHIBA TOTEVSION UNITECH VECTOR RESEARCH VICTOR VIDEO CONCEPTS VIDEOSONIC WARDS
2013, 2131 2092, 2013, 2015, 2116 2014, 2055, 2017, 2056,
2015, 2033, 2053, 2112 2111, 2123 2023 2025, 2032, 2035, 2038, 2065, 2021, 2056, 2029, 2061, 2023, 2048, 2049, 2050, 2107, 2118 2094, 2095, 2096, 2131 2098
2131 2061, 2128 2004, 2098, 2099, 2119, 2128 2107 2021, 2022, 2026, 2062, 2063, 2065, 2026 2011 2111 2026, 2109 2014, 2024, 2049, 2014
2058, 2085, 2111 2021, 2026, 2100, 2129 2047 2051, 2055, 2065, 2093, 2116
JENSEN JVC
2010, 2015, 2016 2010, 2015, 2016, 2113 2013, 2055, 2107, 2026, 2010, 2098, 2014, 2056, 2116, 2061 2011, 2104, 2015, 2021, 2023, 2026, 2061, 2096, 2101, 2102, 2131 2018, 2058, 2111 2119, 2128
1005, 1006, 1008, 1022, 1052, 1063, 1064, 1072, 1087, 1105, 1172, 1181 1054, 1060, 1065, 1066, 1067, 1158, 1159, 1182
43
Remote Codes
KAWASHO KAYPANI KENWOOD KLOSS NOVABEAM KTV LOEWE LOGIK LUXMAN LXI MAGNAVOX 1002, 1175 1004, 1068, 1038, 1062 1083 1004, 1000, 1162, 1004, 1074, 1131, 1083 1062 1004, 1006, 1176 1001, 1004, 1080, 1054, 1052 1004, 1080, 1083 1003, 1004, 1038, 1084 1006, 1003, 1006, 1016 1038 1185 1095, 1035, 1003, 1003, 1062, 1184 1003, 1069, 1089 1004, 1004, 1004, 1105 1054 1000, 1004, 1151 1004 1003, 1000, 1162, 1000, 1096, 1129, 1176 1151 1004, 1004, 1105, 1171 1191 1004, 1162, 1006 1004, 1000, 1049, 1110, 1004, 1113, 1004 1001, 1004, 1006 1006, 1019 1069, 1174, 1183 1070, 1171, 1176, 1177 SIMPSON SONIC SONY SOUNDESIGN SQUAREVIEW SSS STARLITE SUPRE-MACY SUPREME SYLVANIA 1008 1176 1002 1004, 1189 1004, 1038 1174 1002 1004, 1074, 1183, 1033, 1173 1003, 1054 1004, 1004, 1038, 1171 1117 1004, 1049, 1118, 1171 1052, 1066, 1004, 1174 1000, 1033, 1076, 1184 1004, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1038, 1046 1038
1049, 1062, 1071, 1072, 1073, 1008, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1069, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1089, 1130, 1133, 1134, 1183, 1184
MAJESTIC MARANTS MARANTZ MEGATRON MEI MEMOREX MGA MIDLAND MINUTZ MITSUBISHI MONTGOMERY WARD MOTOROLA MTC MULTITECH MULTIVISION NAD NEC NIKKO NTC ONWA OPTIMUS OPTONICA ORION PANASONIC PHILCO
1006, 1062, 1078 1059 1006, 1082, 1083, 1162 1005, 1006, 1019, 1022, 1051, 1079, 1082 1151, 1171, 1172, 1181 1005, 1006, 1019, 1022, 1051, 1079, 1081, 1082, 1082, 1083, 1125 1173 1005, 1006, 1105, 1176, 1178 1178 1071, 1072, 1185 1004, 1005, 1006, 1089 1016
1006, 1008, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1069, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1116, 1161, 1184 1038, 1189 1178 1006, 1054 1005, 1006, 1008, 1012, 1013, 1016, 1046, 1076, 1082, 1083, 1105, 1170,
1006 1071, 1072, 1089, 1105, 1109, 1117, 1160, 1162 1087 1182 1005, 1006 1001, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1019, 1024, 1046, 1052, 1062, 1069, 1074, 1075, 1083, 1087, 1088, 1095, 1119, 1120, 1005, 1006, 1019 1083, 1151, 1152, 1153, 1154
YAMAHA ZENITH 1173 1191 1054, 1062, 1170 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1012, 1019, 1068, 1069, 1074, 1075, 1077, 1183, 1004, 1008, 1012, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1074, 1075, 1076, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1171 1006, 1090, 1091, 1092, 1179, 1185 1005, 1006, 1016, 1171
Satellite Receivers
CHAPPARAL 5056, DRAKE 5058, GE SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, GENERAL INSTRUMENTS 5060, PANASONIC SATELLITE RECEIVER 5075 PRIMESTAR DBS 5076 PROSCAN SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, RCA SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, REALISTIC 5063 SONY SATELLITE RECEIVER 5072 STS1 5064 STS2 5065 STS3 5066 STS4 5067 TOSHIBA 5068 TOSHIBA SATELLITE RECEIVER 5073 UNIDEN SATELLITE RECEIVER 5069 5057 5059 5001 5061, 5062
PHILIPS
PILOT PIONEER PORTLAND PRICE CLUB PRISM PROSCAN PROTON PULSAR PULSER QUASAR RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC RCA
5001 5001
1094 1012, 1038, 1049, 1095, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1019, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1103, 1187, 1188, 1190
RHAPSODY RUNCO SAMPO SAMSUNG SAMSUX SANSUI SANYO SCOTCH SCOTT SEARS
1006, 1171, 1172, 1175 1005, 1006, 1012, 1015, 1019, 1104, 1106, 1171, 1172
1048, 1049, 1050, 1080, 1107, 1108, 1169, 1180, 1189 1006, 1004, 1050, 1162, 1006, 1122, 1012, 1006, 1051, 1180, 1012, 1171, 1024, 1013, 1066, 1181, 1029, 1173 1035, 1019, 1071, 1189 1095, 1038, 1046 1046, 1048, 1072, 1109, 1111, 1112,
1083, 1115
44
Language Codes
For audio track and subtitle selection, see p.25,26. Abkhazian Afar Afrikaans Albanian Amehanie Arabic Armenian Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Basque Bengali, Bangla Bhutani Bihari Bislama Breton Bulgarian Burmese Byelorussian Cambodian Catalan Chinese Corsican Croatian Czech Danish Dutch English Esperanto Estonian Faeroese Fiji Finnish French Frisian Galiean Georgian German Greek Greenland Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hebrew Hindi Hungarian Icelandic Indonesian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiaic Irish Italian Japanese Javanese Kannada 6566 6566 6570 8381 6577 6582 7289 6583 6588 6590 6665 6985 6678 6890 6672 6673 6682 6671 7789 6669 7577 6765 9072 6779 7282 6783 6865 7876 6978 6979 6984 7079 7074 7073 7082 7089 7176 7565 6869 6976 7576 7178 7185 7265 7387 7273 7285 7383 7378 7365 7369 7375 7165 7384 7465 7487 7578 Kashmiri Kazakh Kanyarwanda Kirghiz Kirundi Korean Kurdish Laothian Latin Latvian, Leltish Lingala Lithuanian Macedonian Malagasy Malay Malayalam Maltese Maori Marathi Moldavian Mongolian Naru Nepali Norwegian Occitan Oriya Oroma (Atan) Punjabi Pashto, Pushao Persian Polish Portuguese Quechua Ahaero- Romance Romanian Russian Samoan Sangbo Sanskrit Sents Gaelic Serbian Servo-Croatian Sesotho Setswana Sindhi Singhalese Siswati Slovak Slovenian Somali Spanish Sudanese Swahili Swedish Tagalog Tajik Tamil 7583 7575 8287 7589 8278 7579 7585 7679 7665 7684 7678 7684 7775 7771 7783 7776 7784 7773 7782 7779 7778 7865 7869 7879 7967 7982 7977 8065 8083 7065 8075 8084 8185 8277 8279 8285 8377 8371 8365 7168 8382 8372 8384 8478 8368 8373 8383 8375 8376 8379 6983 8385 8387 8386 8476 8471 8465 Tatar Telugu Thai Tibetan Tigrinya Tonga Tsonga Turkish Turkmen Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapuk Welsh Wolaf Xhosa Yiddish Yoruba Zulu 8484 8469 8472 6679 8473 8479 8483 8482 8475 8487 8575 8582 8590 8673 8679 6789 8779 8872 7473 8979 9085
EN
45
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITED WARRANTY ARE GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF INDIANA. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.
Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.
46
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE PROVINCIAL LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.
EN
Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.
47
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
DRAWER MOTOR
+ -
CAROUSEL MOTOR
+ -
P026
1 2 1
P027
4
DRAWER1 BOARD
1
P006
2
N027
P024
N006
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P301 1
N705
4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
P705
GAME_IN JACK
KEY BOARD
P706
TAPE DECK
N706
5 6 7 8 9
N101
1 2
N102
2
P304
2
P303
2 3
N701
X'MER BOARD
N881B
2 3 4 5
+ -
+ R MAIN SPEAKER
PAGE 9-7
N001
N501
P501
10
11
P701
P401
P101
12
N301
N304
N303
13
MAIN BOARD
FOR RS2620
2 1
P001
PAGE 9-7
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
DRAWER MOTOR
+ -
CAROUSEL MOTOR
+ -
P026
1 2 1
P027
4
DRAWER1 BOARD
1
P006
2
N027
P024
N006
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P301 1
N705
4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4
P705
GAME_IN JACK
KEY BOARD
P706
TAPE DECK
N706
5 6 7 8 9
N101
1 2
N102
2
P304
2
P303
2 3
N701
X'MER BOARD
10
11
P701
P401
P101
12
N301
N304
N303
13
MAIN BOARD
FOR RS2620
N881B
2 3 4 5
+ -
+ R MAIN SPEAKER
N001
N501
P501
P001
P601A
2 3
P601
HEADPHONE BOARD
PAGE 9-5
PAGE 9-5
Interconnect Drawing
11
14
CP402
CP401
1 CN611
VIDEO PCB
NC4 11 CP550
TUNER BOARD
1 NC2A 11
1 14
10
1 CP2
DSP BOARD
1
CP551
11
MAIN BOARD
19
NC7A
CP756 6 1
19
15
PC6
CN3 1 10
CN205 1 1 CN203 10
POWER SUPPLY
CP751 1 4
NC5
10 1 CP205
NC8
NC7
2 CN204
13 1 NC11 19 19 W048 1 1
CN201
CN202
NC10B2
NC12
CN2
1 2
1 2 1
FAN BOARD
2 1
8 1
4 1
MCU BOARD
11 W038 1 1 1
FAN
3 3
POWER SWITCH
2 1 NC20A CN434 8 1
DVD DRIVE
NC10B1
1 NC9 NC9
21
NC15B 1
N10B1 21 1 1
N10B2 11
NC20B
1 2
FPA BOARD
NC11B 1
Interconnect Drawing
11
14
CP402
CP401
1 CN611
VIDEO PCB
NC4 11 CP550
TUNER BOARD
1 NC2A 11
1 14
10
1 CP2
DSP BOARD
1
CP551
11
MAIN BOARD
19
NC7A
CP756 6 1
19
15
PC6
CN3 1 10
CN205 1 1 CN203 10
POWER SUPPLY
CP751 1 4
NC5
10 1 CP205
NC8
NC7
2 CN204
13 1 NC11 19 19 W048 1 1
CN201
CN202
NC10B2
NC12
CN2
1 2
1 2 1
FAN BOARD
2 1
8 1
4 1
MCU BOARD
11 W038 1 1 1
FAN
3 3
POWER SWITCH
2 1 NC20A CN434 8 1
DVD DRIVE
NC10B1
1 NC9 NC9
21
NC15B 1
N10B1 21 1 1
N10B2 11
NC20B
1 2
FPA BOARD
NC11B 1
www.fairchildsemi.com
KA278R33
Features
2A / 3.3V Output low dropout voltage regulator TO220 Full-Mold package (4PIN) Overcurrent protection, Thermal shutdown Overvoltage protection, Short-Circuit protection With output disable function
Description
The KA278R33 is a low-dropout voltage regulator suitable for various electronic equipments. It provides constant voltage power source with TO-220 4 lead full mold package. Dropout voltage of KA278R33 is below 0.5V in full rated current(2A). This regulator has various function such as peak current protection, thermal shut down, overvoltage protection and output disable function.
TO-220F-4L
THERMAL SHUTDOWN
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
BANDGAP REFERENCE
R1
1.4V
SHORT-CIRCUIT SHORTCIRCUIT
PROTECTION
R2
3 GND
Rev.1.0.1
2001 Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation
www.fairchildsemi.com
KA278R33
Features
2A / 3.3V Output low dropout voltage regulator TO220 Full-Mold package (4PIN) Overcurrent protection, Thermal shutdown Overvoltage protection, Short-Circuit protection With output disable function
Description
The KA278R33 is a low-dropout voltage regulator suitable for various electronic equipments. It provides constant voltage power source with TO-220 4 lead full mold package. Dropout voltage of KA278R33 is below 0.5V in full rated current(2A). This regulator has various function such as peak current protection, thermal shut down, overvoltage protection and output disable function.
TO-220F-4L
THERMAL SHUTDOWN
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
BANDGAP REFERENCE
R1
1.4V
SHORT-CIRCUIT SHORTCIRCUIT
PROTECTION
R2
3 GND
Rev.1.0.1
2001 Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation
RS2622
KEYBOARD SCHEMATIC
10 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A
SCHEMATIC NOTES 1. RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS; K=X1000, Meg=X1,000,000. RESISTORS ARE 1/4W 5%, EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/8W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT, 1/16W EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. m F, 2. CAPACITANCE VALUES 1.0 AND ABOVE ARE IN pF, VALUES BELOW 1.0 ARE IN EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. VOLTAGE RATING IS 50V EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED. [ ] INDICATES FLAT MAXI-CHIP COMPONENT. / \ INDICATES FLAT MINI-CHIP COMPONENT. 3. DENOTES CHASSIS GROUND. INDICATES CONNECTION VIA POINT-TO-POINT WIRE. -INDICATES JUMPER WIRE. -INDICATES ZERO OHM CHIP COMPONENT.
ALL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND MANY OTHER SEMICONDUCTORS ARE ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE AND REQUIRE SPECIAL HANDLING TECHNIQUES DESCRIBED UNDER "ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES) DEVICES" IN THE SAFETY AND SERVICING PRECAUTIONS PUBLICATION.
COMPONENTS WITH A ! HAVE SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS IMPORTANT TO SAFETY. BEFORE REPLACING ANY OF THESE COMPONENTS READ CAREFULLY THE PRODUCT SAFETY NOTICE IN THIS SERVICE DATA. DO NOT DEGRADE THE SAFETY OF THE SET THROUGH IMPROPER SERVICING.
PAGE 9-2
PAGE 9-2
CMOS LSI
Applications
Function switching under serial data control in amplifiers, receivers, and other electronic equipment
Package Dimensions
unit: mm 3061-DIP30S
[LC78211, 78212, 78213]
Features
Two sets of eight (or in the LC78213, seven) built-in circuits with three switching configurations available based on differing internal connections Control according to serial data sent from a microprocessor, and easy connection to 5 V microprocessors Two identical products can be connected to a shared bus due to the provision of a select pin (S). A reset pin that turns off all analog switches A 20 V withstand voltage rating allows these products to provide a wide dynamic range.
SANYO: DIP30S
Specifications
Absolute Maximum Ratings at Ta = 25C
Parameter Maximum supply voltage Symbol VDD max VEE max V I1 V I2 VON Pd max Topr Tstg VDD VEE DI, CL, CE, S, RES L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 With the switch on Ta 75C Conditions Ratings 0.3 to +20 20 to +0.3 0.3 to +20 VEE 0.3 to VDD + 0.3 0.5 100 30 to +75 40 to +125 Unit V V V V V mW C C
Maximum input voltage Analog switch potential difference when on Allowable power dissipation Operating temperature range Storage temperature range
Top view
Input low level voltage Analog switch input voltage range Low level clock pulse width High level clock pulse width
No. 4817-2/6
70
0.0015
0.01
0.01
0.05
Feedthrough
FTH
55
dB
Crosstalk Input high level current Input low level current Analog switch leakage current (off state) Current drain
75 +10
dB A A A mA
CL, DI, CE
Serial data input (Schmitt buffer) CL..............Clock input DI...............Data input CE .............Chip enable
Selection of one of two chips The address is set to the values shown in the table below according to the level input to the S pin. Product S I S pin level L H L H L H Address A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 A1 1 1 0 0 1 1 A2 0 0 1 1 1 1 A3 1 1 1 1 1 1
LC78211
LC78212
LC78213
RES
Reset input The states of the analog switches are undefined when power is first applied. Setting this pin low will force all switches the off state.
Operation 1. Data Input Procedure The LC78211, LC78212 and LC78213 are controlled by inputting specified data to the CL, DI and CE pins. The input data consists of 12 bits, of which four bits are address and eight bits are data.
Bits correspond to the L1 to L8 and R1 to R8 analog switches, and a value of one turns the corresponding switch on, and a value of zero turns it off. 0.........Off 1.........On The address is used when the chip is connected to a shared bus. The data (address) that must be transmitted depends on the S pin and the particular product as shown in the table below.
Product S pin level L H L H L H Address A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 A1 1 1 0 0 1 1 A2 0 0 1 1 1 1 A3 1 1 1 1 1 1
LC78211
LC78212
LC78213
Note: The bit for switch eight in the LC78213 is a dont care bit, that is it can be either 0 or 1 without affecting chip function. This is because the LC78213 has two sets of seven (not eight) circuits.
No. 4817-5/6
CMOS LSI
Applications
Function switching under serial data control in amplifiers, receivers, and other electronic equipment
Package Dimensions
unit: mm 3061-DIP30S
[LC78211, 78212, 78213]
Features
Two sets of eight (or in the LC78213, seven) built-in circuits with three switching configurations available based on differing internal connections Control according to serial data sent from a microprocessor, and easy connection to 5 V microprocessors Two identical products can be connected to a shared bus due to the provision of a select pin (S). A reset pin that turns off all analog switches A 20 V withstand voltage rating allows these products to provide a wide dynamic range.
SANYO: DIP30S
Specifications
Absolute Maximum Ratings at Ta = 25C
Parameter Maximum supply voltage Symbol VDD max VEE max V I1 V I2 VON Pd max Topr Tstg VDD VEE DI, CL, CE, S, RES L1 to L8, R1 to R8, LCOM1 to LCOM4, RCOM1 to RCOM4 With the switch on Ta 75C Conditions Ratings 0.3 to +20 20 to +0.3 0.3 to +20 VEE 0.3 to VDD + 0.3 0.5 100 30 to +75 40 to +125 Unit V V V V V mW C C
Maximum input voltage Analog switch potential difference when on Allowable power dissipation Operating temperature range Storage temperature range
Top view
Input low level voltage Analog switch input voltage range Low level clock pulse width High level clock pulse width
No. 4817-2/6
70
0.0015
0.01
0.01
0.05
Feedthrough
FTH
55
dB
Crosstalk Input high level current Input low level current Analog switch leakage current (off state) Current drain
75 +10
dB A A A mA
CL, DI, CE
Serial data input (Schmitt buffer) CL..............Clock input DI...............Data input CE .............Chip enable
Selection of one of two chips The address is set to the values shown in the table below according to the level input to the S pin. Product S I S pin level L H L H L H Address A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 A1 1 1 0 0 1 1 A2 0 0 1 1 1 1 A3 1 1 1 1 1 1
LC78211
LC78212
LC78213
RES
Reset input The states of the analog switches are undefined when power is first applied. Setting this pin low will force all switches the off state.
Operation 1. Data Input Procedure The LC78211, LC78212 and LC78213 are controlled by inputting specified data to the CL, DI and CE pins. The input data consists of 12 bits, of which four bits are address and eight bits are data.
Bits correspond to the L1 to L8 and R1 to R8 analog switches, and a value of one turns the corresponding switch on, and a value of zero turns it off. 0.........Off 1.........On The address is used when the chip is connected to a shared bus. The data (address) that must be transmitted depends on the S pin and the particular product as shown in the table below.
Product S pin level L H L H L H Address A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 A1 1 1 0 0 1 1 A2 0 0 1 1 1 1 A3 1 1 1 1 1 1
LC78211
LC78212
LC78213
Note: The bit for switch eight in the LC78213 is a dont care bit, that is it can be either 0 or 1 without affecting chip function. This is because the LC78213 has two sets of seven (not eight) circuits.
No. 4817-5/6
LM4766 OvertureAudio Power Amplifier Series Dual 40W Audio Power Amplifier with Mute
September 1998
LM4766 Overture Audio Power Amplifier Series Dual 40W Audio Power Amplifier with Mute
General Description
The LM4766 is a stereo audio amplifier capable of delivering typically 40W per channel of continuous average output power into an 8 load with less than 0.1% (THD + N). The performance of the LM4766, utilizing its Self Peak Instantaneous Temperature (Ke) (SPiKe) Protection Circuitry, places it in a class above discrete and hybrid amplifiers by providing an inherently, dynamically protected Safe Operating Area (SOA). SPiKe Protection means that these parts are safeguarded at the output against overvoltage, undervoltage, overloads, including thermal runaway and instantaneous temperature peaks. Each amplifier within the LM4766 has an independent smooth transition fade-in/out mute that minimizes output pops. The ICs extremely low noise floor at 2 V and its extremely low THD + N value of 0.06% at the rated power make the LM4766 optimum for high-end stereo TVs or minicomponent systems.
Key Specifications
j j
THD+N at 1 kHz at 2 x 30W continuous average output power into 8: THD+N at 1 kHz at continuous average output power of 2 x 30W into 8: 0.009% (typ) 0.1% (max)
Features
n n n n SPiKe Protection Minimal amount of external components necessary Quiet fade-in/out mute mode Non-Isolated 15-lead TO-220 package
Applications
n High-end stereo TVs n Component stereo n Compact stereo
Typical Application
Connection Diagram
Plastic Package
DS100928-2
Top View Non-Isolated Package Order Number LM4766T See NS Package Number TA15A
DS100928-1
DS100928
www.national.com
Equivalent Schematic
DS100928-8
www.national.com
LM4766 OvertureAudio Power Amplifier Series Dual 40W Audio Power Amplifier with Mute
September 1998
LM4766 Overture Audio Power Amplifier Series Dual 40W Audio Power Amplifier with Mute
General Description
The LM4766 is a stereo audio amplifier capable of delivering typically 40W per channel of continuous average output power into an 8 load with less than 0.1% (THD + N). The performance of the LM4766, utilizing its Self Peak Instantaneous Temperature (Ke) (SPiKe) Protection Circuitry, places it in a class above discrete and hybrid amplifiers by providing an inherently, dynamically protected Safe Operating Area (SOA). SPiKe Protection means that these parts are safeguarded at the output against overvoltage, undervoltage, overloads, including thermal runaway and instantaneous temperature peaks. Each amplifier within the LM4766 has an independent smooth transition fade-in/out mute that minimizes output pops. The ICs extremely low noise floor at 2 V and its extremely low THD + N value of 0.06% at the rated power make the LM4766 optimum for high-end stereo TVs or minicomponent systems.
Key Specifications
j j
THD+N at 1 kHz at 2 x 30W continuous average output power into 8: THD+N at 1 kHz at continuous average output power of 2 x 30W into 8: 0.009% (typ) 0.1% (max)
Features
n n n n SPiKe Protection Minimal amount of external components necessary Quiet fade-in/out mute mode Non-Isolated 15-lead TO-220 package
Applications
n High-end stereo TVs n Component stereo n Compact stereo
Typical Application
Connection Diagram
Plastic Package
DS100928-2
Top View Non-Isolated Package Order Number LM4766T See NS Package Number TA15A
DS100928-1
DS100928
www.national.com
Equivalent Schematic
DS100928-8
www.national.com
Single Supply Voltage: 4.5V to 5.5V for M24Cxx 2.5V to 5.5V for M24Cxx-W 1.8V to 5.5V for M24Cxx-R 1.8V to 3.6V for M24Cxx-S
8 1
PDIP8 (BN) 0.25 mm frame
s s s s s s s s
Write Control Input BYTE and PAGE WRITE (up to 16 Bytes) RANDOM and SEQUENTIAL READ Modes Self-Timed Programming Cycle Automatic Address Incrementing Enhanced ESD/Latch-Up Behavior More than 1 Million Erase/Write Cycles More than 40 Year Data Retention
8 1
SO8 (MN) 150 mil width TSSOP8 (DW) 169 mil width
DESCRIPTION These I2C-compatible electrically erasable programmable memory (EEPROM) devices are organized as 2048/1024/512/256/128 x 8 bit (M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01), and operate with a power supply down to 2.5 V (for the -W version of each device), and down to 1.8 V (for the -R and -S versions of each device). The M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01 are available in Plastic Dual-in-Line, Plastic Small Outline and Thin Shrink Small Outline packages. The M24C16-S is also available in a Chip Scale package. Table 1. Signal Names
E0, E1, E2 SDA SCL WC VCC VSS Chip Enable
VCC
VSS
AI02033
November 2001
1/21
NO
First byte of instruction with RW = 0 already decoded by the device
ACK Returned
YES
NO
YES
ReSTART
STOP
NO
START Condition
YES
AI01847C
8/21
Single Supply Voltage: 4.5V to 5.5V for M24Cxx 2.5V to 5.5V for M24Cxx-W 1.8V to 5.5V for M24Cxx-R 1.8V to 3.6V for M24Cxx-S
8 1
PDIP8 (BN) 0.25 mm frame
s s s s s s s s
Write Control Input BYTE and PAGE WRITE (up to 16 Bytes) RANDOM and SEQUENTIAL READ Modes Self-Timed Programming Cycle Automatic Address Incrementing Enhanced ESD/Latch-Up Behavior More than 1 Million Erase/Write Cycles More than 40 Year Data Retention
8 1
SO8 (MN) 150 mil width TSSOP8 (DW) 169 mil width
DESCRIPTION These I2C-compatible electrically erasable programmable memory (EEPROM) devices are organized as 2048/1024/512/256/128 x 8 bit (M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01), and operate with a power supply down to 2.5 V (for the -W version of each device), and down to 1.8 V (for the -R and -S versions of each device). The M24C16, M24C08, M24C04, M24C02, M24C01 are available in Plastic Dual-in-Line, Plastic Small Outline and Thin Shrink Small Outline packages. The M24C16-S is also available in a Chip Scale package. Table 1. Signal Names
E0, E1, E2 SDA SCL WC VCC VSS Chip Enable
VCC
VSS
AI02033
November 2001
1/21
NO
First byte of instruction with RW = 0 already decoded by the device
ACK Returned
YES
NO
YES
ReSTART
STOP
NO
START Condition
YES
AI01847C
8/21
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MAIN PCB
Notes : 1. All resistance values are indicated in ohms (K=1000 ohms, M=1000 Kohms). 2. All capacitance values are indicated in oF (p=10-6 oF).
FROM DSP BD
NC3
FL_IN 1
R102
270 1W
R103
4R7 1W
6.8V 1/2W
D92 C108
47uF 25V AGND
D93
47uF 25V
R104
6.8V 1/2W
C107
R105
4R7 1W
270 1W
Main Board
C106
15nF 25V
FR_IN
C103
15nF 25V
0u33F
C104
50V
C_IN
R17FL
100pF
C5FL
50V
25V 8n2F
C109 C8FL
R21FL
SL_IN
R17FR R17C
100K 1/16W
1R 1/4W
R18R
100pF
50V
3u3F 50V
1/16W
2.2K 1/16W
3u3F 50V
C8FR C8SL
SR_IN
10
50V 100pF
100pF 50V
C5C
3u3F 50V
SW_IN
11
R17SW
50V
3u3F 50V
C8SR C8SW
3u3F 50V
C8C
3u3F 50V
AGND
AGND
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC1 NC2 23 LBASS1 RBASS124 LBASS2 RBASS225 RBASS326 LBASS3 RTRE 27 LTRE BYPASSL CR2 28 BYPASSR CR1 29 LIN CL2 30 GNDL CL1 31 RIN AVSS 32 GNDR LOUT 33 CIN ROUT 34 GNDC IC84 COUT 35 SLIN SM7346SLOUT 36 SROUT 37 SW-OUT 38 AGND 39 DGND 40 LATCH 41 DATA 42 CLK 43 DVDD 44
C105
0u33F 50V
3u3F
C700 C110
3u3F 50V
8n2F 25V
C9FL
4u7F 50V
C113
50V
R700 R701
560 1/16W
2.2K 1/16W
5 + IC88 7
-
FL_PREAMP_OUT
C13FL
100pF 50V
2.2K 1/16W
C112
8 VCC
BA4558
C10FL
33pF 50V
100K 1/16W
3K 1/16W
100PF AGND
3 + IC88 1 2
-
FR_PREAMP_OUT
BA4558 C13FR
100pF 50V
100pF
R21FR
R108
750 1/16W
VOLUME CONTROL
560 1/16W
4u7F 50V
R21C
R20SL SL_PREAMP_IN
560 1/16W
C9SL
4u7F 50V
3 + IC87 1 2
-
SL_PREAMP_OUT
BA4558 C13SL
100pF 50V
7 11 AGND 10 9
33pF 50V
AGND
100K 1/16W
3.3K 1/16W
R22C
100PF 50V
8 VCC
C10C
C11C
100pF 50V
C13C
BA4558
2.7K 1/16W
1K 1/16W
1K 1/16W
1K 1/16W
C_PREAMP_INR20C
C9C
5 + IC87 7
C_PREAMP_OUT
C114
47uF 25V
100pF 50V
C118
50V
C117
33pF 50V
C115 R112
C10FR
R109
R110
R111
100pF 50V
AGND
100K 1/16W
3K 1/16W
TO POWER AMP
PC6 FL_PREAMP_OUT
FR_PREAMP_OUT
SL_PREAMP_OUT
SR_PREAMP_OUT
C_PREAMP_OUT
R21SL
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
VCR OUT
BLK RED
50V 100pF
C3L
50V
R5L
470 1/16W
4 C3R 8
100pF
R5R
470 1/16W
IC75 LC78211
8 VCC
3.9K 1/16W
R23SR C11SR
100PF 50V
C13SR
100pF 50V
C10SR
33pF 50V
100K 1/16W
R22SR
3.3K 1/16W
SAT IN
9 7
1SS133
RED
50V 100pF
C1R
470 1/16W
R1R
R21SW
AGND
220K 1/16W
R2R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
BLK
100pF 50V
C1L
R1L
AGND
C31L C31R
C9SW
4u7F 50V
R125 R95
1K 1/16W 1K 1/16W
560 1/16W
3 + IC86 1
15K 1/16W
SW_PREAMP_OUT
R96
1K 1/16W
D91
ISS133
MGND
D90
C96
22nF 50V 470 1/16W
C98
100pF 50V
C99
100pF 50V
AGND
C32R
KTD1302
470 1/16W
R25R
SELECT CONTROL
Q80 R93
AGND 3.3K 1/16W
DTA114YS
Q78
100pF 50V
12V 1W
1nF 50V
C10SW
C13SW
100K 1/16W
AGND
1.2K 1/16W
R22SW
100PF 50V
AGND
AGND
50V 100pF
C15L
220K 1/16W
R26L
50V 100pF
C33L
100K 1/16W
R7L
50V 100pF
C4L
100K 1/16W
R7R
470 1/16W
TUNER_L
TUNER_R
50V 100pF
C15R
AGND
R29R
50V 100pF
C33R
470 1/16W
R6L
KTD1302
Q79
3.3K 1/16W
R92
R57R
470 1/16W
C51R
4u7F 50V
R6R C4R
100K 1/16W
+ 1 3 IC74 R58R
2-
BA4558
50V 4u7F
C52R
100pF 50V
R57L
470
C51L
4u7F 50V
100K 1/16W
R58L
AGND
6 BA4558
5 + IC74 7
-
8 VCC
ISS133 47uH
D88
ISS133
D87
ISS133
D85
L01
C52L
VIDEO_SW_1
VIDEO_SW_2
VIDEO_SW_3
1 VIDEO_SW_1 2 VIDEO_SW_2 3 VIDEO_SW_3 4 5 6 T_MUTE 7 SM7346_CE 8 SM7346_DATA 9 SM7346_CLK 10 7821_DATA 11 7821_CLK 12 7821_CE 13SUB_ON/OFF 14 AV_SWITCH 15 +5V(MCU) 16 +12V 17 TUNER_R 18 AGND 19 TUNER_L
CVS_OUT
+3.3V
DGND
DGND
+3.3V
CVS_IN
AGND
AGND
DVD_L
DVD_R
R_IN
L_IN
+15V
AGND
+15V
-15V
AGND
VGND
VGND
AGND
+5V
+5V
+5V
AGND
-15V
DGND
1SS133
ISS133
VGND
22nF 50V
PC14
D81
D82
C94
FROM VIDEO BD
10
11
NC2A
NC7A
FROM MICOM
NC4
FROM DSP
10
11
12
13
14
NC13
15
VCR IN
RED
1 C2R
R3R
R4R
100pF 50V
C30R
C100
560 1/16W
4u7F 50V
BA4558
14
BLK
50V 100pF
C2L
220K 1/16W
R4L
100pF 50V
C30L
1uF 50V
100K 1/16W
R20SR SR_PREAMP_IN
C9SR
5 + IC86 7
SR_PREAMP_OUT
13
JACK102
2
R3L
470 1/16W
R97
AGND
12
33pF 50V
C10SL
C11SL
100K 1/16W 3.3K 1/16W
R22SL
100PF 50V
SW_PREAMP_OUT
R21SR
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MAIN PCB
Notes : 1. All resistance values are indicated in ohms (K=1000 ohms, M=1000 Kohms). 2. All capacitance values are indicated in oF (p=10-6 oF).
R545R546
10K 10K 10K 10K
NC9
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
NC7
DGND
+5V 47uH AV-SWITCH SUB-ON/OFF CE(7821) CLK(7821) DATA(7821) CLK(7346) DATA(7346) CE(7346) T-MUTE
TP01
50V
R522
OUT
NC9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IN
DGND
IC501
100nF
X501
100K
SW-MUTE C-MUTE
10K
AGND J511 J511 FOR USA R523 J512 FOR EUR(RDS) J513 FOR KROEU R524 J514 FOR EUR R525 J512 J513 J514
10K 10K
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 R551
PA1/AN1 PA0/ANO AVREF PB7/SO1 PB6/SI1 SCK1 PB5/ PB4/SO0 PB3//SI0 SCK0 PB2/ CS0 PB1/ PB0/CINT PC7/KR7 PC6/KR6 PC5/KR5 PC4/KR4 PC3/KR3 PC2/KR2 PC1/KR1 PC0/KR0 PE7/TO/ADJ PWM PE6/ PE5 PE4/RMC NMI PE3/INT3/ PE2/INT2 EC1 INT1 PE1/ EC0 INT0 PE0/ NC G0/A0 G1/A1
50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
PA4/A51 PD3/A52 PD2/A53 PD1/A54 PD0/A55 VFDP VDD TEX TX VSS XTAL EXTAL RST AVSS PA7/AN7 PA6/AN6 PA5/AN5 PA4/AN4 PA3/AN3 PA2/AN2
A20 81 A19 82 A18 83 A17 84 A16 85 G15/A15 86 G14/A14 87 G13/A13 88 VDD189 G12/A12 90 G11/A11 91 G10/A10 92 G9/A993 G8/A894 G7/A795 G6/A696 G5/A597 G4/A4 G3/A398 G2/A2 99 100
DGND
C503
PD5/A50 51 PD6/A49 52 PD7/A48 53 PF0/A47 54 PF1/A46 55 PF2/A45 56 PF3/A44 57 PF4/A43 58 PF5/A42 59 PF6/A41 60 PF7/A40 61 PG0/A39 62 PG1/A38 63 PG2/A37 64 PG3/A36 65 PG4/A35 66 PG5/A34 67 PG6/A33 68 PG7/A32 69 PH0/A31 70 PH1/A30 71 PH2/A29 72 PH3/A28 73 PH4/A27 74 PH5/A26 75 PH6/A25 76 PH7/A24 77 A23 78 A22 79 A21 80
R552
R540 10K
10K
AGND
R544
D505
DGND
10K
1k
R529
R528
R526
R527
R518 R519
R520 R521
GND
C505 Q501
DGND NC8
R532
1K2
R533 47 R534
47 47
R537
1uF
TUNED 13 12 VCC-12V 11 LOUT 10 GND 9 ROUT 8 CE-PLL 7 DATA-OUT-PLL 6 PLL-CLK 5 DATA-IN-PLL 4 3 RDS-CLK 2 RDS-DATA 1
R53010K
100K
R538 R536
10K
L501 C506
100uF 10V 47uH
10K
10K
D501
4K7
4K7
4K7
4K7
D502
1nF
C504
50V
A-BOOST 19 DSP-A15 18 DSP-A16 17 DSP-A17 16 15 14 RST(8415) 13 RST(49326) 12 DATA-IN(8415) 11 DSP-INTREQ 10 DATA-IN(49326) 9 DSP-DATA_OUT 8 DSP-CLK 7 CE(49326) 6 CE(4228) 5 RST(4228) 4 EMPHASIS 3 CE(8415) 2 1
R550
50V
DGND
10K
10K
DGND
C507 R539
DGND POWER-DOWN
56K
DGND AGND
R501
R502
R503
R504
R505
R506
R507
R508
R509
R510
10K R512
R511
R513
R514
R515
R516
C501
NC12
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
1K
1K
1K
1K
820P 50V
R517
NC5
DGND
DGND
10K
D503
DGND
MITSUMI
2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228
2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)
Monolithic IC MM1221~MM1228
Outline
These ICs are high grade video switches with 2-input 1-output or 3-input 1-output and built-in 75 driver. The series includes those with and without built-in clamp and 6dB amp circuits. Circuit configuration tables and block diagrams are as follows. MM1228 is used as the representative model in this description.
MM1221
MM1222
MM1223
MM1224
MM1225
MM1226
MM1227
MM1228
MITSUMI
2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228
Control input truth table SW1 L H L/H SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 SW1 L H L/H
MITSUMI
2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228
3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (with 75 driver, clamp and 6dB amp)
Monolithic IC MM1228
Outline
This is a high performance 3-input 1-output video switch IC with 6dB amp, clamp and 75 driver circuits. Output is 75, and a 1VP-P video signal can be output externally.
Features
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Built-in 75 driver circuit Built-in 6dB amp Built-in clamp circuit Models in the MM1221~MM1228 series without clamp circuits able to support audio or chroma circuits Mute operation possible Wide operating power supply voltage range 4.7~13V Low current consumption Wideband frequency response 7MHz @ 0dB -70dB (4.43MHz) Crosstalk
Package
SOP-8C (MM1228XF) SIP-8A (MM1228XS)
Applications
1. 2. 3. 4. TV VCR Video cameras Other video equipment
Block Diagram
Control input truth table SW1 L H L/H SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3
MITSUMI
2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228
2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)
Monolithic IC MM1221~MM1228
Outline
These ICs are high grade video switches with 2-input 1-output or 3-input 1-output and built-in 75 driver. The series includes those with and without built-in clamp and 6dB amp circuits. Circuit configuration tables and block diagrams are as follows. MM1228 is used as the representative model in this description.
MM1221
MM1222
MM1223
MM1224
MM1225
MM1226
MM1227
MM1228
MITSUMI
2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228
Control input truth table SW1 L H L/H SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 SW1 L H L/H
MITSUMI
2-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver)/3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (75 driver) MM1221~1228
3-Input 1-Output Video Switch (with 75 driver, clamp and 6dB amp)
Monolithic IC MM1228
Outline
This is a high performance 3-input 1-output video switch IC with 6dB amp, clamp and 75 driver circuits. Output is 75, and a 1VP-P video signal can be output externally.
Features
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Built-in 75 driver circuit Built-in 6dB amp Built-in clamp circuit Models in the MM1221~MM1228 series without clamp circuits able to support audio or chroma circuits Mute operation possible Wide operating power supply voltage range 4.7~13V Low current consumption Wideband frequency response 7MHz @ 0dB -70dB (4.43MHz) Crosstalk
Package
SOP-8C (MM1228XF) SIP-8A (MM1228XS)
Applications
1. 2. 3. 4. TV VCR Video cameras Other video equipment
Block Diagram
Control input truth table SW1 L H L/H SW2 L L H OUT IN1 IN2 IN3
MITSUMI
Features
(1) Low power consumption achieved. (2) Low power supply voltage realized. (3) Frequency bandwidth without 75 driver: 10MHz (4) Cross talk 70dB When 4.43MHz (5) With SAG measures pin (75 driver and Y/C mix driver) with 75 driver: 7MHz
Package
SOT-26A (with 75 driver) SOT-26B (without 75 driver)
Applications
(1) TV (2) VTR (3) Video camera (4) Digital still camera (5) Other visual equipment
Line-up
Functions Model Name Input Output MM1501 MM1502 MM1503 MM1504 MM1505 MM1506 MM1507 MM1508 MM1509 MM1510 MM1511 MM1512 Clamp 6dB amp 75 driver SAG measures pin Power supply voltage 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V
Switch
1 1
1 1 / /
MITSUMI
Block Diagram
MM1501 MM1502
MM1503
MM1504
MM1505
MM1506
MITSUMI
Features
(1) Low power consumption achieved. (2) Low power supply voltage realized. (3) Frequency bandwidth without 75 driver: 10MHz (4) Cross talk 70dB When 4.43MHz (5) With SAG measures pin (75 driver and Y/C mix driver) with 75 driver: 7MHz
Package
SOT-26A (with 75 driver) SOT-26B (without 75 driver)
Applications
(1) TV (2) VTR (3) Video camera (4) Digital still camera (5) Other visual equipment
Line-up
Functions Model Name Input Output MM1501 MM1502 MM1503 MM1504 MM1505 MM1506 MM1507 MM1508 MM1509 MM1510 MM1511 MM1512 Clamp 6dB amp 75 driver SAG measures pin Power supply voltage 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V 4.5~13.0V
Switch
1 1
1 1 / /
MITSUMI
Block Diagram
MM1501 MM1502
MM1503
MM1504
MM1505
MM1506
L_+12VM
LC7
22UH C115
100uF
R167
R174
47K KTA1504
1.8K
10uF
Q4
5.6K
R166 470 5 6 7 8
R173
R165
C114
D20
IN4148
22
22
DGND
TRAY_MTRAY_M+
Vin1 Vin2
PVcc
SVcc
Vctl
TRAY_SENSE KTC3875
Q3
10K
L_MGND
N601
100K
R63
1uF
C112
R62
Vo1
10K
R64
D18
U13
R65
10K
10nF
R66 L_MGND
C113
R67
470
L_MGND
L_MGND LC10
+9VM
+5VD
1K R197
R198 1K
DGND 5 6 7 8
Vo1
Vin1 Vin2
Vctl
PVcc
SVcc
10nF C123
5.6V D12
R246
470
L_MGND
MOTOR1
+ -
CN320A
CN304B
S2
S2
S4
S4
S3
S3
M2IN2
M2IN2
M1IN2
M1IN2
SURGE
4094-STB
M1IN1
M1IN1
S1
S1
4094-DATA
MGND
MGND
4094-CLK
10
MGND
MGND
+3V3
16
16
11
M2IN1
M2IN1
11
STR
FRONT-GND 7 2
VDD
15
15
12
S5
S5
12
DATA
MGND 8 3
OE Q5 Q6
12 14 13
5 W301 1 +
C204 100nF 50V
14 COM 1 13 7
13
S6
S6
13
VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC202 FAN8082 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1
C201 220UF 16V C202 100nF 50V
MOTOR2
-
CLK
+9V 9 4
Q1
R101 10K 1/4W 5
+9V
+9V
14
IC101 CD4094BE
5 5 6 INH
IC102 CD4051BE
0 12 3 11 A 10
Q2
6
Q7
11
Q3
7
Q8
10
Q4
8
Q'S
9
7 VEE 8 VSS C B
VSS
R102 330 1/4W C101 47uF 50V
QS
CN310
2
LED+
CN311
2
S7
1
FRONT-GND
1
FRONT-GND
2
S6
1
S5
FRONT-GND
FRONT-GND
FRONT-GND
NOTES:
S6 S5
LED+
S7
1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/8W B. All Capacitor values are in F
SENSOR
SW205
SW206
S101
LED
S102
SENSOR-OUT BOARD
SENSOR-IN BOARD
SWITCH BOARD
specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
MOTOR1
+ -
CN320A
CN304B
S2
S2
S4
S4
S3
S3
M2IN2
M2IN2
M1IN2
M1IN2
SURGE
4094-STB
M1IN1
M1IN1
S1
S1
4094-DATA
MGND
MGND
4094-CLK
10
MGND
MGND
+3V3
16
16
11
M2IN1
M2IN1
11
STR
FRONT-GND 7 2
VDD
15
15
12
S5
S5
12
DATA
MGND 8 3
OE Q5 Q6
12 14 13
5 W301 1 +
C204 100nF 50V
14 COM 1 13 7
13
S6
S6
13
VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC202 FAN8082 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1
C201 220UF 16V C202 100nF 50V
MOTOR2
-
CLK
+9V 9 4
Q1
R101 10K 1/4W 5
+9V
+9V
14
IC101 CD4094BE
5 5 6 INH
IC102 CD4051BE
0 12 3 11 A 10
Q2
6
Q7
11
Q3
7
Q8
10
Q4
8
Q'S
9
7 VEE 8 VSS C B
VSS
R102 330 1/4W C101 47uF 50V
QS
CN310
2
LED+
CN311
2
S7
1
FRONT-GND
1
FRONT-GND
2
S6
1
S5
FRONT-GND
FRONT-GND
FRONT-GND
NOTES:
S6 S5
LED+
S7
1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/8W B. All Capacitor values are in F
SENSOR
SW205
SW206
S101
LED
S102
SENSOR-OUT BOARD
SENSOR-IN BOARD
SWITCH BOARD
specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
SW003 1 2
8 SW004 1 2
MOTOR1
+ -
N008
N001
1 FRONT-GND FRONT-GND
2 1 3 2 1 2
S2
S2
P008
S4
S4
S3
S3
M2IN2
M2IN2
M1IN2
M1IN2
M1IN1
M1IN1
S7 S6 S5
S1
S1
MGND
MGND
10
MGND
MGND
11
M2IN1
M2IN1
11
12
S5
S5
12
5 P024 1 +
13
S6
S6
13
VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC002 BA4558 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1
C005 330uf 16V C001 100nF 25V C004 100nF 25V
MOTOR2
-
14
DRV12V
DRV12V
14
N002
1N4002
D005
1N4002
5
D004
N003
7 6
N007
S6
FRONT-GND
LED+
S5
N012 LED+
FRONT-GND
NOTES:
S6 S5
P007
AUDIO-R AUDIO-L
P006
D003
P010
N004
1 2
P005
OP01
TCM
MODULE
TCM MODULE
SENSOR-OUT BOARD
SWITCH BOARD
specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
SW003 1 2
8 SW004 1 2
MOTOR1
+ -
N008
N001
1 FRONT-GND FRONT-GND
2 1 3 2 1 2
S2
S2
P008
S4
S4
S3
S3
M2IN2
M2IN2
M1IN2
M1IN2
M1IN1
M1IN1
S7 S6 S5
S1
S1
MGND
MGND
10
MGND
MGND
11
M2IN1
M2IN1
11
12
S5
S5
12
5 P024 1 +
13
S6
S6
13
VO2 SVCC PVCC VIN2 IC002 BA4558 GND VO1 VCTL VIN1
C005 330uf 16V C001 100nF 25V C004 100nF 25V
MOTOR2
-
14
DRV12V
DRV12V
14
N002
1N4002
D005
1N4002
5
D004
N003
7 6
N007
S6
FRONT-GND
LED+
S5
N012 LED+
FRONT-GND
NOTES:
S6 S5
P007
AUDIO-R AUDIO-L
P006
D003
P010
N004
1 2
P005
OP01
TCM
MODULE
TCM MODULE
SENSOR-OUT BOARD
SWITCH BOARD
specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
This Section is currently not available. Look for new or revised information on CD Updates.
TO DSP BD
6 5 4 3
CN611
47uF 16V
C87
100nF 50V
C91
C92
C8847uF 16V
C89
100nF 50V 2
1 GND
C93
47pF 50V
JACK112 COAXIL IN
C90
2 VCC 3 INPUT
1 INPUT
2 GND
JACK110
FIBER OPTIC
JACK111
OPT IN
OPT OUT
+VDD
-VEE
C644FR
C645FR
100pF
50V
NC757
1
+5V
10pF
N758
2
To Fan
F_MUTE
ISS133
D530
ISS133
C646FR
R647FR
1uF 100V
1uF 100V
C710
C711
15k 1/16W
Q682 DTA114YS
50V 910
R646FR
1/16W
AGND
Power Amplifier
R652FL
22
R640FR
D501L
ISS133
50V
D501
D502L
470pF
47K 1/16W
R643FR
C643FR
D501R
D502R
R640FL
22K
1/4W
C649FR
50V
C646FL
R647FL
3 4 5 6 7 8
R648FR
10 1/4W
R646FL
C645FL
C647FR
100pF
C644FL
100nF 50V
Q684 DTA114YS
C649SL
C_MUTE
47uF 25V
3 EMIT
100nF 50V
50V
KTD1302
910 1/16W
ISS133
C648FR
SPK_RELAY
+5V
D532
10pF
F_MUTE
15k 1/16W
1/4W
COL 2
KTD1302
10k 1/16W
-VEE
2 1
AGND
Q635SR
10
R644SR
3.3K 1/16W
4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8
C644SR
22K 1/4W
R653SR
1/4W
C645SR
NC6
1
F_LOUT AGND F_ROUT AGND S_LOUT AGND S_ROUT AGND C_OUT AGND SW_OUT +15V -15V +5V +5VA
R25FL
1K 1/16W
3 EMIT
910 1/16W
AGND
R646SR
Q685 DTA114YS
+5V
100pF
ISS133
50V
D533
47uF
R651SL
C647SL
22 1/4W
100 1W
1SS133
D676
C646SR
R647SR
15k 1/16W
1uF 100V
1uF 100V
100nF 50V
C713
R25FR
1K 1/16W
C712
SW_MUTE
ISS133
22 1/4W 0.5uH
2 COL
D504
10pF
BASE
L635SL
D503L
Q635SW
KTD1302
R643SL
C643SL
D504L
ISS133
47K 1/16W
470pF
1K 1/16W
R648SR
47K 1/16W
R643SR
C643SR
D503R
ISS133
470pF
R25SR
1K 1/16W 4.7uF 50V
D504R
100nF 50V
R25C
1K 1/16W
100k 1/16W
4u7F 50V
R640SL
ISS133
1K 1/4W
4u7F 50V
R24SR
R657
1k 1/16W
C642SR
100nF 50V
-IN_B
OUT_B
C647SR C648SR
C630R
C12SR
AGND
1K 1/16W
+IN_B
GND_B
12
AGND
10
2 1
10 1/4W
AGND
R649SR
R645SR
13
10
50V
1/4W
1/16W
+IN_A
LM4766
IC613
GND_A
10
R24SL
100k 1/16W
1K
R648SL
AGND
10 1/4W
R649SL
R25SL
4u7F 50V
1k 1/16W
ISS133
4u7F 50V
C642SL
R640SR
R645SL
50V
-IN_A
OUT_A
W05B
1/4W
NC
NC
VCC_A VCC_B
W05A
3
1K 1/4W
100nF 50V
C12SL
9 14
2 15
C648SL
COL 2
R644SW
3.3K 1/16W
50V
Q686 KRC107M
6 11
MUTE_A MUTE_B
VEE
100 1W
R710
C646SL
R647SL
C616R
100nF 16V
R25SW
1K 1/16W
1K 1/16W
15k 1/16W
R622R
AGND
10pF
10
R602
L635SR
0.5uH
PW01B
1 2 3 4
NW01A
1 2 3 4
50V
22K
KTD1302
+VDD
-VEE
AGND
R652SL
22 1/4W
AGND
R708
R653SL
3.3 1/16W
Q635C
R652FR
25V
22nF 50V
22 1/4W
C649SR
D503
BASE
COL 2
R644C
AGND
R651FR
3 4
22nF 50V
ISS133
L635FR
0.5uH
AGND
1 BASE
AGND
AGND
22nF 50V
R_MUTE
Q635SL
AGND
R601
R649FR R648FL
D502
BASE
10
R649FL
3.3 1/16W
10 1/4W
2 COL
22K
C_MUTE
R_MUTE
ISS133
R644SL
100k 1/16W
6 11
ISS133
1K 1/4W
MUTE_A MUTE_B
VEE
W04A
R653FL
1k 1/16W
4u7F 50V
+VCC
R653FR
R24FR
100nF 50V
1/4W
1/4W
100 1W
1SS133
10uF 50V
R655
C642FR
R709
D675
22nF 50V
C649FL
PC9
ISS133
SW_MUTE
3 EMIT
470pF
AGND
Q635FR
KTD1302
C12FR
AGND
100nF 50V
AGND
1K
1/16W
+IN_B
GND_B
C648FL C647FL
+5V
50V
R644FR
3.3K 1/16W
100k 1/16W
R643FL
C643FL
Q635FL
KTD1302
1k 1/16W
ISS133
47K 1/16W
R24FL
R645FL
1K
7 8 13 12
-IN_A
3 5 10 1
1K 1/4W
C12FL
10uF 50V
R654
C642FL
4u7F 50V
9 14
NC
NC
2 15
47uF 25V
R645FR
1/16W
+IN_A
LM4766
IC612
GND_A
W04B
3 2
R651FL L635FL
0.5uH
1/4W
22 1/4W
-IN_B
OUT_B
AGND
3 PW02B NW02A 6 4
RLY601 OSA-SS-212DM3 1
BUS4
NJ601B
1
2 5
AGND
R651SR
22 22
R624R
R623R
910 1/16W
12
100k
120
1/16w
R646SL
R625R
R650L
R621L
68K 1/16W
6.8K 1/16W
22K 1/16W
-15V
C645SL
R652SR
22 22
1/16W
11
1/4W 1/4W
100pF 50V
C644SL
GND
OUT_2
R653SW
22K 1/16W
100k 1/16W
1/16W
R646SW
C646SW
R647SW
1uF 100V
1uF 100V
C714
C715
3 4 5
H/P_L
1K 1/16W
4.7uF 50V
C630L
15k 1/16W
D505L
R640SW
D506L
470pF 50V
ISS133
KTA1266Y
C643C
HP_IN
+5V
KTD1302
Q601L
R627L
3.3K 1/16W
+15V
27K 1/16W
R671
2K2R 1/16W
C679
2.2UF 50V
Q672
7
1K 1K
R678
KTA1266Y
R643SW
47K 1/16W
D534
3 EMIT COL 2
ISS133
D505R
R2
ISS133
R673
2K2R 1/16W
R675
C677
10NF 50 560KR 1/16W
Q673
560R 1/16W
100K 1/16W
R24C
R643C
47K 1/16W
C12SW
4u7F 50V
AGND
R659
1k 1/16W
R645SW
1/16W
R645C
8 13 12
-IN_A
3 5 10 1
+IN_A
1/16W
AGND
+IN_B
LM4766
IC614
GND_A
W03B
3 2 1
100nF 50V
1K 1/4W
DGND
ISS133
C12C
4u7F 50V
1k 1/16W
R658
C642C
4u7F 50V
9 14
NC
NC
2 15
100nF 50V
10pF
KTD1302
C647SW C648SW
AGND
Q601R
50V
R627R
3.3K 1/16W
C616L
R622L
+15V
100nF 16V
10 1/4W
R648SW
1SS133
1/4W
910
L635SW
0.5uH
R652SW
22 1/4W
10
GND_B
AGND
R651SW
22 1/4W
Q681
BASE
D506R
ISS133
D670
1SS133
100k 1/16W
4u7F 50V
KTC3200BL
C646C
1/16W 10k
R647C
15k 1/16W
910 1/16W
+VCC
C645C
+VDD
-15V
27K 1/16W
2K2R 1/16W
R670
R672
2K2R 1/16W
10NF 50V
AGND
C644C
47uF 25V
R3
C678
100pF 50V
DGND
AGND
2.2K 1/16W
R711
KTA1268BL
Q671
R646C
LIMIT-
-VEE
AGND
10pF 50V
AGND
3K3R 1/16W
Q670
R674
560KR 1/16W
R677
LIMIT+
680nF 50V
C3
6 11
1K 1/4W
MUTE_A MUTE_B
VEE
R640C
R24SW
C642SW
-IN_B
OUT_B
R603
2SC1740S
Q690
2SC1740S
Q689
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/10W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
22K
22K
H/P_R
R650R
R621R
R624L
R623L
68K 1/16W
6.8K 1/16W
R653C
100pF
PC606
120 1/16W
AGND
D677
1/4W
1/4W
R649SW R648C
To Headphone
VCC
IN+_2
IN-_2
100nF 50V
C644SW
47uF
C617L
47nF 16V
AGND
+VDD
-VEE
C645SW
50V
C648C C647C
100nF 50V
HEADPHONE AMP
OUT_1
IN+_1
IN-_1
47uF 25V
C617R
47nF 16V
R651C L635C
0.5uH
R652C
1/4W
1/4W
AGND
DGND NJ601A
13
15
IC610 NJM4556A
PW03B
6 7 5
3 6 4
RLY603 OSA-SS-212DM3 1
14
2 3 4
R649C
10 1/4W
R625L
1/4W
25V
2 5
10
C716
470uF 10V
Power Amplifier
P502
Alternate
Europe Only
2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum
100nF 50V
BUFFER_DRIVER
12
IN+ SGND
STBY-GND
P501
1
-VS
15
IN_R
R502R
24K 1/16W
R507R
100K 1/16W
C507R
470pF 50V
AGND
AGND
R507L
-PWVS
STBY 9
C524
AGND
100nF 50V
C518R R512R
4R7 1/4W 100nF 16V
AGND
AGND
BUFFER_DRIVER
+PWVS
+VS
MAIN BD
N701
1
C502R
1uF 50V
STBY-GND
TO
D501
470 1/2W 1/2W 2.4V
JP501
4.7v 1/2W
-VS
D504
AGND
22uF 50V
100nF 50V
15
R530
2.2K 1/2W
GND
-30V
10
AGND
AGND
1.5K 1/16W
R532
33K 1/16W
22uF 50V
C535
C520
68K 1/16W
-PWVS
R502
C502
100pF 50V
KTC3875GR
Q501
10
STBY
CLIP_DET
AGND
MUTE
TDA7296
12
0 1/16W
R501
1N4148
14
C533
OUT
1NF 50V
C522R 2
ININ+ SGND
100nF 50V
C501R
5pF 50V
R501R
33k 1/16W
C505R
1NF 50V
L501R
0.5uH
C521R
100nF 16V
13
11
AGND
R510R
10 1/4W
D503
IC502
BOOT_LOADER BOOTSTRAP
L502R
6.5uH
2K2 1/16W
R505R
D501R
1N4148
R531
2.2K 1/2W
GND
11
C525
100nF
2200uF 35v
13
100nF 50V
C517
12
D505
50V
100nF 50V
D506
F503
US: 5S3A250V
100nF 50V
C527
1N5402
GND1
100nF 50V
C528
1N5402
D508 1N5402
GND1
N/A
ON XFORMER BD
IN_L
R502L
24K 1/16W
C502L
1uF 50V 100K 1/16W
10
C507L
470pF 50V
CLIP_DET
AGND
MUTE
TDA7296
IC501
BOOT_LOADER BOOTSTRAP
R505L
2K2 1/16W
C505L D501L
1N4148 1NF 50V
C518L
100nF 16V
GND1
OUTPUT
4R7 1/4W
AGND
C537
22uF 25V
L501L
0.5uH
14
R512L
C521L
100nF 16V
MAIN OUTPUT
1NF 50V
+PWVS
+VS
C504L
C501L
5pF 50V OUT
R501L
33k 1/16W
13
11
IN-
R510L
10 1/4W
L502L
6.5uH
L OUTPUT
NJ501
5S3A250V
GND1
X803
X883
JP883
JP881 LIVE L
P001A
N002
1/2W 7.5V
D819
10K 1/16W
R885
D821
PF01
JW06 JW07
5
1/4W 100
R886
JW05
AGND
C532
100nF 50V
C531 50V
100nF
TO N805
0.22
RF505
3300uF 16V/25V
D510
1N4001
D512
D511
D509
AGND
1/2W
FROM AC BOARD
X804
R881
3M3 1/4W
C806
1
R888 R889
1 1/4W 1/4W
JW08
PAGE 9-1
PAGE 9-1
TO FRONT BOARD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3.3VAC-
A_GND
U_GND
-27V
U_GND
P/C
P/D
P/D
5.5V
2 3 4 5 6
3.3VAC+
VEE
P/C
5.5V
SW751
CP754
1
1 PUSH_TYPE 2 C752
4N7F 250V
A_GND D751
1SS133
N L
VCC
1 2
RLY751
4 3
C751
CP755
1
SDT-SS-112DM
4N7F 250V
N R753
GND
2 3
Q751
DTC114YSA
2 3 4 5 6
T1.25(EU)/S2.5(US) 250V
F751
3M3R 1W
CP753
1
TO TRANSFORMER PRIMARY
US ONLY
4700uf 50V
D665
+ -
63V 22NF
~1
C669
C672
~2
4700uf 50V
63V 22NF
CN4A
1
C670
2 3
R667
100R 1/4W
10uF 35V
C675
R668
100R 1/4W
KTA1273Y 50V
Q655
R665
35V 10uF
R664
50v 100nf 100R 1W
1N4003
CN4B
1
220R 1/4W
MAIN2+
1R 1W
R666
10KR 1/4W
D666
27V
C676
C673
47OUF 35V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1000uf 16V
C667
-15V
470uf 16V
C668
100NF 50V
IC657
78M15
1N4003
C661
2 GND
IN 1
C663 C664
2200uf 25V
D661
1N4003
1N4003
D659
63V 22NF
C662
1 GND
OUT
C679 C660
VO
KIA78R33/15PI 4
IC656 3
IC658
IN
470UF 25V
GNDCON
VIN
R659
R657
4R7 1W 1N4003
R656
1R 1W
1K0R 1/4W
C659
2 GND C680
OUT 3
IC655
78M05
C657
IN 1
100UF 16V
R658
4R7 1W
D658 D657
1N4003 1N4003
D656
C658
C656
100UF 16V
C655
1N4003
D655
1R 1W
R655
EU: jumper
US: resistor
R502L
56k 1/16W
FILENAME:crkd2109.SCH
R552
Q504 R517L
to main BD
C501L
AUDIO_L
C502L
C503L
22uF 50V
7.5k 1/16W
R507L
R508L
1K 1/16W
C507L
2u2F 50V
100V
R502
100 1W
10K 1/16W
1n2F
100nF 16V
100nF 16V
R503L
C513L
6
470K 1/16W
2N5551
R518L
D504 R505L
1/16W 12K
R501L
56k 1/16W
Q503
47K
56K 1/16W
100K 1/16W
1/16W
COL
0.5W
50V
3.3K 1/16W
R530
C504
C508L
50V 470pF
47UF
1.5K 1/4W
R551
Q505 R517R
2N5551
C504L
C511L
50V
R511L
10
C505L
220P 50V
12
-VCC
-VH
-VL
10K 1/16W
50V
7.5k 1/16W
1uF 50V
56K
C513R
C504R
1n2F
1uF 50V
3.3K 1/16W
Q502
R518R
39k
R541
COL
R501R
100P
COL
56k 1/16W
R503R
R512R
100K 1/16W
470K 1/16W
C508R
R509R
BASE
18
C510L
CH2_IN
R513L
R515L
4.7R 1W
CH2_O-
0R22x2 (5W)
50V 470pF
56K 1/16W
50V 220n
KRA102S
EMIT 3
C512L
50V
AMP
CH2_NF
11
1/16W
L503R
5UH
C501R
AUDIO_R
C502R
Q501
C509L
220uF 10V
R510L
560 1/16W
L501L
C515R
50V 220n
55048920.S20
1W 4.7R
R506R
1/16W 8.2k 220P
1N4148
C516
1W 4.7R
56k
C509R
R535
10K 1/16W
C514R
C512
47uf 16V
BA4560 GND 4
10
100r 1/16W
100P
560 1/16W
R533
C510R
C512R
15
CH1_NF
CH1_O-
0R22x2 (5W)
50V 220n
C513
L501R
100uF 16V
1/16W
22K
L501
1/16W
R507
R511R
C511R
R505
R506
BRO RED +
13
C561
50V
27K 1/16W
-VH
27K 1/16W
56K
KTA1271
R508
27K 1/16W
27K 1/16W
+VCC
+VH
+VL
0.5W
22UF 25V
Q521
3P
R511
1/16W
Q507 KTC3875GR
1K 1/16W
D503
to n804
1/16W
10K R509
p804
+VH
R504
1/4W 3.3k
R555
2.2K
Q509
KTC2804
1/16W
D508
10V
gnd
C508
R503
15k
R540
7.5V
BLK
50V
25V
R510
470R
C811 C806
250v
-VL
-
Q508
47uF
3300UF
47UF 100V
2.7K
1/16W
1/16W 1/16W
C816
100nf
100nf
250v
G5SBA-600V AC2
C817
2.2k
14
3UH
1/16W
470uH
R554
R514
C501
CH1_IN
16V 10k
CH1_O+
TO X'FORMER BOARD
Q513
2N5551
1
ECO
KTA1271
AC1
3300UF
C818
220N
R522
250v
100nf
C812
22K 1/16W
D102
R518
1W 100
FAN
R520 Q514
22K 1/16W
Q511
50V
16V
R516
C813
N801
R521
2N5401
JW01
10K 1/16W
+
VVV T200mA-65V.
1
ST-BY
10K 1/16W
R519
1/16W 10K
820R
C510
2N5551
Q515 N800
2N5401
R524
D819
D809
+VL
Q512 KTC3875GR
TO BOTTOM
100K 1/16W
ICP1
1N4148
Q516
100uF 25V
250v 100nf
R523
R515
100 1/16W
C815
R517
1/4W
D507
N802
100nf
250v
22K 1/16W
PROTECTOR
1n4001
1n4001
P006B
1N5392
1N5392
D813
D812
IN 3 ADJUST
1
OUT 2 R804
1/21W 100
JP804
KTA1273Y Q802
1N4001
0.27R 1W
R810
2
D815
1N5392 1N5392
IC503
C824
10V 220U
3.8V-
D814
3.8V+
3
25V 33300UF
250v
C822
P006A
250v
1/16W
C820
R803
N803
10V 10U
R805
1/4w 2.2K
240R 1/4w
TUNER-12V
D810
-30V
C823
7.5V
D816
100nf
C819
100nf
R806
P005
1 to N701
10K
1/16W
R824
1/4W 1R
R801
100 1/4W
1/4W 100
to newo5
1/4W
1R
R823
R802
SPK
MUTE -30V
R536
1/16W
AMP
4.7R 1W
5uh
NJ501
220U
50V
R510R
STK412.PRT
R513R
R515R
50V 220n
L503L
1n2F
IC502
220uF 10V
VCC
C515L
50V
REL1
SUB_GND
CMPR+
R516R
50V
C505R
R553
R502R
STK412-010
220u 25V
1/16W
10K
5UH
L504L
5UH
33K 1/16W
16
1/16W
1/16W
MUTE
BIAS
IC501
D501
R501
OSA-SS-212DM3
R516L
KTC3875GR
CMPR-
L504R
R507R
1n2F
100nF 16V
100nF 16V
1
0.47uf 50V
17
10
3UH
C514L
1/16W 1K
R508R
1K 1/16W
C507R
2u2F 50V
KTC3203Y
Q506
Q520
50V
CH2_O+
+ + + +
LA4270
AC INPUT
TO MAIN PCB
TO SPK PCB
R600
100R
R601
10K
R602
1K
L603L
6.5UH
C601L 6 7 3 2
100NF 50V
RN1408 Q601 3
10K 25V 470uF 1
L602 L603R
6.5UH
100NF
5 4 1 C601R
50V
NJ504
R612R
C605R 8 D601
4.7V
7 IC601 LM4809
6.5UH
C515
470uF 10V
GND
GND
P401
P402
1
AUDIO-R
4 C605L
470uF 25V
C611R C604
GND 6 50V 4.7UF 50V
AUDIO-L 5
R611L
1K
2U2
N402
R611R
1K
10K 2U2
R612L
C611L
HP/IN 4 50V C810 3300uf 63v
NJ516
AUX IN
H/P-MUTE 3
+7V 2 100NF
C801
TO POWER AMP BD 250V GND 1
D101
GBU8J-8A-600V
2 to p804
N805
3
1 100NF
C802
250V
C809
1
100NF
3300uf 63v
C804
250V
N804
PROJECT NOTES
PROJECT NOTES
PROJECT NOTES
PROJECT NOTES
PROJECT NOTES
FM STEREO ALIGNMENT
Test Points: Input: Output: TP001 TP005 TP001G (RFGND) IC001 Pin26 (DGND)
Connect an FM IF signal to TP001 (FM_IN) through a 1nF capacitor in series with a 10K resistor. Connect an Oscilloscope to the IF signal output at TP003 (Pin 33 of IC001) through a 4.7 uF capacitor. Align TF006 to obtain a clear display on the oscilloscope without any interference. Ensure that the curve is not saturated. Tune the set to 98.10 MHz Apply an un-modulated mono RF signal at 98.10 MHz with RF input level of 1 mV. Connect a frequency counter to TP003 (Pin 33 of IC001) thru a capacitor 0.1 uF Check TP003 and align TF006 to get 10.7 MHz 10 KHz.
Set frequency to 87.5 MHz. Adjust FM Osc coil (L004) to obtain 1.0 to 1.05V at TP002 (VT). Set frequency to 108.10 MHz. Adjust Vari-Cap (CV002) to obtain 7.0V 0.5 at TP002. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above until the band coverages falls within the specified VT voltage. Feed a FM RF signal to a matching balanced pad of (50 ohm - 75 ohm) at TP 001 and RFGND. Use the circuit in figure 3 to detect the signal from TP 007/008. Set frequency to 90.10 MHz and adjust L003 until maximum amplitude is reached. Set frequency to 106.10 MHz to see whether approximate amplitude is the same as in step 6. Set frequency to 98.10 MHz and check for approximate amplitude.
GENESCOPE
FIGURE 4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
TUNER SECTION
TP-001
TUNER TP-001
Figure 2.
1.00V DC Voltmeter
4.7uF
7.
Apply an un-modulated mono RF signal at 98.10 MHz with RF input level of 1 mV. Search to 98.10 MHz (Remove the VT probe during search) Connect a 10K from TP005 to GND. Connect a frequency counter to TP005 (Pin 24 of IC001), short TP010 (Pin 27 of IC001) to DGND ground (Pin 26 of IC001). Check TP005 and align RV001 to get 152 KHz 1 KHz. Apply a stereo 98.10 MHz signal, <32 dB, to the set. Ensure the Stereo indicator lights up. Remove the 10K resistor from TP005 installed in step
FIGURE 3
IN
OUT
Page 3-1
Page 3-2
Tune the set to 98.10Mhz. Apply a 38 dbf, 98.10 Mhz singnal from the signal generator to the antenna input through a matching balanced pad. Short TP10 (Pin 27 of IC001) to Vdd TP006 (Pin 23 of IC001) Check the voltage at TP005 for a low (<1.0 v at 98.10 Mhz. Veire the signal generator + 50 Mhz (98.15 Mhz) the voltage at TP005 should go hi, >4.0. Then verie the signal generator -50 Mhz (98.05 Mhz) and the voltage at TP005 should go high.
Connect an AM IF signal to AM OSC, pin 6 of IC001. Detect the output signal at Pin 10 (IC001) as shown below in figure 5. Adjust TF005 & TF008 until maximum amplitude is reached Send an un-modulated RF signal at 1000 KHz with RF level of 100mV. Tune the receiver to search up/down (remove the VT probe during search). It will stop after acquiring this signal. Connect a frequency counter to Pin 36 of IC001 thru a capacitor 1uF Check Pin 36 of IC001 and align TF007 to get 450 KHz 1 KHz.
Apply a modulated (400 Hz) MW RF signal at 630 KHz with low RF level of 300 uV. Detect the signal from TP 007/008 and adjust TF001 for the maximum amplitude.
AZIMUTH ALIGNMENT
1. 2. 3. 4. In tape transport 1, playback a test tape (TCC-153) freq. 10 KHz. Connect the speaker outputs to a dual trace oscilloscope. Adjust the azimuth screw at the tape head to obtain the maximum amplitude on both channels. (Both channels must be in phase). Repeat the above procedure with tape transport 2.
T U N E RS E C T IO N F M S i g n a lG e n e r a t o r 9 8 . 1 0 M H z T P -0 0 5 P -0 1 0 G T P -0 0 1 T T P -0 0 1 G T P -0 1 0 T P -0 0 3 T P -0 0 6T P -0 0 4 G D CV o ltm e t e r 4 . 0 0 V T F -0 0 6 S i gG e nF r e q T P 0 0 5 V oltage 9 8 . 0 5M H z H igh >4 .0V 9 8 . 1 0M H z L o w <1 .0V 9 8 . 1 5M H z H igh >4 .0V
TUNER
1 0 . 7 0M H Z
F r e q u e n c yC o u n t e r
1. 2. 3. 4.
IN FIGURE 5 OUT
F I G U R E 4
4.7uF
5.
AM OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT
Test Points: Input: AM Antenna Loop Output: TP007/TP008 Tuning(VT):TP002 1. 2 3. TP001G (RFGND) TP001G (AGND) TP001G (AGND)
445
Rewind the test tape (MTT-111 DN 3khz) until both the spools on the left and right hubs are equal. Connect the output to the WOW -FLUTTER METER. Adjust the trimmer in the motor to obtain a playback freq. of 3KHz 60 Hz. Stop transport 1 and playback the same test tape on transport 2. Check the output and ensure the output is the same as transport 1, if not, repeat the item 3
455
Set frequency to 530 KHz . Adjust MW Osc coil (TF003) to obtain 1.4 0.05V at TP 002. Set frequency to 1710 KHz . Ensure the MW-VT at TP002 is 8.0 1 V
450
Page 3-3
Page 3-4
27
58
26
36 17 18
IC300
N3
MP3
N1
1 A
10
11
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in F 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
R003 2R2
J200
SVCC
VCTL
3
VIN1
GND
VO1
FAN8082
IC01
PVCC
VIN2
VO2
SLIDER1
3 4
COL
PI01 RPI-574
KAT ANO
EMIT
2 1
5 6 7
PI02 RPI-574
KAT ANO
R005 100
3 4
EMIT
2 1 R002 100
R004 2R2
SVCC
PVCC
VIN2
VO2
VCTL
1 5 4 3 2
5 6 7 8 9
M74HCT32
GND SD MDATA
IC04
5 4 3 2 1
GND +12V L001 39uH D005 1N4002 C005 1000uF 16V GND 2 1 3 OUT D006 IN 1N4002
GND +V1CC
NBC02
2 1
5V
Q001 KTA1270Y
D003 1N4002
D004 1N4002
Q003 KTA1270Y
IC03 KIA7805A
R009 330
TO TCM150
TO DSP BOARD
M74HCT32
P003
TO DSP BOARD
ANO
EMIT
PI06 3 RPI-5744
KAT
COL
DRAWER BD
2 1
3 2 1
VIN1
GND
VO1
FAN8082 3
IC02
M74HCT32 GND 7
IC04
14 VCC
IC04
4 5
M74HCT32
1 ANO 2 KAT
PI05 RPI-574
EMIT 4 COL 3
DRWMTR2 DRWMTR1
P024
1 2
DRAWER MOTOR M
(CIRCLE)
IC04 13
M74HCT32
12
1 2 3 4
SDATA8
IC04 10
CLK
P004
RS2605 3
Top Cover Removal Side Panel Removal Back Panel Removal CD Mechanism Removal
2-1
INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
Top Cover Removal Note: Perform all disassembly procedures in the order presented. When reassembling, use the reverse procedure. Make sure that all leads/wiring are routed correctly when reassembling. 1. Remove five (5) screws located on back side of the unit as shown in figure 1. Also, remove two (2) screws on top of the unit (not shown).
2-2
INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
Top Cover Removal (Cont'd) 2. Remove top panel by lifting upward from rear and separating tabs from backside of front plate as shown in figure 2.
Top Cover
Side Panel
Back Panel
2-3
INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
Side Panel Removal 1. Remove top cover. 2. Remove three (3) screws from either side of unit as shown in figure 3.
Remove (12) screws in all, located on back and sides of Side Panels.
2-4
INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
Back Panel Removal 1. Remove Top Cover. 2. Remove Side Panels. 3. Remove thirteen (13) screws from back of unit as shown in figure 4. 4. Lift CD tray to release tabs on back panel as shown in figure 5.
2-5
INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
CD Mechanism Removal 1. Plug unit in and extend the CD Tray, while extended,, unplug the unit. 2. Remove Top Cover. 3. Remove Side Panels. 4. Remove Back Panel 5. Remove one (1) screw from CD Arm Stop as shown in figure 6.
CD Tray
Rear of unit
Fig. 6 CD Mechanism Removal
2-6
INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY
CD Mechanism Removal (Cont'd) 6. Remove four (4) screws from CD Mechanism Assembly as shown in figure 7. 7. Release one (1) wire from catch on bottom of CD Tray. 8. Release CD Mechanism Assembly from mount by pulling towards the rear and lifting gently. 9. Remove one (1) wire from CD Mechanism Assembly.
CD Arm
2-7
IC FUNCTION
RS2605
AUDIO SYSTEM: CASSETTE DRAWER: IC01 FAN8082 IC02 FAN8082 IC03 KIA7805A IC04 M74HCT32 MAIN BOARD: IC001 TEA5757H IC300 AN7348K IC302 BA7755A IC401 TDA7440D IC601 BH3544F POWER SUPPLY: IC501 LM4766
FUCTION: Motor Drive Motor Drive Voltage Regulator Quad Nan Gate AM/FM IC Cassette Driver Switch Tone Control and Audio Processor Headphone Amp
DATA SHEET Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y
Power Amplifier
FRONT PANEL and KEYBOARD: IC701 IC703 IC704 MP3: IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 TMS320vc5416 WM8725ED M29W800AT90N1 BA4558F TPS76316DBVR TPS76333DBVR MP3 and DTS Processor D to A Converter Flash Memory Switch Voltage regulator Voltage regulator Y N N Y N N uPD780208GF M24C64-WMN6 BU4094BCF Micro controller EEPROM Shift register Y Y Y
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 2
IMPORTADOR Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5 0151
EXPORTER Thomson multimedia Inc. P.O. Box 1976 Indianapolis, IN 46206-1976 2002 Thomson multimedia Inc. Trademark(s) Registered Marca(s) Registrada(s) Marque(s) Depose(s) 55330040 (EN/F/E) www.rca.com www.rca.com/LatinAmerica Printed In China / Impreso en China
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 3
u s e r m a n
OPEN/CLOSE
DIMMER / DEMO
CLOCK
PROG/SET
VOLUME
W DO
TUNE/PRESET BOOKMARK
UP
BASS BOOST
TH
UMB
UP
SOURCE
DISC SKIP
PLAYLIST
RS2605
It is important to read this instruction book prior to using your new product for the first time. Es importante leer este manual antes de usar por vez primera su euipo.
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 4
FCC Information
FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture.
Have a Blast- Just Not in Your Eardrums Make sure you turn down the volume on the unit before you put on headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level only after headphones are in place.
Technical specification
Product: 5CD MP3 Audio System Brand: RCA Model: RS2605
Electrical Consumption:
Power Supply: 120V 60 Hz Power consumption: 230 Watts IMPORTER Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
CAUTION
THE LIGHTNING FLASH AND ARROWHEAD WITHIN THE TRIANGLE IS A WA R N I N G S I G N ALERTING YOU OF "DANGEROUS VOLTAGE" INSIDE THE PRODUCT.
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 5
Safety Information
For Your Records
In the event that service should be required, you may need both the model number and the serial number. In the space below, record the date and place of purchase, and the serial number: Model No. Remote Control No. Date of Purchase Place of Purchase Serial No.
Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide.
EN
Table of Contents
FCC Information Safety Information Getting Started . . . . . . .3
Unpacking the system . . . . . . . .3 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Searching Through a CD . . .8 Shuffling the Play Order . . .8 Sampling Tracks . . . . . . . . . . .8 Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 CD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . .9
The MusicMatch Jukebox . . . . .9 File Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Playing a MP3 disc . . . . . . . . . . .9 File Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Adding Songs to a Playlist . . .10 Playing a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . .10 Deleting Files in a Playlist . . . .10 Thumb Up Playlist . . . . . . . . . .10 Thumb Down Playlist . . . . . . .10
General Controls . . . . . .4
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Important Information 15
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . .15 Important Battery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Headset Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Dont Infringe . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Technical Specification . . . . . .15
Display Settings
Showing the Demonstration . .6 Setting Clock / Timer . . . . . . . . .6 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . .6 Setting the Timer . . . . . . . . .6 Activating the Timer . . . . . . .6 Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Selecting Tuner Band . . . . . . .11 Tuning to a Station . . . . . . . . .11 Using Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Auto Preset Programming . .11 Manually Setting Presets . . . .11 Suppressing Stereo Signal . . .11
Sound Features . . . . . . .7
Using Preset Equalizer Curves .7 Bass Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Muting Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 X-Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
CD Player
Notes on CD-R/RW Disc . . . . . . .7 Loading Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Play and Load Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . .8 Skipping a Disc . . . . . . . . . . .8
Tape Player
Playing a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 From Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 From CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Tape to Tape . . . . . . . . . . . .12 From an Auxiliary Input . . .12
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 6
Getting Started
EN Unpacking the system:
You should have the following: one main unit (with 2 main speakers); one remote control; one AM loop antenna; T-Type FM antenna wire; one users guide; one safety leaflet. Owner and registration Card MusicMatch CD Rom
Antenna and Speaker Wire Connection
NOTE: Make sure the insulation is completely removed from the ends of the Antenna and speaker wires at all connection points.
FM 75
4 inches
4 inches
STANDBY
AM LOOP
DIMMER / DEMO
CLOCK
PROG/SET
IN
VOLUME
CUSTOM/FLAT POP/JAZZ
OUT
3 4
AUX
W DO
TH
UP
BASS BOOST
UMB
UP
TUNE/PRESET
BOOKMARK
SOURCE
DISC SKIP
PLAYLIST
O.K.
L
SURROUND SPEAKERS 8
REPEAT
5
MAIN SPEAKERS 6
Front View 1. FM Antenna Jacks 2. AM Loop Antenna Connector 3. Auxiliary Connector 4. Surround Speaker Jacks 5. Main Speaker Jacks
4 inches
2 inches
Side View
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 7
General Controls
Main Unit
DISC SKIP Skips to the next CD in the tray. DISC 1 - DISC 5 Selects disc 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 and starts playback automatically. STOP / TUNE / PRESET Stops CD track, Sets tune or preset mode. PLAY/PAUSE Plays or pauses CD SKIP FORWARD Increments radio frequency, preset up, goes to the next CD track or setting option. SKIP BACKWARD Decrements radio frequency, preset down, goes to the previous CD track or setting option. REPEAT Selects among repeat modes. BAND/AUTO PROG. Changes between FM and AM tuner bands. Enters auto preset program in FM mode. ROCK/CLASSIC, CUSTOM/FLAT, POP/JAZZ selects among the different EQ modes. X-SURROUND Press once to activate XSurround. PLAYLIST - MP3 Playback - activates playlist operation. O.K. - MP3 Playback - confirms playlist selection and file search input. THUMB UP - MP3 Playback - selects previous MP3 song/folder. Store current song to Thumb up playlist. THUMB DOWN - MP3 Playback - selects next MP3 song/folder. Store current song to Thumb down playlist. LEFT - Goes up one folder from current folder. RIGHT - enters current folder and show the first song/folder from current folder. CD DISP / FM ST - MP3 Playback - Toggles ID3 TAG; Toggle track elapsed/track remain/Disc elapsed/Disc remain time for CDDA playback; In Tuner mode - Enable/disable FM TUNER STEREO RECEPTION. FILE SEARCH - MP3 Playback - activates file search input mode. BASS BOOST Turns BASS BOOST on or off VOLUME Increases/ decreases volume.
OPEN/CLOSE
EN
STANDBY
DIMMER / DEMO
CLOCK
PROG/SET
VOLUME
CUSTOM/FLAT POP/JAZZ
W DO
TH
UMB
UP
BASS BOOST
UP
TUNE/PRESET
BOOKMARK
SOURCE
DISC SKIP
PLAYLIST
Tip: In STANDBY mode (press POWER off), the system displays the time. Press POWER to turn the system on in the previously used mode. Press CD, TAPE, or TUNER (Remote Only) to select the corresponding mode. Look at the display icons to identify the current mode.
PHONES Jack for connecting headphones OPEN/CLOSE Opens or closes the disc tray. DIMMER/DEMO Adjusts display brightness; Turns the feature demonstration on or off. TIMER Enters timer setting mode and turns the timer on/off. CLOCK Shows clock time and enters clock setting mode. PROG./SET / BOOKMARK - Enters program mode for CD and Tuner; Applies new settings for Clock and Timer modes. Stores clock/timer settings, reset tape counter. MP3 Playback - Press to select thumb up playback or Thumb down skip playback in CD STOP mode. SOURCE Selects the CD player / tuner / tape player / external source.
Tape Player
RECORD PLAY REWIND FAST-FORWARD
STOP/EJECT PAUSE
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 8
General Controls
EN Remote Control
NUMBER/CHARACTER KEYS Accesses different tracks directly, input initial key characters in file search mode.
1/ 2/ABC 3/DEF 4/GHI 5/JKL
6/MNO
7/PQRS
8/TUV
9/WXYZ
TIMER CLOCK
EQ
MUTE
BAND
B . BOO ST
WE PO R
UR C E SO
PREV
NEXT
VOL
PR ES ET
ET ES PR
NE TU
TU NE
VOL
REW F FWD
PE
N /C L O S
ST OP
DIS
C S KI P
S LE E
P
DISC 5
DISC 4 PROG./SET
INTRO
REPEA T
SHUFFLE BOOKMARK
FILE SEARCH
PLAYLIST
HOME
CD DISPLA Y /FM ST
UP/ THUMB UP
OK
LEFT
RIGHT
CLOCK - Enters clock setting mode. TIMER - Enters timer setting mode; Activates and deactivates timer. MUTE - mutes sound. BAND - In Tuner mode - Selects radio band. X SURROUND - Activates X Surround. POWER - Turns power on or off from STANDBY mode. EQ - Selects among different equalizer preset (Flat, Rock, Pop, Jazz, Classic and Custom). B. BOOST - Turns on/off enhancement of the bass sound. SOURCE - Selects Tuner, Tape, CD or Aux. VOL+ or VOL- - Increases/ decreases volume. PLAY/PAUSE - Plays current CD; pauses CD playback. PRESET / PREV - In programming mode - Goes to the previous preset location; In CD mode - Goes to the previous CD track. PRESET / NEXT - In programming mode - Goes to the next preset location; In CD mode - Goes to the next CD track. TUNE / REW - In Tuner mode - Moves back in radio frequency. TUNE /F FWD - In Tuner mode - Moves forward in radio frequency. OPEN/CLOSE - In CD mode - Opens and closes disc tray. STOP - In CD mode - Stops CD playback. DISK SKIP - Skips to the next disc. SLEEP - selects the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off. DISC 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 - Directly selects and plays disc. INTRO - Turns INTRO mode on or off to play the first 10 seconds of each track. REPEAT - Repeats a track, CD, or all CDs. SHUFFLE - Turns on/off random playback. PROG./SET / BOOKMARK (MP3 only) - Enters program mode for CD and Tuner; Applies new settings for Clock and Timer modes. In MP3 mode - Goes to bookmark FILE SEARCH (MP3 only) - activates file search input mode. PLAYLIST (MP3 only) - activates playlist operation. HOME (MP3 only) - Back to the root directory of the current disc CD DISPLAY / FM ST - In MP3 mode - Toggles ID3 TAG In CD mode - Selects the choice of displaying Track elapsed time, track remaining time, CD elapse time or CD remaining time. In Tuner mode - Toggles between FM stereo and mono. UP / THUMB UP (MP3 only) - selects previous MP3 song/folder. Store current song to Thumb up playlist. DOWN / THUMB DOWN (MP3 only) - selects next Mp3 song/folder. Store current song to Thumb down playlist. OK (MP3 only) - confirms playlist selection and file search input. LEFT (MP3 only) Goes up one folder from current folder. RIGHT (MP3 only) - enters current folder and show the first song/folder from current folder. Note: Cassette functions can not be operated from the remote control.
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 9
Display Settings
EN
SURROUND PROG INTRO FM ST PLAYLIST FILE ARTIST FOLDER ALBUM BASS BOOST GENRE
MIX SHUFFLE
1
TAPE 2 SLEEP
DISC
9. Rotate the VOLUME knob on the main unit or press VOL + or VOL - on the remote control to set desired volume level. 10. Press PROG./SET to confirm and save settings. Press STOP to quit setting.
Sleep Mode
You can select the time interval in minutes before the unit turns off automatically. Press SLEEP on the remote to select among 120, 90, 60, 45, 30, 15, 5 minutes and OFF. (Remote Only)
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 10
Sound Features
EN Using Preset Equalizer Curves
Press ROCK/CLASSIC, CUSTOM/FLAT or POP/JAZZ on the main unit or EQ on the remote to toggle among FLAT, ROCK, JAZZ, POP, CLASSICAL & CUSTOM. The display briefly shows the selection.
Bass Boost
Press BASS BOOST on the main unit or B. BOOST on the remote control to turn on/off boosting the bass frequency.
Muting Audio
Press MUTE on the remote to cut the sound. (Remote Only)
X-Surround
Press X-SURROUND to enjoy enriched sound quality. This feature gives you: 1. Better width and depth for vocal and instrumental sound. 2. More powerful presence for studio recording. 3. Enhanced surround effects with greater flexibility in positioning speakers.
CD Player
Loading Discs
CD-R / RW
1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD mode. 2. Press OPEN/CLOSE on the main unit to open the drawer. 3. Insert up to five discs with label face up. (Press DISC SKIP to rotate the disc carrier.) 4. Press OPEN/CLOSE again to close the drawer. Loaded disc position icon lights.
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 11
CD Player
Playing Discs
Press PLAY/PAUSE to begin or pause play, and STOP to stop play. Select a specific disc by pressing DISC 1 - DISC 5. Press SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or PRESET / PREV or PRESET / NEXT on the remote control to select a specific track.
EN
Sampling Tracks
Press INTRO to play the first 10 seconds of each track on the current disc, all discs in the tray, or turn INTRO mode off. (Remote Only) Repeat Press REPEAT to repeat the current track, current disc, all discs, or turn REPEAT mode off. Note: You may also press REPEAT to select 1 disc or all discs before activating INTRO & SHUFFLE functions.
Skipping a Disc
Press DISC SKIP.
CD Display
Searching Through a CD
Press and hold SKIP BACKWARD / SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or TUNE / REW or TUNE / F FWD on the remote control to search through a CD while it is playing. Press CD DISP / FM ST to select among different CD display options: Track remaining time, Track elapsed time, disc remaining time or disc elapsed time.
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 12
MP3 Player
EN The MusicMatch Jukebox
This music management software, to be installed on your PC, allows you to compress music files recorded from your audio CDs into MP3 format and stores them on your PC. It makes the search and download of Internet music easier, It allows for the management of compressed music and the creation of your own playlist, The Jukebox is a true audio player installed on your PC, It gives access to thousands of net radios available on the web today. You can download music files encoded in MP3 from several Internet sites like www.mp3.com.
File Navigation
LEFT - Goes up one folder from current folder. RIGHT - Enters current folder and shows the first song/folder from current folder. UP/THUMB UP - Selects previous file/folder; press and hold the key to save current song to Thumb up playlist. DOWN/THUMB DOWN - Selects next file/folder; press and hold the key to save current song to Thumb down playlist. OK- confirms playlist operation and file search input. HOME (available by remote control only) - Back to the first folder( or root directory) of the current disc(MP3 disc stop only) FILE SEARCH - activates file search input mode. PLAYLIST - activates playlist operation. CD DISP/FMST - Toggles ID3 TAG when playing MP3 music. Press to view among the following: File Name, Album, Artist, Genre, Year and Bit Rate.
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 13
MP3 Player
File Search
It is difficult to find a song in a disc with hundreds of them. The unit provides a tool for the user to look for a desired song by specifying up to first three characters of the song name. 1. Press FILE SEARCH and use number/character keys (if using the front panel, press UP / DOWN / LEFT / RIGHT buttons instead) to select character. 2. Press RIGHT to specify the second character and then the third one. You may go back to the previous one whenever you want to make a change. 3. Press OK button to start searching. After searching, a list in alphanumeric order will be generated with the first one of those songs starting with the specified characters displayed. 4. Press UP /DOWN to check through the list. And press OK to start playing.
EN
Deleting a playlist
1. When showing a playlist, press and hold the STOP key, the DEL PYLST? will appear on the display. Press and hold STOP again and DEL ALL will appear on the display. Continue to press and hold the key to toggle among the two option. 2. Once the correct one is selected, press OK to confirm.
Thumb Up Playlist
This is a special Playlist, which you can easily store songs into. 1. Press and hold the THUMB UP key to store the song into it, no matter if it is being played or not. 2. To activate, press BOOKMARK, press THUMB UP to select THUMB UP playlist and press OK to begin playback. The unit will play the tracks in the order that they were entered into the THUMB UP playlist.
Playlist
Adding songs to a playlist
1. Press PLAYLIST to enter the Playlist menu. 2. Select "ADD SONG?" using the DOWN button, press the OK button to confirm. 3. Select the Playlist you want(a total of 20 playlists available), press the OK button to confirm. 4. Select your desired song by using file navigation procedure, press OK button to confirm selection. 5. Press STOP key to exit the Playlist menu.
Playing a playlist
1. Press the PLAYLIST key again and select the "SEL PLYLST?" item. Press the OK button to confirm. 2. Select any Playlist you want to play, all the songs in the Playlist will be played if you press the PLAY/PAUSE button. 3. You can press the OK button to get into the Playlist, playlist will be played starting from the displayed song.
10
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 14
Radio
EN
STANDBY
DIMMER / DEMO
CLOCK
PROG/SET
VOLUME
CUSTOM/FLAT POP/JAZZ
W DO
TH
UMB
UP
BASS BOOST
UP
TUNE/PRESET
BOOKMARK
SOURCE
DISC SKIP
PLAYLIST
Tuning to a Station
Press SKIP BACKWARD / FORWARD on the main unit or TUNE REW /TUNE F FWD on the remote control to select frequencies.
87.50 MHz
PR:01
11
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 15
Tape player
EN
Playing a Tape
Tip: You can play a tape from either deck. 1. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TAPE. 2. Press STOP/EJECT to open cassette door. 3. Insert a tape into the door and push the door closed. 4. Press REW /F.FWD to position the tape to the desired starting position. (Deck 1 Only) 5. Press PLAY to start playback .
From CD
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select CD. 3. Insert the disc(s) to be recorded. 4. Select the track, CD, or program to be recorded. 5. Press RECORD to begin recording when CD begins to play. 6. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.
Tape to Tape
Continuous Play
1. Insert a tape into deck 2 and start playback. 2. Insert a tape into deck 1 and press PLAY and PAUSE together. 3. When the tape in deck 2 finishes playback, PAUSE at deck 1 will be released automatically and start playback.
1. Insert the destination tape in deck 1. 2. Insert the source tape into deck 2. 3. Press PAUSE and then RECORD on deck 1. 4. Press PLAY on deck 2. The playback and recording start simultaneously.
Recording
From Tuner
1. Insert a tape into deck 1. 2. Press SOURCE repeatedly to select TUNER and press BAND to access the desired radio band. 3. Tune to the station to be recorded. 4. Press RECORD to begin recording. 5. Press STOP/EJECT to end recording.
12
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 16
Troubleshooting Tips
EN
Problem Solution
System will Check power cord for a secure not turn on connection. Unplug the unit for a moment, and then plug into power source again. Check the outlet by plugging in another device. No sound Increase the volume setting. Check connection to speakers. Check that you have selected the appropriate function: CD, TAPE, Tuner. Make sure mute is off. Check antenna connection. Move antenna. Turn off nearby electrical appliances, such as hair dryer, vacuum cleaner, microwave, fluorescent lights. Check that CD is in the tray. Check that CD label is facing up. Check that PAUSE mode is not on. Check that CD function is selected. Use CD lens cleaner. Clean the disc. Clean the disc. Check disc for warping, scratches, or other damage. Check if something is causing the system to vibrate. If so, move the system. Make sure the speakers are at least 3 feet away or on a different surface from the main unit.
Problem Solution
CD button Switch to another function (TAPE, will not Tuner) and then back to CD. respond, or does not change discs when you press DISC SKIP MP3 disc does not play Only finalized MP3 CDR/CDRW disc is accepted. MP3 format burnt by some software (such as DIRECT CD) may not run properly.
Distorted or Inspect the tape heads, clean it if noisy tape necessary. recordings Remote control does not work Check that the batteries are properly installed. Replace weak batteries. Check that the system is plugged into power source. Point the remote directly at the systems front panel. Move closer to the system. Remove any obstacles between the remote and the system.
CD sound skips
13
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 17
Maintenance
Disconnect the audio system from the power source before performing any maintenance.
Handling CDs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold CDs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. CDs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) CDs
EN
Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.
CD Player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician.
Cleaning CDs
Dirty CDs can cause poor sound quality. Always keep CDs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. If a CD becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on CDs. Also, never clean CDs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface
Tape Player
To prevent deterioration of sound quality, periodically open the door of each deck and clean the magnetic heads, pinch roller, and capstan with a cotton bud dipped in alcohol. Also, demagnetize the head by playing a demagnetizing cassette (available through an audio equipment store).
Side A Protection Side B Protection
B A
To protect recordings one or both sides of a tape, remove the corresponding tab. If you later want to record on the tape, affix a piece of adhesive tape over the hole.
A
CD Lens Care
When your CD lens gets dirty it can also cause the system to output poor sound quality. To clean the lens you will need to purchase a CD lens cleaner which can maintain the output sound quality of your system. For instructions on cleaning the CD lens, refer to the ones accompanying the lens cleaner.
Quit Slacking - A little bit of slack in your tapes can cause scratches on the tape, or worse yet, the tape could break. If you notice some slack in the tape, use a pencil to tighten it up before you insert it.
14
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 18
Important Information
EN Safety Precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not use your System immediately after transporting it from a cold place to a warm place, as condensation may cause the system to malfunction. Keep your unit away from humid areas and abnormally hot places. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This compact disc player uses a laser to read the music on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. To keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens, do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping and splashing.
Dont Infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia.
Technical Specification
Power supply: 120V~60Hz Dimensions ( H x W x D inches): Unit size - 13 x 12 x 15.4 inches Speaker - 13 x 9.4 x 9.3 inches Tape deck: Response curve: 125Hz-8kHz (-5dB) CD player: Response curve (+/- 2dB): 60Hz to 20 kHz Rating Plate: Look for it at the back of the set.
Headset Safety
Do not play your headset at high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use with extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air designed to let you to hear outside sounds, do not turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.
15
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 19
EN
Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.
16
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 20
Service calls which do not involve defective materials or workmanship are not covered by this warranty. Costs of such service calls are the sole responsibility of the purchaser.
17
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 21
EN
Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.
18
RS2605 EN
6/13/02
9:30 AM
Page 22
19
10
11
12
P707 2 HNA-14LM01 55140480.S20 NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: to ground under no signal conditions 3. Replace transistors with type and volume control minimum specified from replacement parts list +FIL
FL701
10
11
12 13
14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
44 45
R705 10K
6 5 4 D 3 2 1
FIP0
FIP2
FIP3
FIP4
FIP5
FIP6
FIP7
FIP10
FIP11
P80/FIP13
P81/FIP14
DRAW-IN
FIP12
GND
FIP8
FIP9
FIP1
R757 47K
R756 47K
R755 47K
R754 47K
R753 47K
R752 47K
R751 47K
R750 47K
100
99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 61 62 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 T-CLK
D728 1N4148 R790 1K R795 22K R746 R786 R720 R791 1K 1K 1K R792 22K
TO POWER BOARD
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 9
VDD3 P37
VLOAD
R921
47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K
R922 R923 R924 R925 R926 R927 R928 R929 R930 R931 R932 R933 R934 R935 R936 R937 R939 R941 R938 R940
CAR-DIR-CW
P92/FIP23 P93/FIP24 P94/FIP25 P95/FIP26 P96/FIP27 P100/FIP29 P101/FIP30 P102/FIP31 IC701 uPD780208GF P97/FIP28
R875 22K
P706
9 E 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
COM
SDA
26 27 28 29 30
AVSS
P17/ANI7 P16/ANI6 P03/INTP3/CI0 P00/INTP0/TI0 P15/ANI5 P12/ANI2 P11/ANI1 P10/ANI0 AVDD P14/ANI4 P13/ANI3 P70 VDD1 P127/FIP52 P126/FIP51 P125/FIP50 P124/FIP49
T_PW
D716 1N4148
D712 1N4148
D715 1N4148
SCL
R721 R788 68K R878 R873 22K R874 22K 22K R877 22K R815 15K
1K
ST_MONO (NC) 3 P801 6 SOLB GND HOUT2 R814 470 4 P802 7 GND HOUT1 4 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 1 2
P02/INTP2
AVREF
P74
D718 1N4148
P73
R781 47K
P72
VSS
P71
D717 1N4148
P01/INTP1
TA-COU2
REC-SW
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
R811 150K
JP05 0
DRAWER-
DRAWER+
MP3-SD
TA-COU1
RDS-CLK
PWR-DET
STROBE
REMOTE
TA-DET2
TA-DET1
WR/EN
ST/MO
KEY3
KEY2
KEY0
KEY1
R870
R871 22K
GND
Q711 KTC3875GR
R812 100
R817 1K
PROTECTION
TA-DET2 TA-DET1
REC-SW
TA-COU2 C801 R801 10k AUDIO-MIX TA-COU1 R800 R798 22K 15K R858 22K R857 22K
TAPE-DETECT2
10nf 25V
RECORD-SW
H R764 22K R763 7K5 R762 4K7 R761 3K3 R760 2K2 R759 1K5 R758 1K2
SW738 POWER
SW737
SW736
SW735
SW734
SW733
SW732
SW731
DEMO
SOURCE
REPEAT
DISC1 3 NC901 2
BAND 2 1
DISC_SKIP
TIME
R716 10K
VDD ENABLE Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 QS QS
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
47K R860
R799 150K
R728 7K5
SW726
SW725 1 RIGHT
R727 4K7
SW724 1 DOWN
R726 3K3
SW723 1 LEFT
R725 2K2
SW728
R729 22K
SW727
SW722 1 PLAY_LIST
R724 1K5
SW721 ROCK 1
R723 1K2
GND
UP 3 2 PC901
CUSTOM
X'SURROUND
R713 10K
BU4094BCF
1 2
10uF
OK
DISC2
DISC3
DISC4
DISC5
REVERSE
FILE_LIST
CD_DISP
10K
Sub board
SW718
SW717
SW716
SW715
SW714
SW713
SW712
SW711
R714 10K
VOUT 1
VCC
GND
R736 22K
R735 7K5
R734 4K7
R733 3K3
R732 2K2
R731 1K5
R730 1K2
2 3 6 7
E0 E1
VCC
MODE
SW708 1 J OPEN/CLOSE
SW707 1 BBOOST
R743 22K
SW706 1 PROG
R742 7K5
SW705 1 PLAY
R741 4K7
SW704 1 FFWARD
R740 3K3
SW703 1 TUNE
R739 2K2
SW702 1 CLOCK
R738 1K5
SW701 POP 1
R737 1K2
10K
R715 10K
IR701 PIC-21045TE2
R793 1K
KTC3875GR
R805 22
1N4148
D719
47k
MP3-SD
24 25
P21/SO1 P20/SI1
P114/FIP41
P115/FIP42
CD-SYN
TAPE-MUTE
(VAUDIO-MIX)
AUDIO-MIX
1N4148
R806
MP3-CLK
MP3-MD
22 23
P23/STB
P22/SCK1
P112/FIP39 P113/FIP40
R719
1K
JP04 0
SCLK/CLK (NC)
C803
0.1uF 50V
D720
ENCODER-A RDS-DATA
20 21
P25/S10/SB0 P24/BUSY
P110/FIP37 P111/FIP38
R718
1K
JP03 0
SDATA/DATA_IN (SCLK/CLK)
R804 1k
ENCODER-B
SDATA
18 19
P27/SCK0
P26/SO0/SB1
P106/FIP35 P107/FIP36
R717
1K
50V
(SDATA/DATA IN)
DATA_OUT
100PF 50V
47K
SCLK
16 17
P04/XT1 VDD2
P104/FIP33 P105/FIP34
R712
1K
C736
100PF
50V
(DATA-OUT)
CE
R776
47K R775
13 RDS-QUAL 14 15
TUNER_POWER R711 1K
IC(VPP) XT2
P103/FIP32
C735
100PF
WR_EN (CE)
(NC)
10
11
Y701 4.194MHz
RESET
FOR RS2605
JP10 0
(HP-MUTE)
(TUNER-POWER)
HP_IN
12
13 1K
12 P702
DRW1
DRAW-OUT
R702 4K7
Q706 KTC3875GR
R744 10K
Q703 KTC3875GR
R707
1K
D727 1N4148
PROTECT
11
P705
TO CD MOUDLE
R767 1K
R700 4K7
Q705 KTC3875GR
R745 100
R789
1K
10
RESET
X'SURROUND
PWR-DET
R748 10K
L701 100uH
N/A
SYSTEM-POWER
CPU-VCC
R901 R902 R903 R904 R905 R906 R907 R908 R909 R910 R911 R912 R913 R914 R915 R916 R917 R918 R919 R920
47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K
CPU-VCC
+5V
Q701 KTC3203Y
+10V
D729 1N4002
P701
1 A
FM ANT NJ301
1
2
TP001
FM_IN
AM/FM DECODER
C004
4n7
C001
33pF
L001
XXX
C003
22p
FM-RF
RFGND TP001G 6 4 C099
4n7
TF005
AM ANT N002 6 5 4
AGND
1
TF001
AGND
3 2 1
TF008
4 6
2 3
TP003
1 2 3
AGND G
C007
AGND
10uf
IN
Y002
E
OUT
L007
47uH 0.1uF
C018
11p
IN AGND
Y001 OUT
E
TP004 1 2 3
AGND
C041
AM-MIXER
FM-MIXER
AM-IF2I/O
FM-IF1O
AM-IF1I
FM-IF2I
FM-IF1I
VSTABB
VSTABA
FM-RFI
RFGND
AGC
TP002
AGND
47pF
44 C008 RIPPLE
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34 33
AGND
3 2 1
TF007
4 6
C010 L003
XXX
18K 1/16W
R006
CV001
11p
100uf
AM-RFI
R035
18K 1/16W
D001
5p
C009 R005
FM-RFO SUBGND FM-OSC AM-OSC VCC1 TUNE VCO AFC-POS AFC-NEG FM-DEM AFO MUTE INDICATOR IC001
32 AFC-AM P1 31 30
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/10W B. All Capacitor values are in uF 2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performancesFM-ANT. and safety of this unit.
D003
33K 1/16W
CV002
R009 C020
470p 220K 1/16W
L004
XXX
R014
470nF
C019
220K 1/16W
R013
47K 1/16W
R008
18K 1/16W
11p
R007
100pF
C011
RFGND AGND
4 5 6 7 8 9
P0
10R 1/16W
C012
15pF
100nF
C013
R046
R045 R047
D002
VCC2 VDD
IFGND
PILFIL
MPXI LPF
6 4
TF003
4n7
C016
AF-RO
AF-LO
C
AGND
150K 1/16W
470pF
C047
AGND
470pF
C045
C046
470pF
AGND
68K 1/16W
R010
R011
3
68K 1/16W
R012
91K 1/16W
10 C098
4n7
MO-ST 24 22 23 R030
TP005
TP006
75.0KHZ
X001
C025
C026
2 3
AGND
AGND
R097
150 1/16W
2K2 1/16W
C024
1uF
22nF
1uF
22nF
C021
RV001 1 2
AGND
47K
220nF
C014
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
AGND
R015
2.2uf
C027
C029
18pF
18
19
20
21
33uF
C034
100nF
C035
22R 1/16W
R034
Q008 R056
6.8V
470nF
C030
100nF
C031
1K0 1/16W
R031 C033
1uf
AGND
470nF
C032
1uf
1K 1/16W
470 1/16W
Q009
22K 1/16W
R057
C022
470nF
C023
C028
150p
3 2 1
TF006
4 5
AGND
55103940.S20
TP007
AGND
N702
13 12 11 10 9
AUX-OUT_MUTE
H/P_MUTE H/P_IN TUNER_PWR WR_EN DATA_T CLOCK_T SDATA SCLK AUDIO_MIX ST_MONO TAPE_MUTE CD_SYNCHRO
AGND
8K2 1/16W
R017
TP008
TUNER_PWR
+10VA TUNER_R
AGND
R021
TUNER_L
8K2 1/16W
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NOTES:
1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF
2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list
4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
7
AUDIO_L SDATA AUDIO_R
6.8n 50V
C309L
R311L 18K
TAPE_L
RECORD L
R304L 47R C308L 100pF 50V R305L 1K2 C310L 1n2F 50V R306L 1K2 C312 22uF 50V R312 1M5 R420 100 C409R 2u2F 50V
SCLK
N304
1
3n3F C301L 50V 3n3F C301R 50V
L R
C304L 1uF 50V C304R 1uF 50V
R303L 680 C305L 100uF C306L 27nF 16V 50V C307L 1uF 50V
R311 56R R302L 120K C309 47nF 50V C311L 1uF 50V
C463 100uF
10V
DGND
DECK A
PLAYBACK
2 3
CRO/NOR
R_IN4 28
LOUT 27
ROUT 26
AGND 25
CREF 23
SDA 22
D-GND 20
PB/OUT
SCL 21
TREBLE(R) 19
TREBLE(L) 18
N.C. 17
N.C. 16
PB/EQL
ALC-L/CUT
PB/NFL
REC/INL
REC/PLAYBACK
A-I/PR
A-I/PL
N303
YELLOW
L302
470uH
ALC
HI/LO
A/Rec
RED
REC/OUTR
PB-OUTR
GND
8 MUXOUTL
AB/SW
B-I/PR
B-I/PL
12 BIN(R)
8
C311R 1uF 50V
10
R309 15K
11
12
R301L 15K
R302R 120K
9 IN(L)
R303R 680 R301R 15K R305R 1K2 C310R 1n2F 50V R306R 1K2 R307 33K
R304R 47R
14 BIN(L)
2 R_IN2
1 R_IN3
3 R_IN1
5 L_IN2
6 L_IN3
7 L_IN4
WHITE
13 BOUT(R)
4 L_IN1
11 IN(R)
L303 470uH
Logic Rec/PB
10 MUXOUTR
DECK B
RIPPLE/FIL
VS
BOUT(L) 15
REC/OL
BIAS OSC
VCC
ALC
24
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
R407 1K
R408 1K
24
IC401
TDA7440D
O/PGND
REC/PB
R410 5K6
FOR 2605
R308 27K
RECORD_L
AUX-OUT_R AUX-OUT_L
RECORD R
R341 56K Q305 R342 0R
R311R 18K
RECORD_R
AGND
IC302
CTRL1
R340 47K C348 33nF 50V C341 6n8F 50V C342 68nF 50V
KTC3198GR
TAPE_R
R404
10K
CTRL2 3 4
R403
10K
R402L 10K R402R 10K R401L 10K
VCC
GND
TUNER_R
CD_L
P401
1
SW
R325 100
L301 220uH
TP60G
TP60
AUDIO_MIX CD_SYNCHRO
KTC3107S
GND
2 3
CD_R
P401 TO P002
R401R 10K
RECORD
N301
KTC3203Y
R401 470R C410 10uF 25V
Q307
+10VA
TAPE_A
AGND
D402 7V5
R350 10K
MOTOR_VCC
Q306
TAPE MOTOR
TAPE_MUTE MGND
R352 1k5
KTC3875GR
1
Headphone BD
6
AUX_L AUX_R
R414L 20K 1/16W R414R 20K 1/16W R413L 39K 1/16W R413R 39K 1/16W
NJ504
1 9 8 7 3 2 4 5 6
P513
4
N513
4
C605L 470uF 10V Vcc 8
R611L 1K 1/16W
AUX IN AGND
NJ516
BH3544F
IC601
2 2
OUT1 1 MUTE 2 IN1 3 GND 4
NJ515
C605R 470uF 10V R601 R602 100K 1/16W
1
C611R 2u2F 50V R611R 1K 1/16W
FOR 2605
3 2 1 NJ518
C425R 100pF 50V
AUX_OR AUX_OL
C425L 100pF 50V C904 10uF 10V Q412R Q412L C604L 1UF 50V C604R 1uF 50V
10K 1/16W Q601 10K C601 1uF 10V 47K R421L 1K 1/16W R421R 1K 1/16W
SURROUND SPEAKER
AGND
P511
AUDIO_R
P511 TO N511
AGND
AUDIO_L
1
D601
P502
6
PGND
5
MN_SPK_R MN_SPK_L
AGND C603
25V 470uF
+10V
1
AGND
FROM N502
P502
A{0-18}
A{0-18}
A{0-18}
A{0-18}
A{0-18}
VDD3D
A9 A1 A8 A7 A6 A5 A3 A2 A0 A11 A10 A12 A13 A15 A17 A18 A16 A14
CVCC
D15 D14
D{0-15}
D{0-15}
D11
D13
D12
D10
D9
R/W
CVCC
A1
A9
A0
A2
A3
A5
A6
A7
A8
A4
A4
D7
D8
D6
VDD3D 21 23 22 20 24 11 19 18 17 16 15 13 12 10 14 NC3 NC2 NC1 A1 WE NC0 BY/ RY A2 A3 A6 A5 A7 A4 RESET A9 A8 A11 A10 A12 A13 A17 A18 A15 A14 1 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 4
131
121
139
129
109
143
138
137
136
135
133
132
130
128
127
126
125
123
122
120
144
134
124
111
119
118
117
116
115
113
112
110
114
CVDD4
CVSS8
HDS1
DVDD5
DVSS7
DVSS6
CVSS7 A20
A1
DVDD3
HD6
HDS2
HD5
HD4
A7
A6
A5
A3
D9
A2
A0
D8
A4
D11
D7
D6
A19
A8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 13 14 CVCC 15 16 17 18 19 R1
100pF 50V 33R
A22
CVSS
BYTE
DVSS5 A16 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
A18 A17
108 107 106 105 104 103 102 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 90 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 80 78 77 76 81 79 R40 R41
100K 100K 100K 1K D5 D4 D3 D2 D0 D1
D15
D13
D12
D10
D14
A18
A17
A16
VDD3D
DQ11
DQ10
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
VSS1
VDD
DQ1
DQ9
DQ0
DQ8
DQ2
DQ3
DQ5
DQ6
VSS
DQ7
DQ4
CS
A0
OE
A16
16.9344
Y1
TP10
A{0-18}
GND1
D11
D10
D12
D13
D15
D1
D6
D0
D2
D3
D5
D4
D7
D14
D9
D8
GND1
VDD3D C1
101
R60
33pF 50V
33pF 50V
D{0-15}
D{0-15}
GND1
10nF 50V
CVCC
11
C19
X2\CLKIN
RS X1
GND1 NRESET
CVSS1 HCS
NOE NPS
CVDD0 HR/W PS IS
IC1 TMS320VC5416
HD3
R50 CVCC
20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
READY DS R/W
91 89
GND1
R52
C8
21
R/W
R10
560 560 560
1 2 3 4 5
R12
DM NC2 NC1
12 11 10 9 8 R13
0
560
R7
DAC_DM
VDD3D
100K 33R
29 30 32 33 34 31
HOLDA IAQ HOLD BIO MP/MC DVDD0 BDR1 CVSS2 CVSS3 BCLKR1 BCLKR0 BLCKR2 BCLKX0 BCLKX2 HCNTL1 HCNTL0 CVDD1 CVDD2 BFSR0 BFSR2 DVDD1 CVSS5 CVSS4 BFSX0 BFSX2 DVSS1 DVSS0 BFSR1
HPI16
HD2
100K
R42
WM8725ED
R78
MUTE
100K VOUTL
R14
C2 10uF
16V
VDD3D R15
0
6 7
BCLKX1 DVSS2
VOUTR GND C3 C4
VOUTL VCC
100nF 10uF 16V
N1
LRCK
BDR0
BDR2
HRDY
1 2 3 4
R18 R19
560 560
BSP_DR1
BSP_FSR1 BSP_CLKR1
GND1
35 36
BDX0
BDX2
100K
9 11 13
9 11 13
10 12 14
10 12 14 GND1
IACK
HINT
GND1 R6
N1
to BC03GND1
DATA
BCK
BSP_CLKX1
INT1
HBIL
INT0
INT2
INT3
HD1
HD0
NMI
R36 SDA
330
N2 N2
1 2 3 4 5
VDD3D
GND1
16V
GND3
CLK_32F SDATA_OUT CLK_1F
VOUTR
R20
330
CVCC R25
0
R26
CVCC
100K
R75
0
GND1
VDD3D
100K
R28 R27
KTC3875GR
33R
330
R77
GND1
BSP_DX1
R34 SCL
GND1
GND1
Q1
N2 to
C5
41
51
61
70 71
39
49
59
69
37
38
40
42
43
45
46
47
48
50
52
53
55
56
57
58
60
62
63
65
66
67
68
72
44
54
64
BC01
100nF 16V
1K
TP5 R71
AUDIO_R
1
3 2 1
N4
NRESET
47k
VDD3D
100
25V 4700nF
25V 4700nF
VDD3D
1n5F 50V
47k
CR2
6 CR3 5
BA4558F 7 IC4
C23
7K5
RR3
10K
16V 10uF
CR5
50V 680pF
47k
CL5
CR4
RR5
GND3
GND3
AUDIO_L VDD5V
to
N3
P004
to
N4
MD
4
R79
R70
470
25V 100pF
C68
1K
NRESET
R11
LRCIN DIN
SCKI FORMAT
14 13
GND3
R8
560
CLK_384FS
NOE
R2 R3
TRST TDI
TCK
1 3 5 7
10uF 16V
DO
GND1
10K
A11
C6
100K
31
41
29
39
25
26
27
28
30
32
33
35
36
37
38
40
42
43
45
46
47
48
34
44
R53
C7
TP2
N6 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8
33R 33R
MSTRB MSC XF
100K
R9
100uH
L4
VDD5A
IOSTRB
-OFF/EMU1
TDO
EMU0 TOUT
N5
SD GND1
25V 1000PF
C35
R67
100uH
C12
470uF 6V3
CVCC
GND1
1000pF 50V
C69
CL1
50V 680pF
VDD5A
L3
100pF 50V
CL3
100uH
CVCC
EN GND IN
C70
470uF 6V3
R65 C22
100uF 16V
10uF 16V
GND1
100K
C21
100nF 16V
100nF 16V
NC/FB
C16
TPS76301DBVR
47uF 16V
C18
47uF 16V
100nF 16V
100nF 16V
100nF 16V
100nF 16V
100nF 16V
100nF 16V
100nF 16V
ADJ
C20
27K
R61
OUT
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C44
TP4
VOUT
GND2
GND3
5 4
IC5
C11
100nF 16V
GND1 TP3
10uH
L2
5 C15 4
1 2 3 GND2
100nF 16V
R62
GND1 GND2
TPS76333DBVR
C71
100nF 16V
GND2
1000PF
25V
GND3
RL1
RL2
RL3
IC4
100K
L1
100K
R66
100nF 16V
C34
100nF 16V
C33
100nF 16V
C32
100nF 16V
C31
100nF 16V
C30
100nF 16V
GND3
7K5 10K
10K
CL4
N3 N3
16V 10uF
CL2
RL5
VDD5V
P003
GND2
R74
0
BA4558F
PROJECT NOTES
1
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms B. All Capacitor values are in uF 4. * and
2
3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list components. Replace only with those indicates critical safety
2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum
R502L
-IN_B MUTE_A
MUTE_B
R504R
C502R
680PF 50V
B
R525
15k 1/16W
C519R R507L
R507R
100K 1/16W
25V
C507L
N511
C504R
100K 1/16W
1NF 50V
12
+IN_B LM4766
R502R
1uF 50V
C502L
1NF 50V
7 8
VCC_B
VCC_A
R504L
NC
NC
50V
C504L
C522L
9 14
2 15
47uF 50V
C516
100nF 50V
5pF 50V
C501L
R501L
10K 1/16W
C521L
100nF 16V
-IN_A
+IN_A
C522R
13
IC501
OUT_A 5 GND_A 10 1
50V 1NF
1NF 50V
C520L
GND2
R510L
5uH
NJ501
1 2 3 4
CY03
5uH
C520R
10
R510R
1/4W
LY04 C521R
5uH
6 11
Q503
KTA1504GR 1k
330 1/16W
R528
150 1/16W
R503
100nF 50V
C520
C519
47uF 50V
5pF 50V
C501R
R501R
10K 1/16W
L501R
470nF 16v
C505
0.5uH
R512R
4R7 1/4W
100nF 16V
OUTPUT
1000PF 16V
C518R
100nF 16V
R527
220nF 50V
C522
KTC3875GR
220nF 50V
R516L
Q516
10k 1/16W
R539
X-SURROUND CONTROL
10k 1/16W
R538
R540
22k 1/16W
R541
R502
1M 1/16W
2sk117y
R503L
12k 1/16W
3K3 1/16W
R517
100uF 25V
C510
R511
R503R
12k 1/16W
KTC3875GR KTC3875GR
Q504
Q517
Q501
10k 1/16W
R524
22K 1/16W
R526
1/16W
MN_SUPPLY
C523
15k 1/16W
C503R
47uF 50V
47uF 50V
C503L
FOR US VERSION
Q502
2.2k 1/16W
R537
KTC3875GR
Q519
56k 1/16W
N502
R542
N502 to P502
MN_SUPPLY
KTA1273Y
Q510
3 5
R535
10K 1/16W
C509
470uF 16V
R536
560 1/2W
KTC3875GR
Q511
10K 1/16W
R508
10R 1/16W
1K 1/16W
R509
Q505
KTC3875GR
C525
100nF 4700uF 50V
C526
100nF 50V
C512
N701
JP504
to bottom panel
1N5402
US: 5S4.0A125V
JP501
100nF 50V
C517
D505
50V
D506
100nF 50V
C527
1N5402
100nF 50V
C528
1N5402
C511
100nF 50V
US: 5S4.0A125V
D508
F504
JW03 N801
R518 R519
1 1
1/4W 1/4W
1000uF 16V
C508
100nF 50V
C530100nF 50V
1N4001 1N4001
TO FRONT BD
D513
7V5
R521 D514
30V 1/2W 1/4W 100
D515 C515
100uF 35V
1/2W
1N4001
IC_P01
C532
100nF 50V
C531
100nF 50V
US: 5S1.6AL/250V
3300uF 16V/25V
C514
1N4001
D510 D512
1N4001
D511
D509
To Power Transformer
N805
11
12
N803
To AC Input Board
10
RS2605
SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: Crosstalk: Maximum Input: Power Output: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: Frequency Response: Stereo Separation @ 1kHz: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: TAPE Frequency Response: S/N Ratio (Playback): Channel Separation @1 kHz: Wow & Flutter: CD Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
MP3 Decoder Bit Rate: CD/RW
120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 40-20,000 Hz 20-20,000 Hz +0/-3dB 1m Vrms @ 6 ohms 65 db 65 db 60 db 2 Vrms 40W @ 10% THD 5 mW 530-1710 600 uV/m 40 db 1000 mV/m 87.5 107.9Mhz 26 dbf 125 10 KHz +/- 5 db 34 db 50 dbf 35 dbf 125 8 kHz +/-5 db 42 db 34 db 0.2% 20 20,000 Hz +3/-3 db 75 db
320 Kbps
0,6 mm 0.6 mm
140 um 780 um
RS2620 NOTES
RS2622 NOTES
RTD130 NOTES
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:08 AM
Page 1
FCC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. In accordance with FCC requirements, changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson multimedia Inc. could void the users authority to operate this product. This device generates and uses radio frequency (RF) energy, and if not installed and used properly, this equipment may cause interference to radio and television reception. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception (which you can determine by unplugging the unit), try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Re-orient the receiving antenna (that is, the antenna for the radio or television that is "receiving" the interference). Move the unit away from the equipment that is receiving interference. Plug the unit into a different wall outlet so that the unit and the equipment receiving interference are on different branch circuits. If these measures do not eliminate the interference, please consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Also, the Federal Communications Commission has prepared a helpful booklet, "How To Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems." This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please specify stock number 004-000-00345-4 when ordering copies. This product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J. Applicable at the date of manufacture. one. Do not attempt to bypass this safety feature. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
Service Information
This product should be serviced only by those specially trained in appropriate servicing techniques. For instructions on how to obtain service, refer to the warranty included in this Guide.
Product
Dolby Digital DVD Audio video receiver Brand: RCA Model: RTD101
CAUTION
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:08 AM
Page 4
PLAYING MP3
Use .mp3 as the extension when converting audio files into MP3 for saving onto CD-R(W) or CD-ROM, e.g. Rocky08.mp3. Do not use any other extension e.g. .doc, .pdf. Do not use the .mp3 extension for other text or non-audio data files as this may result in serious malfunction and harmful noise interference.
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:08 AM
Page 5
Table of Content
FCC Information Thomson Multimedia Pack Getting Started
Unpacking the DVD Receiver . . . . . . . . .2 Unpacking the Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Inserting Batteries into Remote Control .3 Set Up and Maintenance of the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Protect your Components from Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Disc Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Connecting to Audio-Visual Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Digital Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Connecting Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Connecting the Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Connecting the Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . .6 Positioning your Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Front Speaker Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Preferred Surround Placement . . . . . . . .8 Advanced Surround Setting . . . . . . . . . .8 Test Tone / Channel Balance . . . . . . . . . .9 Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Factory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
CD/MP3 Player
MP3 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Playing an Audio CD . On-Screen Banner Display for CD Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Display for MP3 playback . . .30 . . .30 . . .32 . . .35
EN
Radio
Operating the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
DVD Player
Basic Playback Features . . . . . . . . . Quick Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freeze Frame and Frame Advance Slow Motion Playback (DVD only) . Progressive Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Banner Display . . . . . . . Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 6
Getting Started
Unpacking the DVD Receiver
You should receive the following items:
+
D I G I T A L BAND/APP SOURCE A / V R E C E I V E R VOLUME RANDOM SURROUND
VCR
ON OFF
TV
SATCABLE
mp3
PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PHONES
POWER P
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
VOL
VOL
CH
MENU
CLEAR
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
REVERSE PLAY
FORWARD
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
u n i v e r s a l
one instruction book; one safety leaflet; one Quick Connection Guide
SUBWOOFER
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 7
Getting Started
Inserting Batteries into Remote Control
Insert two AA(R6) batteries according to the + and - signs on the battery compartment. To use the remote control, point it directly at your receiver.
EN
About CDR, CDRW, Audio MP3, Compact Disk Audio (CDA), DVD Video, DVD Audio
This model is compatible to play CDR, CDRW, Audio MP3, Compact Disk Audio (CDA), Video Compact Disk (VCD) and DVD Audio.
RANDOM
SURROUND
mp3
PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PHONES
POWER P
10cm/4
10cm/4
10cm/4 Front
Rear 5cm/2
Do not connect to the AC power cords until all connections are completed. Do not use your set immediately after transferring it from a cold place to a warm place: there is risk of condensation. Do not expose your set to water and excessively high temperatures. After having disconnected your set, clean the case with a soft cloth, or with a slightly damp leather chamois. Never use strong solvents.
ATTENTION
This unit is incompatible with the following disc formats: DVD-ROM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD RAM, DVD-R, CDV, SACD, DVD Audio (High resolution tracks). JPEG pictures, Kodack disc, Divx video disc, photo CD, CD-G, S-VCD, Data part of CD Extra, disc with non standard shape (e.g. heart), disc with region code different from the one specified on the back of the unit.
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 8
Getting Started
Connecting to Audio-Visual Components
ANALOG INPUT
Alternatively, if you have no VCR or SAT, you can connect any other compatible components like TAPE player, TV to your DVD receiver via the VCR/SAT input. VCR audio/video out will have output signal in SAT, DVD/CD and TUNER modes. When VCR (source) is selected, there will be no audio/video signal from VCR audio/video out. VCR
TO VIDEO IN (VCR)
DIGITAL INPUT
Connect components capable of outputing Dolby Digital (e.g. SAT) or standard PCM (CD) format digital signals. Read section on "Input Signal Setting" under "Advanced Sound Control" carefully to adjust the matching input settings.
TO AUDIO IN (VCR)
DVD ONLY Pr
OUT
IN
IN
VIDEO
DIGITAL OUTPUT
Connect components capable of recording digital signals (e.g. MD, CD recorder player) equiped with a optical input.
OPTICAL IN OPTICAL OUT
Pb L
L
AUDIO Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (480P/480I)
COMPONENT IN (TV)
S-VIDEO IN (TV)
VIDEO IN (TV)
TV
SAT
S-VIDEO
S-video provides a better connection for the video portion of the signal than composite video (yellow color terminal). When connecting S-video cable, a Composite video cable (yellow RCA connector) must also be used. S-video will have video output for DVD playback only.
Progressive Scan
It is neccessary to use component video connection to enjoy progressive scan. Connect to a TV that has 480P input terminal or compatible with copy guard system, else the image will not be displayed properly. If progressive scan is ON, there will be no video signal output at composite video (VCR OUT), s-video and composite video monitor output.
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 9
Getting Started
Digital Connections
If you have a SAT receiver DVD player or CD player with a digital output, you can make use of an optical digital connecting cord (not supplied) to carry the audio portion of the signal and enjoy Dolby Digital or digital stereo sound quality. When optical cable is used, the analog audio cables are still needed if recording through a tape or VCR is desired. This receiver provides one optical input for the connection of your components. Please connect your components (e.g. DVD, SAT or CD) to the appropriate digital inputs and select the appropriate source (see below).
DVD ONLY Cr
OUT
IN
GND
The AM and FM antennas connect to the AM and FM terminals on the systems back panel. They must be hooked up in order to receive clear reception.
NOTE
Optical cables carry only the audio portion of the signal. A video connection must also be established by connecting a video cable to the (SAT) video input.
1. Uncoil the AM Antenna wire. 2. Press down on the Antenna tab to open the terminal Note: Make sure the white wire on the AM lop antenna is inserted into the left terminal.
Read instructions carefully when connecting components to the receiver. Digital In Jacks can accept DTS, Dolby Digital (AC-3), or PCM signals when compatible components are connected.
White GND
FM 75
AM LOOP
Ground White
OPTICAL DIGITAL IN (AUDIO) Optical Fiber Cable Connect to optical digital output of DVD, CD, SAT or other compatible devices. SAT / DVD / CD Player
SAT
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Connect to recording device like CD, CDRW player, DVD recorder, mini disc etc.
OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL OUT
OUT Cr
OUT
IN
AM LOOP
MON OUT
GND
VIDEO
FM Cb L AUDIO Y R OUT VCR IN IN SAT OPTICAL IN OPTICAL OUT REAR(8) SUB (4)
HINT
For FM reception, extend antenna to its full length and arrange the Antenna at different parts of the room until the reception is optimized. For AM reception, rotate the antenna horizontally to get better reception.
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 10
Getting Started
Connecting the Speakers
FRONT SPEAKERS
LEFT
RIGHT
CENTER SPEAKER
To ease speaker connections, the speaker cords and the terminals are color-coded. White/Black (Front Left Speaker), Red/Black (Front Right Speaker), Green/Black (Center Speaker) Blue/Black (Rear Left Speaker). Grey/Black (Rear Right Speaker). Purple/Black (Subwoofer) Connect the speaker wire to the back of L, R front speakers and to the corresponding color terminals on the rear of the receiver. Do the same for center speaker, rear speakers and the subwoofer.
CENTER
FRONT
REAR
REAR
SUB WOOFER
Speakers
There are 6 speakers equipped with the unit (2 front, 1 center, 2 rear, 1 subwoofer). In order to enjoy good surround effects all six speakers need to be connected to the receiver For better sound quality, center speaker, rear speakers and Subwoofer should also be connected. Adding center and rear speakers will enhance surround effects. Adding a Subwoofer will increase bass response. If you want to enjoy full range of sound effects, it is a must to use the subwoofer with the speakers to maintain adequate bass signal.
Speaker cords
1 for each speaker, is needed for connection. Twist the stripped ends of speaker cord about 2/3 inch (15 mm). Press down on the tab to open the terminal and insert the wire. Release tab to lock wire in the terminal.
Antenna and Speaker Wire Connection
+ -
+ -
+ -
Speaker Polarity
When connecting the speakers, make sure the polarities (+ speaker wire to + on the receiver) of speaker wires and terminals are matched. If the cords are reversed, the sound will be distorted and will lack bass (out of phase effect). Do not ground the output line, it will cause damage to the speaker.
Black
Purple
+ -
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 11
Getting Started
Positioning your speaker
1 Left, Right (Front Speakers)
They carry primarily music and sound effects
Alignment
Align the center speaker evenly with (A), or slightly behind (B), the left and right speakers, but not ahead of them.
EN
2 Center
In surround mode, the center speaker carries much of the dialogue as well as music and effects. It should be set between the left and right speakers.
Subwoofer
A subwoofer is designed to reproduce powerful low bass effects (explosions, the rumble of spaceships, etc.) which dramatically heightens involvement with the action on the screen. It is therefore recommended to connect subwoofers when small speakers are used.
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories
Advanced Setting
Angle
Placing the left and right speakers to form a 45-degree angle with your favorite viewing position will duplicate the soundtrack mixer's perspective.
Magnetic shielding
Speakers placed less than two feet from the TV set must be magnetically shielded in order to prevent picture distortion. Front and center speakers provided with RTD101 are magnetically shielded to protect your TV set. It is not recommended to place the rear speakers near the TV set.
3 1
1 3
Height
The mid- and high-frequency drivers of the three front speakers should be as close as possible to the same height. This often requires placing the center speaker directly atop (A) or beneath (B) the TV set.
A
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 12
Getting Started
Preferred surround placement
Location
If possible, place surround speakers to either side of the listening area, not behind it.
Height
If space permits, install surrounds 2-3 feet above viewers. This helps to minimize localization effects.
No adjacent walls
Surrounds can go on stands facing each other to approximate the preferred sidewall mounting (A), or to the sides or rear of the viewing area aimed upwards. In the latter case, they can go right on the floor, or preferably, a few feet off the floor such as on end tables (B).
Aiming
Aiming surrounds straight across the room, not down at viewers, helps create a more open, spacious surround sound field.
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 13
Getting Started
Test Tone / Channel balance
Channel balance
Your receiver is equipped with a test signal generator for balancing the channels. As the signal "travels" from channel to channel, adjust the level controls until each channel plays at the same loudness level.
Using Headphones
To listen privately through your audio system, use the PHONES jack on the receiver. However, make sure you turn down the volume before you put on the headphones. Increase the volume to the desired level after headphones are in place. Once headphones are connected, HEADPHONE DOWNMIX 2 CHANNEL will scroll on display. This feature automatically converts multi-channel outputs to 2 channel stereo for your listening pleasure.
EN
Factory Setting
Courtesy Dolby Laboratories
The unit is preset to the following setting when you first turn on the power Source = DVD/CD Volume setting = 25 dB Bass & Treble = 0 dB
NOTE
The system is equipped with Dolby Digital, and manufactured under License from Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under License from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world wide patents issued and pending. DTS Digital Surround, are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Dolby Digital Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Pro Logic II and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
NOTE
All preset radio stations and surround sound setting will be lost after factory setting is restored.
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 14
13
11
10
BAND/APP
SOURCE
BASS/TREBLE
RPT/PROG.
VOLUME
PHONES
15
9. EJECT Press to eject the disc.
14
12
Receiver Controls
1. POWER / STANDBY To turn the unit on/ off. When the system is turned on, the unit will go to Standby mode (red led will lit), then press the SOURCE button on the unit to power the unit up in the last mode used. When the unit is in standby mode, press the Source button to power on the unit. 2. Source Buttons To select input source. For example, DVD/CD, VCR, etc. 3. SURROUND Press repeatedly to select the surround sound setting or Digital Sound Processor (DSP) mode you want. Refer to Advanced Sound Control on page 16.) 4. PRESET - / SKIP REVERSE To move back to the beginning/previous preset memory location in tuner mode. To skip to the beginning/previous track in CD mode and the beginning/previous chapter in DVD mode (only while playing). 5. PRESET + / SKIP FORWARD To go to the next preset memory location in tuner mode. To skip to the next track in CD mode and the next chapter in DVD mode (only while playing). 6. BAND / APP / RANDOM In Tuner mode, press to select between radio BANDS or press and hold to enter AUTO PROGRAM mode. In DVD/CD mode, press to activate Random function. 7. BASS / TREBLE / PROGRESSIVE To adjust BASS / TREBLE, press this button once to choose either bass or treble, then press preset + and preset - to adjust level. (Bass/ treble adjustment is not allowed for DTS source) Press and hold for progressive scan ON/OFF in DVD mode. 8. OPEN / CLOSE Slightly touch to open / close the front panel.
10. VOLUME Turn the knob to adjust volume level. 11. PLAY/PAUSE To play and pause DVD/CD playback. 12. STOP To stop DVD/CD playback. 13. REPEAT (RPT) / PROGRAM (PROG) Press to choose different play mode in DVD/CD playback. In CD mode : refer to CD / MP3 player section. In DVD mode: refer to DVD player section. 14. PHONES Plug your headphones (not supplied) into it for your private enjoyment. Speakers will be off when phones are inserted. 15. BLUE LED When progressive scan is turned on, the blue led will lit. When in protection mode, the blue led will blink continuously, During panel up/down and power up, the led will blink for a few seconds.
10
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 15
EN
1
VCR ON OFF TV
2
DVDCD TAPE AMFM SATCABLE
MUTE
SURROUND
CH +
5
VOL
17
VOL
7. Adjustment Buttons In all mode except DVD, press OK key will enter into function setting mode, for DVD mode, press and hold the OK key is needed. When the display shows the setup you want to change (preset EQ / ,Sleep mode / DIM mode / night mode), press the left and right arrow buttons to choose, and press up and down buttons to make changes, then press OK to finalize your choice. 8. Number Buttons In Tuner mode, to select a preset station. In DVD/CD mode, to select a track to be played (Audio CD only). 9. MENU In Tuner mode: - Press AM/FM - Press to store desired frequency in memory. The flashing word PROG in red will appear in display. Input your desired channel number while the word is still flashing and the frequency will be stored. (For details, refer to "Storing Radio Stations under Manual Preset on page 38) In DVD mode, press for menu setup for DVD title. 10. Operation Buttons TUNER, press AM/FM on the remote to enter tuner mode. Press REVERSE and FORWARD keys to tune down or up the radio frequency. DVD/CD, press DVD to enable PLAY,, STOP and PAUSE keys. The remote control currently operates most Thomson, RCA and GE products, but it can be programmed to operate devices from other manufacturers (For details, refer to Using the Remote to Control Additional Components. 11. SUBTITLE (DVD only) Press SUBTITLE to adjust the subtitle function. 12. AUDIO Press to select the audio channel you like.
4 19 16
OK
CH
3 20 6 15 7
9
MENU CLEAR
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
18
FORWARD
REVERSE PLAY
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
10
14 13
u n i v e r s a l
13. ANGLE (DVD only) Press to select different screen display angles. 14. ZOOM (DVD only) Press to select the zoom ratio. 15. INFO Press to display playback information. 16.GUIDE Press to go to the title menu at DVD mode. 17. SURROUND Press to change the surround sound settings. The display will toggle among any stereo modes (for DTS (DTS stereo), for DOLBY DIGITAL signal (Dolby Digital, 3 Stereo, Stereo), DOLBY PL II MOVIE, DOLBY PL II MUSIC, DOLBY PRO LOGIC EMULATION, DOLBY 3 STEREO, ARENA, JAZZ, CLUB, THEATER, STADIUM, DISCO, STEREO) 18. ANT-FMS (FM only) In Tuner mode, press this button to switch from ST to MONO mode and vice-versa. 19. LEVEL Press to adjust level of individual speaker, press repeatedly and the display will toggle among different channels, press the left and right arrow button for adjustment. 20. GO BACK Press to go back to previous menu or exit setup menu completely.
12 11
NOTE
The remote button INPUTSEEK does not work.
1. ON/OFF To turn on or off the receiver and other auxiliary components (see page 14 Using the Remote to Control Additional Components). 2. Source Buttons To turn on and select various audio/ video sources. 3. CH+, CH- (Channel Buttons) To select programmed stations in TUNER mode. To skip to the next or previous chapter or track in DVD, CD & MP3 mode.
11
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 16
SLEEP
ST
RDS
L
FOLDER
C R
LS LFE RS
CHAP
Chapter location at which DVD is currently at.
PROG. D I G I TA L
Program mode is activated. Audio output is in Dolby Digital mode. (For DVD and SAT optical inputs only) TUNED
PRO.LOGIC II
Audio output is in Dolby PL II Movie, Dolby PL II Music or Dolby Prologic Emulation mode.
ST
Tuner stereo signal detected.
DTS
Audio output is in DTS mode. (For DVD and SAT optical input only)
REPEAT / REPEAT TRACK / REPEAT CHAP / REPEAT A.B. / REPEAT FOLDER (MP3 only)
CD, MP3 and DVD in repeat mode.
RANDOM
Random playback mode activated.
KHz / MHz
Tuner frequency unit. Currently in playback mode.
PARENTAL LOCK
Parental lock is on and a password is required to view DVDs above a specific rating level.
SLEEP
Sleep mode is activated.
TITLE
Title number for DVD playback.
TRACK
Track number being played.
12
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 17
EN
BAND/APP
BAND/APP
SOURCE
BASS/TREBLE
VCR
RANDOM
ON OFF
TV
RANDOM SURROUND
VCR
ON OFF
TV
SATCABLE
SATCABLE
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
BAND/APP
SOURCE
BASS/TREBLE
VCR
RANDOM SURROUND
ON OFF
TV
SATCABLE
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
Example 1: If you connect a VCR player to the VCR input (audio + video) on the receiver and press the SOURCE button until VCR shows on the display. You will be able to have the sound and image transmitted by the VCR.
Standby: when the receiver is on, press the ON/OFF on the remote to return to standby mode. To switch off the unit completely, press the POWER button on the receiver.
BAND/APP
SOURCE
BASS/TREBLE
VCR
RANDOM SURROUND
ON OFF
TV
SATCABLE
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
NOTE
Your receiver has a back up memory to keep your settings like preset radio station for about 2 weeks in case electricity cut occurs. If the receiver is unplugged for more than 2 weeks, all the settings will be lost and re-setting will be necessary.
13
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 18
3. Press and hold the corresponding Source Button (like VCR, SAT/CABLE, TV) on the remote while entering the code from the code list using the Number Buttons.
MENU CLEAR
1 4
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
ANTFMS
SATCABLE
7
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
WHOINPUT
REVERSE PLAY
FORWARD
When a source is selected, the source name will be shown on the display. Example: Press VCR to select VCR as the source to the amplifier. 4. Release the component button, then press ONOFF to see if the component will turn off.
VCR ON OFF TV
SATCABLE
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
LS LFE RS
5. If this does not work, repeat steps 3 and 4 by trying to use the next code (if available) listed for the brand of your component until the component responds to the remote command.
NOTE
1. Your receiver has a built in tuner. Just connect the appropriate antenna on the back of the receiver and you will be able to listen to radio stations. (See details in Tuner section) 2. The receiver is also equipped with DVD/CD player. Press the SOURCE button on the main unit or DVD button on the remote to activate the feature. 3. Other sources (TV,tapes,etc) can be connected to this unit provided that the connections are compatable. 4. Refer to the "Connecting To Audio-Visual Components" section for details on connection.
NOTE
Once your remote is encoded, you can press ON/OFF on the remote once to turn off the component and then followed by the second time quickly to turn off the receiver (i.e. this unit). If you only want the receiver to be turned off, select FM/ AM or DVD/CD while the unit is ON before pressing ON/OFF.
HINT
This remote may not operate all models of the brands shown. If batteries are removed from the battery compartment of the remote control, all memory will be lost. You need to re-enter all previously programmed codes again. The buttons on the remote may not work correspondingly with those on other brand components. Experiment with the remote and your components to see which buttons work. If only a few functions operate, check to see if another code set will work with more buttons.
14
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 19
Dolby Digital
The Dolby Digital mode lets you enjoy full digital surround from software processed in the Dolby Digital format. Dolby Digital provides better sound quality and more powerful presence than conventional Dolby Surround. This unit is equipped with Dolby Digital 5.1-channel so that you can enjoy enhanced full digital surround sound. Being different from Dolby Pro Logic in which only four channels ( Front Left, Front Right, Centre and Rear ) are used, the new system provides stereo separation of the rear speakers (Rear-Right, Rear-Left ). These 5 channels, together with the subwoofer channel for bass sounds ( counted as 0.1 channel ), constitute as 5.1-Channel ( or 6 Channels ) Input for Dolby Digital that brings you the most sophisticated sound enjoyment.
EN
Subwoofer
Listening Zone
Center Speaker
Dolby 3 Stereo
The 3 Stereo mode will redirect the Surround signals to the front left and right speakers when only the front and center speakers are used. Listening Zone
Subwoofer
Center Speaker
Listening Zone
15
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 20
Analog Input
Select this setting to play analog signals from a cassette deck, VCR or SAT.
Night Mode
By using Dynamic Range Compression technology, you can enjoy enhanced Dolby Digital sound quality at night without interrupting your roommates or neighbors. Night Mode will compress the difference in volume between normal voices and sound like explosions, while still enjoying a Dolby Digital enable component (DVD, SAT). Night Mode can be activated by press and hold the OK button, DRC SOFT (Default) will appear on the display. While DRC SOFT (Default) is still on the display, press the LEFT or RIGHT Adjustment buttons l,around the OK button, until you select the desired mode. There are three modes (OFF, SOFT, SOFTER) for you to choose the extents of compression.
Default Settings
The receiver will keep the last selection in memory as long as it doesnt enter standby mode.
If Analog Input selected N/A PRO-LOGIC II MOVIE PRO-LOGIC II MOVIE PRO-LOGIC II MUSIC
By default, SAT (satellite) is set to analog input. If you wish to change the input formats, follow the steps below: 1. Press SOURCE on the main unit until SAT appears on the display or press the SAT/CAB source buttons on the remote control. 2. Press AUDIO on the remote control to toggle among optical analog to match your connection. Your selection will be stored automatically. Every time you press the source button, the input setting SOURCE DEFAULT INPUT (as seen on display) SAT Analog (SAT/ ANL) VCR Analog (VCR) FM/AM Built-in Tuner DVD/CD Built-in (e.g. SAT/ ANL) will be shown on display for a few seconds. Note: Only SAT input can be changed to optical input.
NOTE
SAT and VCR are just generic names. You can connect other compatible audio/video components to these inputs like TV, TAPE, MINI DISC, CD-RW player, etc.
16
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 21
NOTE
Always use the subwoofer for optimum sound quality.
EN
Advanced Setting
Factory Default Setting
The receiver speaker distance default settings are the following:
Front Left Front Right
Center
SPEAKER SETUP
L/S
EXIT
R/S
Rear Left
Rear Right
To change the speaker size In speaker setup menu, press left/right buttons to select speaker, when the speaker picture is selected, you can press up/down buttons to adjust speaker size. To change the speaker distance In speaker setup menu, press left/right buttons to select speaker, when the speaker distance column is selected, you can press up/down buttons to adjust the distance of front, rear and center speaker individually. To change the speaker level In speaker setup menu, press left/right buttons to select speaker, when the speaker volumn column is selected, you can press up/down buttons to adjust the level of front, rear, center speaker and subwoofer individually. To test the speaker setting In speaker setup menu, press left/right buttons to select the test column, then press OK the activate. A short noise will then be heard in the speakers one by one.
15 ft 15 ft 10 ft
17
RTD101-EN
receiver
11/25/02
10:09 AM
Page 22
Front Speakers
C
LFE
Subwoofer Present
It is important to note, however, that not all Dolby Digital sources are encoded with the full complement of five channels plus LFE*. Speaker icons show how many and which speaker you have enabled (See Fine Setting of the Speakers) and the letters inside the speaker icons show which channel is present in the source information. For example, the diagram shown means you have all the five speakers and subwoofer enabled and the digital sources you played have five channels plus LFE complemented. (Dolby Digital 5.1 Channels) * LFE stands for Low Frequency Effect. The indication LFE appears if the digital source contains LFE information. In this case, the bass signal will be delivered to the subwoofer, offering more dynamic deep bass sound effects. If the letter is flashing, the signal is either too weak or just gone.
18
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 1
DVD Player
Basic Playback Features
1. Press SOURCE on the main unit until DVD/CD appears on the display or DVD source key on the remote to select DVD/CD input source.
ESET + BAND/APP SOURCE BASS/TREBLE RP VCR 1 RANDOM SURROUND DVD VCR 2 AMFM SATCABLE ON OFF TV PHONES
EN
0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
CD
/C H+
TAPE
NOTE
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3 L C R LS LFE RS
RESUME MODE: The next time PLAY is pressed, the unit will begin playback at the location where it was last stopped. Press STOP key again to cancel the resume mode.
2. Open disc tray for loading discs with label side facing up. Press again to close it.
PHONES
VOLUM
Quick search
1. While playing a disc, press REVERSE on the remote control to scan backwards through the disc. Press FORWARD on the remote for scanning forward. Press repeatedly to change searching speed to 1,2 or 3 times for VCD and 1,2,3 or 4 for DVD. 2. Press PLAY at any time to resume normal playback.
7 8 0
REPEAT
RANDOM
3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the unit or PLAY on the remote control to start playback Press PLAY/PAUSE on the unit or PAUSE to pause playing during playback. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PLAY on the remote to resume normal playback.
PROGRAM
9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
REVERSE PLAY
FORWARD
PRESET +
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
PHONES
PRESET +
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
PHONES
SURR
SUBTITLE LANG
ANGLE
FRAME
u n i v e r s a l
Press SKIP REVERSE to go back to the previous chapter or SKIP FORWARD to move to the next chapter.
MUTE
CH +
PRESET PRESET +
SURROUND
VOL
VOL
PHONE
CH
8 0
9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
REVERSE PLAY
FORWARD
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
u n i v e r s a l
19
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 2
DVD Player
Slow motion playback
1. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PAUSE in the remote control to freeze the picture during playback.
WHOINPUT ANTFMS
0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD
PRESET +
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
2. Advance picture in slow motion. Press FORWARD on the remote control for slow motion in forward direction and REVERSE (DVD only) in reverse direction. Press repeatedly to change speed to 1/16 times, 1/8 times, 1/4 times and 1/2 times.
7 8 0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD
Subtitles
Playmode
9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
Time indicator
3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PLAY on the remote control to resume normal playback.
7
REPEAT
General use
1. Press INFO on the remote control during playback to show on-screen banner.
VOL
VOL
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PRESET + RECORD STOP P AUSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
PHONES
SURR
CH
SUBTITLE LANG
ANGLE
FRAME
Progressive scan
1. Make sure the component output is connected to a TV which accept the progressive signal. To enable progressive scan, press and hold bass / treble for 3 seconds in STOP mode. 2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows on the remote control to move cursor on the banner. Selected feature icon will be highlighted.
CH
BASS/TREBLE RPT/PROG.
SOURCE
SURROUND PROGRESSIVE
MENU
CLEAR
2. The display will show Progressive scan ON/OFF request, press the key to toggle between ON and OFF and wait for 3 seconds to exit, the blue led will lit if the progressive scan function is active. Note: Progressive Scan function can only be selected in STOP mode.
MENU
CLEAR
20
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 3
DVD Player
Selecting a title
1. Refer to previous page General use to open the title menu. 2. Enter title number using the number keys on the remote control. Add 0 in front of single-digit title number (e.g. 9 = 09). You can also use UP/ DOWN key to change title number.
1
2. Press the UP/DOWN key to select the audio channel you want, then press OK to confirm.
CH CH
EN
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
NOTE
Some discs have one title only.
NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with multiple audio tracks.
1. Refer to previous page General use to open the subtitle menu, or press SUBTITLE button on the remote.
REVERSE PLAY
FORWARD
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
u n i v e r s a l
9
PROGRAM
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
2. Press the UP/DOWN key to select the audio channel you want, then press OK to confirm.
CH
NOTE
The chapter feature will not work if the disc is not formatted with separate chapters.
CH
MENU MENU
CLEAR
CLEAR
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
u n i v e r s a l
NOTE
This feature only works if the disc was created with subtitles.
21
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 4
DVD Player
Selecting camera angle
1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the camera angle menu, or press ANGLE button on the remote.
Using bookmarks
The bookmark feature allows you to mark a point on the disc that you can go to quickly. You can store up to 9 bookmarks.
Adding bookmarks
2. Press the UP/DOWN key to select the audio channel you want, then press OK to confirm.
CH CH
CLEAR
2. Use the arrows on the remote to move the cursor (yellow frame) to the Mark check line, then press OK to add bookmark when you reach the scene you want to do so.
CH CH
3
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
NOTE
MENU CLEAR MENU CLEAR
This feature only works if the disc was created with multiple angles.
3. To add another bookmark, move the cursor to the right with arrow button and then press OK when you reach another scene you want to do so. 4. Move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.
Recalling bookmarks
RECORD STOP PAUSE
SUBTITLEAUDIO ANGLE ZOOM
1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the bookmark menu. 2. Use the arrows on the remote to move cursor (yellow frame) to the Go To check line and to the bookmarked scene you want to recall.
u n i v e r s a l
2. There are wo zoom ratio available, press the zoom key to access the following zoom sequence. NORMAL > ZOOM 1 > ZOOM 2 > NORMAL
3. Press OK to recall bookmarked scene. 4. Move cursor by using the arrows to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.
Clearing bookmarks
The bookmarks are cleared each time a disc is removed from the player or when the power is turned off completely. If all 9 bookmarks are in use, you can still mark new scenes but the previous bookmarks will be erased starting from the earliest one.
22
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 5
DVD Player
Play mode
1. Refer to page 20 General use to open the playmode menu. 2. Press the up/down buttons to select among : Normal >Program edit/ Program play > Repeat AB > Repeat Disc > Repeat Title > Repeat Chapter > Normal 3. Press OK to confirm setting. 2. The box under Title will be highlighted automatically.
EN
CH CH
CLEAR
3. Add will be highlighted automatically after chapter is selected. Press OK to add selected track and chapter(s) onto playlist.
CH
CLEAR
NOTE
Random playback is not available in DVD mode.
MENU
CLEAR
4. Move to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return normal playback with program saved), then press OK to start program playback or return to stop mode.
CH
CLEAR
NOTE
You can select at maximum 32 items by repeating steps 2 - 3.
23
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 6
DVD Player
Delete program
1. Select the program menu from the OSD banner, or press and hold the RPT/PROG. button on the main unit to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the arrows on the remote to select and highlight the programmed item you want to delete on the playlist.
CH CH
3. Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrows to select Title or Chapter, then the UP and DOWN arrows to select the number.
CH CH
CLEAR
CLEAR
4. Use the LEFT and DOWN arrows to highlight Insert and then press OK.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
5. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to delete additional items. 5. Use the arrows to select and highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.
Cancel program
Program will be cancelled when; 1. disc tray is opened; 2. power is turned off; 3. STOP is pressed twice. The red PGM indicator will disappear on display and player will resume normal playback mode.
Insert chapter
1. Select the program menu from the OSD banner, or press and hold the RPT/PROG. button on the main unit to display program edit playlist.
2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select and highlight item on the playlist where you want to insert a chapter before it.
CH
MENU
CLEAR
24
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 7
DVD Player
Set up menu
General use
1. Press MENU in STOP mode to display the set up menu on screen. The menu shows current settings.
Audio language
This step will define the default audio language. Choosing an audio language from the on-screen banner display will only overwrite this setting temporarily.
EN
NOTE
if you press during disc playback, only the discs own menu will be displayed.
NOTE
If language selected is not available on disc, the language designated as default by each disc will be selected..
MENU
CLEAR
1 4
2 5
3 6
2. Use UP and DOWN arrows to select language and then press OK.
For languages other than options available: 2. Use arrow buttons to highlight options and press OK to open selected menu.
CH
3. Press DOWN to select Other and then press OK. 4. Enter language code into boxes and then select OK to return to main menu. Press OK on the remote.
MENU CLEAR GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
1 4
MENU CLEAR MENU CLEAR
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
MENU
CLEAR
1
FORWARD
2 5
3 6
REVERSE PLAY
3. Press LEFT arrow to go back to the previous menu or press GO BACK to exit the setup menu completely.
IDE GU
CH +
OK
VOL
VOL
FUNCTION
MENU
CLEAR
CH
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
25
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 8
DVD Player
Subtitle language
This step will define the default subtitle language. Choosing a subtitle language from the on-screen banner display will only overwrite this setting temporarily.
Menu language
This step will define the language of menus and other short messages shown on screen. 1. Open menu language menu.
NOTE
If language selected is not available on disc, the language designated by each disc as default will be selected.
2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll the selections and select the language and then press OK to return to main menu.
CH
MENU MENU
CLEAR
2. Press UP and DOWN arrow to select language and then press OK.
CH
CLEAR
1 1 2 3 4
2 5
3 6
CLEAR
1 4
2 5
3 6
CH
MENU
CLEAR
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
MENU FORWARD
CLEAR
REVERSE PLAY
26
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 9
DVD Player
Rating (Parental control)
This step will disable the playing of some DVDs (especially U.S. type) which are not suitable for some audience, e.g. children. Such kind of DVDs is encoded with a specific rating level. If the rating level of the disc is higher than the preset level (to be set in this step), the playing will be prohibited unless the password (see next step) is entered. 1. Open the rating menu.
EN
8 7 5 6R 4 PG-13 3 PG 2 1G
2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to highlight the rating that would require a password to play. Press OK to return to main menu. Ratings highlighted in blue require password.
CH
2. Select Set Password and press OK. 3. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK.
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
The rating systems is based on information encoded on the DVD disc being played, so movies may carry a rating symbol, the disc may or may not contain that rating in its software. In addition to the five standard (MPAA) rating symbols of G (level 2), PG (Parental Guidance, level 4), PG13 (Parental Guidance and 13 years old, level 4), R (Restricted, level 6) and NC17 (from 17 years old, level 7), the DVD will accommodate a total of 8 rating steps, as set by the DVD makers. These additional steps allows for more critical control of program playback for all audiences. Level 8: All DVDs can be played (Factory preset). Level 7 to 2: DVDs for general audiences/ children can be played. Level 1: DVDs for children can be played, DVDs for adults/ general audiences are prohibited.
Note:
27
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 10
DVD Player
NOTE
When incorrect password is entered, new password menu appears and you can enter and confirm password again. A lock icon shows on unit display when password is required to view rated discs. Important: keep the password in a safe place or remember it reliably as access to rated discs or rating/ password menus requires the correct password. 4. Use the number buttons to enter new password and then press OK. 5. Repeat the above step to confirm password and return to password menu. Use the LEFT arrow to return to the main menu.
Clear password
1. Refer to page 25 General use to open the password menu. 2. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK. 3. Move up or down the menu using the UP or DOWN arrows and select Clear Password. Press OK to clear password. Use the LEFT arrow to return to the main menu.
Change password
Current password must be entered first to change password. 1. Open the password menu.
2. Use the number buttons to enter password and then press OK.
MENU CLEAR GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
MENU
CLEAR
1
FORWARD
2 5
3 6
REVERSE PLAY
3. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to select Change Password and then press OK.
CH
CLEAR
28
RTD101-EN DVD
11/25/02
10:23 AM
Page 11
DVD Player
TV aspect
This step selects the TV aspect, wide-screen (16:9) or conventional (4:3). 1. Open the TV aspect menu.
Dynamic range
1. To disable/enable the dynamic function, enter the dynamic range menu.
EN
Soft Softer
2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select TV aspect and then press OK to return to main menu. If you have a wide-screen (16:9) TV, choose 16:9 Widescreen. - For 16:9 movie you will get (Do not select 16:9 widescreen setting if you are using a 4:3 TV set. or the image may look distorted with some DVD disc.) - For 4:3 movie you will get
2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select Dynamic Range and then press OK to return to main menu.
CH CH
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
If you have a conventional (4:3) TV, - if you select 4:3 letterbox for 16:9 movie, you will get
- if you select 4:3 Pan Scan for 16:9 movie, you will get (the left and right edges are hidden)
- for 4:3 movie, for both selections, you will get 2. Use the UP or DOWN arrows to select Dynamic Range and then press OK to return to main menu.
CH CH
Note: You may need to deactivate progressive scan when viewing a video program recorded in 4:3 aspect. Some 16:9 TV set will not be able to adjust to 4:3 when progressive scan is ON. If this happened, try to disable progressive scan.
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
29
RTD101-EN
CD_MP3
11/25/02
10:26 AM
Page 2
CD / MP3 Player
MP3 Recommendations
Use .mp3 as the extension when converting audio files into MP3 for saving onto CD-R(W) or CD-ROM, e.g. Rocky08.mp3. Do not use any other extension e.g. .doc, .pdf. Do not use the .mp3 extension for other text or non-audio data files as this may result in serious malfunction and harmful noise interference. Many common CD creator softwares can make files compatible for the system but do not forget to finalize your disc after creation. This set cannot read DirectCD recordings. In order to get audio CD quality, you need to record your MP3 CD at 128 kbps. You can record up to 256 kbps. Beyond 256 kbps, the unit might not read the CD. Do not combine CD Audio and MP3 tracks onto a CD-R(W) or CD-ROM. The player will only playback CD audio tracks from mixed CD formats.
T+
PHONES
The disc will be read to detect whether an audio CD or MP3 CD has been inserted.
NOTE
If the CD is a MP3 audio CD, reading may take up to 2 minutes.
NOTE
If over 400 items (songs/folders) are on the disc, only the first 400 songs can be played. Resume function does not operate in MP3 mode. 2. Playback begins automatically after the disc has been read. An audio CD CD or MP3 icon MP3 will show on the display. 3. Press PLAY/PAUSE on the main unit or PAUSE on the remote control to pause playback. Press PLAY/PAUSE again on the main unit or PLAY on the remote to resume normal playback. The CD/MP3 playback function works in a similar way as the features available for DVD . Press SOURCE on the main unit or DVD/CD source key on the remote to select DVD/CD input source.
PRESET +
0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
PHONES
u n i v e r s a l
BAND/APP SOURCE BASS/TREBLE RPT/PR
VCR
RANDOM SURROUND
ON OFF
TV
SATCABLE
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
LS LFE RS
LS LFE RS
30
RTD101-EN
CD_MP3
11/25/02
10:26 AM
Page 3
CD / MP3 Player
4. Press SKIP REVERSE on the main unit or CH- on the remote to return to the previous track. Press SKIP FORWARD on the main unit or CH + on the remote to go to the next track.
Quick scan
1. Press FORWARD or REVERSE on the remote to scan through a track quickly during playback. To change speed to 1, 2 or 3 times, press repeatedly during scan. Quick scan does not work on MP3 music.
7 8 0 9
ANTFMS
EN
MUTE
CH +
PRESET PRESET +
SURROUND
VOL
VOL
WHOINPUT
PHONES
CH
REVERSE PLAY
FORWARD
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
5. Press STOP on the main unit or STOP on the remote control to end playback.
0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD
C C
7
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
9
PROGRAM
0
SET PRESET +
RECORD STOP
PAUSE
PRESET +
PLAY
ANT-FMS FORWARD
RECORD
STOP
P AUSE
SURR
u n i v e r s a l
NOTE
When playback is interrupted, the location at which it stopped will be memorized. Playback will resume at the position it was last stopped. Resume playback does not work on MP3 music.
2. Press PLAY on the main unit or the remote to resume normal playback.
31
RTD101-EN
CD_MP3
11/25/02
10:26 AM
Page 4
CD / MP3 Player
On- screen banner display for CD playback
Track Bookmark Playmodes Disc type
Selecting a track
1. Refer to General use to open the track menu. 2. Enter track number. Add 0 in front of single-digit track number (e.g. 9 = 09).
MENU
CLEAR
1 4
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
ANTFMS
Time indicator
WHOINPUT
General use
1. Press INFO on the remote control to hide and show on- screen banner. (Only audio CD banner)
VOL
VOL
REVERSE PLAY
FORWARD
NOTE
You must be in playback mode for track selection.
CH
2. Use the LEFT / RIGHT arrow keys to move cursor on the banner. Selected feature icon will be highlighted.
CH
Program
MENU CLEAR
Program edit - can be activated in STOP mode only. Program play - can be activated during playback mode if there is saved program in the program list.
MENU
CLEAR
32
RTD101-EN
CD_MP3
11/25/02
10:26 AM
Page 5
CD / MP3 Player
Bookmarks (Audio CDs Only) Clearing bookmarks
The bookmarks are cleared each time a disc is removed from the player or when the power is turned off completely. If all 9 bookmarks are in use, you can still mark new points but the previous bookmarks will be erased. The bookmark feature allows you to select certain points on the disc where you want to jump to quickly. 9 bookmarks can be selected.
EN
2. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor (green frame) to the Mark check line, then press OK to add bookmark when you reach the point you want to do so.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK OK GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
1 4
2 5
3 6
3. To add another bookmark, move the cursor to the right and then press OK when you reach another point you want to do so. 4. Move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.
Recalling bookmarks
1. Refer to General use on page 32 to open the bookmark menu. 2. Use the UP arrow to move the cursor (green frame) to the Go To check line and use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow to the bookmarked point you want to recall. 3. Press OK to recall bookmarked point.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK OK
CH
MENU
CLEAR
3 1
MENU
CLEAR
4. Use the arrow buttons to move cursor to the door icon and then press OK to exit menu.
33
RTD101-EN
CD_MP3
11/25/02
10:26 AM
Page 6
CD / MP3 Player
Program playback Edit program
1. In STOP mode, press RPT/PROG. on the main unit or enter the OSD banner to display program edit playlist. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional tracks to the program. 5. Move to highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK to confirm program playback or return to the stop mode.
NOTE
You can select at maximum 32 items
Delete Program
1. In stop mode, press RPT/PROG on the main unit or enter the OSD banner to display program edit playlist. 2. The box under TRACK will be highlighted. Press UP or DOWN arrow buttons or number buttons to select track. Press OK.
CH
2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow to select Playlist, then use the UP or DOWN arrows to select and highlight the programmed track you want to delete on the playlist. 3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Delete and then press OK to delete track. 4. Highlight Play (to start program playback) or Done (to return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.
MENU
CLEAR
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
MENU
CLEAR
3
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
REVERSE PLAY
FORWARD
Insert track
1. In stop mode, press and hold RPT/PROG. on the main unit or enter the OSD banner to display program edit playlist. 2. Use the arrows to highlight item on the playlist where you want to insert a track before it.
MENU
CLEAR
3. Add will be highlighted automatically after track is selected. Press OK to add selected track onto playlist.
3. Refer to Edit program to select a track to be inserted. 4. Highlight Insert and then press OK 5. Highlight Play (start program playback) or Done (return to normal playback with program saved) and then press OK.
Cancel program
Program will be cancelled when; 1. disc tray is opened; 2. power is turned off; 3. STOP is pressed twice. The red PGM indicator will disappear on display and player will resume normal playback mode. Nevertheless, the program will remain in memory and can be recalled by pressing PROGRAM again.
34
RTD101-EN
CD_MP3
11/25/02
10:26 AM
Page 7
CD / MP3 Player
On- screen display for MP3 playback
Standard Play File mode
1. In the playmode window, press UP or DOWN arrow buttons on the remote to select the standard mode. CH 2. Use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons on the remote to toggle between different MP3 windows.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
PHONES TPRESET +
2. Press OK to enter the folder and PLAY when in stop mode or OK when currently playing to begin playback of all the files in the folder. Playback stops when all files have been played. 3. To exit a folder, use the arrow buttons to select the <..> then press OK.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
EN
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
3. In the file window, use the UP or DOWN arrow buttons on the remote to select the file you wish to begin playing.
2. Press PLAY on the main unit or OK on the remote control to start playback. If you are currently playing, then press OK button to select a different MP3 to play. All the files or folders will be played starting with the one you have selected.
GO BACK LEVEL P GUIDE A N E LU PD N INFO OK
TPRESET +
PHONES
MENU
CLEAR
2. When Play Mode window is hi-lighted and blinking, use the Up/Down arrow keys to toggle different playmodes, then press OK button to confirm.
CH CH
Folder mode
1. Use the arrow buttons on the remote to select the folder you wish to play.
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
35
RTD101-EN
CD_MP3
11/25/02
10:26 AM
Page 8
CD / MP3 Player
Playlist
1. In the playmode setting window, press UP or DOWN arrow button to select playlist mode. 4. Once all the files have been selected, move the cursor to the file in the playlist and press OK to begin playlist playback.
CH
CH
MENU
CLEAR
Delete All
H
2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows on the remote to select file on the left that you wish to add to the playlist.
MENU
CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
1. In stop mode, use the LEFT or RIGHT arrows to select DELETE ALL icon and press OK to clear all.
MENU CLEAR
MENU CLEAR
MENU
CLEAR
36
RTD101-EN Radio
11/25/02
10:28 AM
Page 1
Radio
Operating the Radio
The receiver has a built-in tuner that allows for AM/FM radio function. 5. Tune the stations by pressing FAST FORWARD or FAST REVERSE on the remote control repeatedly until the desired station is found. Alternatively, you can press and hold the respective buttons for about one second to activate the automatic SEARCH function. In this mode the receiver will automatically tune frequencies until it finds a station.
7 8 0
REVERSE PLAY FORWARD
EN
Manual tuning
1. Connect the FM and AM antenna accordingly (see "Connecting the Antenna" on page 5 section for details) 2. Press POWER on the main unit.
9
ANTFMS
WHOINPUT
RECORD STOP
BAND/A
PAUSE
RANDO
POWER
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3
LS LFE RS
3. Press SOURCE until tuner mode is selected or press AM/FM on the remote control.
BAND/APP
SOURCE
BASS/TREBLE
RANDOM
SURROUND
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
DVDCD TAPE AMFM
BAND/APP SOURCE BASS/TREBLE PLAY M
SATCABLE
MUTE
RPT/PGM SURROUND
SURROUND
CH +
4. To select band, press the BAND/APP on the main unit or AM/FM button on the remote again to toggle between AM/FM mode. When an FM station broadcast Stereo sound, ST is displayed.
VOL
VOL
CH
BAND/APP
SOURCE
VCR
RANDOM SURROUND
ON OFF
TV
NOTE
1. If there is interference, modify the location of the antenna until the optimal sound is heard. TV and other electronic devices could be the cause of interferences so try to position the antenna away from them. 2. Weak signal can affect the "auto Search function". Adjust the antenna for better reception for more efficient search.
POWER
SATCABLE
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
37
RTD101-EN Radio
11/25/02
10:28 AM
Page 2
Radio
Storing radio stations:
The receiver can store up to 40 radio stations in memory. You can enter every single radio station yourself or the receiver can store all available radio station automatically in an ascending order.
MENU
3. Press MENU on the remote control. "PROG" will appear on the display
OK
CLEAR
1 4
2 5
3 6
BAND/APP
SOURCE
LS LFE RS
VCR
RANDOM SURROUND
ON OFF
TV
SATCABLE
MUTE
CH +
SURROUND
4. While the word "PROG " is still flashing, input your desired preset number (1-40) using the numeric keys on the remote control to store the radio station.
MENU CLEAR
2
C
3
C
2- Press and hold BAND/APP for 3 seconds to start automatic preset programming. AUTO will be flashing during the automatic storing process.
4
BAND/APP SOURCE
C
5
C
6 9
PROGRAM
7
RANDOM SURROUND
REPEAT
8
RANDOM
0
POWER INPUT SEEK REVERSE PLAY ANT-FMS FORWARD
D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3 D I G I TA L DVD PRO.LOGIC VCD CD INTRORANDOM MP3
LS LFE RS
LS LFE RS
Radio frequencies will be browsed and radio stations stored automatically. When all available radio stations are stored or if all 40 memory locations are full, the auto preset will stop.
NOTE
Weak signal can affect the "Automatic Preset Storing function" efficiency. Adjust the antenna for the best reception for more efficient search. No APP function for AM mode.
VOL
VOL
PRESET -
PRESET +
PHONES
CH
Manual preset
1. Select the band by pressing AM/FM repeatedly 2. Tune to a radio station (see "Manual tuning" on page 37 above for details)
38
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 1
Troubleshooting Tips
Power
No power ?
Correctly connect the AC Power Cord to an AC Outlet.
EN
Remote control
The remote control does not work ?
Load the batteries with their polarities (+ and ) aligned correctly. Batteries are low. Replace with new ones. Point the remote control to the front of the player. Operate the remote control within an 26 ft range from the player. Remove any obstacles between the remote control and the red LED on the player.
The keys do not activate the functions they control (unit and / or remote control).
Set the STANDBY key to OFF (red light on) and back to ON again. Alternatively, turn off the power, disconnect the power plug and then re-connect it (The player may not be operating properly due to lightning, static electricity or some other external factors). If keys still do not activate the functions they control even when the above mentioned corrective actions are taken, contact your RCA retailer. During protection such as OCP, OVP, OTP,the unit may already go into the Latch mode, and the unit will need sometime to power on again. And the blue led will blink continously for indication, you have to restart the unit by press the POWER/ECO button on the main unit.
Playback
Playback does not start when the PLAY key is pressed ?
Make sure that the disc (single sided) is loaded correctly with the title label facing up. Make sure you are in the proper source mode.
No "Surround" sound ?
Check speaker configuration in the menu.
Disc cannot be played. Noise interference appears on the TV, while watching a TV program and the DVD player is left on ?
Turn off DVD player. The TV is too close to the audio system. Wipe the disc clean. Use a RCA lens cleaner. The disc's region No. differs from your player's region No.
Volume level differences playing different disc types (DVDs, audio / video CDs).
Adjust the master volume .
39
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 2
Troubleshooting Tips
Subtitle, language, camera angle etc.
Disc menu operation and contents may differ from disc to disc. Please refer to the instructions accompanying the disc.
Equipment Specifications:
AMPLIFIER SECTION:
Stereo mode: each 65W at 8 ohm. 10% THD @1 kHz Subwoofer channel: 125w at 4 Muting Attenuation: 65dB Frequency Response: 20Hz to 20kHz +/-1dB Signal to Noise Ratio: 65dB (Bypass mode)
VIDEO SECTION:
Input ( Sensitivity/ Impedance ):1Vp-p/ 75ohm Output (Level/ Impedance): 1Vp-p/ 75 ohm Frequency Response: 10Hz to 6MHz at +/- 3dB Signal to noise ratio: 40dB Crosstalk @3.58MHz: 40dB
AM TUNER SECTION:
Frequency Response: 80Hz 2kHz +/-6dB Usable Sensitivity: 5000uV/m @ S/N 20dB Signal to Noise: 30dB Image Ratio: 20dB @ 1000kHz IF Rejection: 35dB
FM TUNER SECTION:
Frequency Response: 40Hz 15kHz +/-3dB Quieting: 24dBu Signal to Noise: 60dB(stereo) / 65dB(mono) Image Ratio: 40dB IF Rejection: 50dB
Dimensions (H x W x D inch) :
Unit - 2.4 x 17 x 14 Speaker - 5.3 x 3.5 x 4.1 Subwoofer - 14.3 x 9.3 x 11.4
Audio (spoken) and / or subtitle language is not the one selected during the initial player set-up ?
If the audio or subtitle language is not available on the DVD disc, the language selected during initial player set-up will not be heard or seen. The disc's priority language (default language) is selected automatically. If you want another language, press menu during playback, if the disc has its own language selection menu (Refer to page 21).
Radio
STEREO indicator is off.
Adjust the antenna.
40
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 3
Safety precautions
Never open the cabinet under any circumstances. Any repairs or internal adjustments should be made only by a trained technician. Never operate this product with the cabinet removed. Do not touch the player with wet hands. If any liquid enters the player cabinet, take the player to a trained technician for inspection. This player uses a laser to read the data on the disc. The laser mechanism corresponds to the cartridge and stylus of a record player. Although this product incorporates a laser pick-up lens, it is completely safe when operated according to directions. Discs rotate at high speed inside the player. Do not use damaged, warped, or cracked discs. Do not touch the pick-up lens which is located inside the disc compartment. Also, to keep dust from collecting on the pick-up lens do not leave the compartment door open for an extended period of time. If the lens becomes dirty, clean it with a soft brush, or use an air blower brush designed for camera lenses. This apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping and splashing.
Cleaning
Clean the exterior of the system using a soft dust cloth.
EN
The player
CAUTION! This system operates with a laser. It must be opened by only a qualified technician. Never move the player during playback. Never put more than one discs on a tray or put a disc slipping out of the guide area.
Handling discs
Do not touch the signal surfaces. Hold discs by the edges, or by one edge and the hole. Do not affix labels or adhesive tapes to the label surfaces. Do not scratch or damage the label. Discs rotate at high speeds inside the player. Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) discs.
T
son Digita hom
V id e o D i s c
Cleaning discs
Dirty discs can cause poor sound and visual quality. Always keep discs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer perimeter. Never wipe the disc in a circular motion since circular scratches are likely to occur and could cause noise during playback. If a disc becomes dirty, wet a soft cloth in water, wring it out well, wipe the dirt away gently, and then remove any water drops with a dry cloth. Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic agents on discs. Also, never clean discs with benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents which may cause damage to disc surface
Headset safety
Do not play your headset at a high volume. Hearing experts warn against extended high-volume play. If you experience a ringing in your ears, reduce volume or discontinue use. You should use extreme caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. Even if your headset is an open-air type designed to let you hear outside sounds, dont turn up the volume so high that you are unable to hear what is around you.
Dont infringe
This product should only be used for the purposes for which it is sold, that is, entertainment, violating no copyright law. Any attempts to use this product for which it is not intended is unlawful and therefore not condoned by Thomson multimedia Inc.
The descriptions and characteristics given in this document are given as a general indication and not as a guarantee. In order to provide the highest quality product possible, we reserve the right to make any improvement or modification without prior notice. The English version serves as the final reference on all products and operational details should any discrepancies arise in other languages.
41
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 4
Remote Codes
CABLE CODES
ABC ANTRONIX ARCHER CABLETENNA CABLEVIEW CENTURY CITIZEN COLOUR VOICE COMTRONICS CONTEC EASTERN GARRARD GC ELECTRONICS GEMINI GENERAL INSTRUMENT HAMLIN HITACHI HYTEX JASCO JERROLD MAGNAVOX MEMOREX MOVIE TIME NSC OAK PANASONIC PARAGON PHILIPS PIONEER PULSAR RCA REALISTIC REGAL REGENCY REMBRANDT RUNCO SAMSUNG SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA SIGNAL SIGNATURE SL MARX SPRUCER STARCOM STARGATE STARQUEST TANDY TELEVIEW TOCOM TOSHIBA TUSA TV86 UNIKA UNITED ARTISTS UNITED CABLE UNIVERSAL VIDEOWAY VIEWSTAR ZENITH 5002, 5008, 5008, 5008 5008 5011 5011 5012, 5014, 5016 5017 5011 5009 5018, 5003 5020, 5003 5002 5011 5003, 5024, 5025 5026 5002, 5002, 5002, 5048, 5026 5011, 5030, 5033, 5026 5047, 5009, 5022, 5017 5003 5026 5014, 5006, 5014, 5003 5014 5052 5007, 5014, 5018 5040 5014 5004, 5026 5018 5027 5008, 5002 5053 5008, 5044 5015, 5026, 5003, 5004, 5005, 5006, 5009, 5053 5009 5009, 5010, 5011
VCR CODES
ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA AKAI 2113 AMERICAN HIGH ASHA AUDIO DYNAMICS AUDIOVOX BELL & HOWELL BEAUMARK BROKSONIC CALIX CANDLE CANON CAPEHART CARVER CCE CITIZEN COLORTYME COLT CRAIG CURTIS-MATHES CYBERNEX DAEWOO DAYTRON DBX DIMENSIA DYNATECH ELECTROHOME ELECTROPHONIC EMERSON 2131 2026 2027 2002, 2026 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008, 2111, 2112, 2021 2013 2009, 2014 2011 2013 2012, 2014 2013, 2018, 2021, 2020, 2062 2027, 2013, 2018, 2009 2061 2013, 2000, 2018, 2013 2015, 2027, 2110 2009, 2000 2002, 2014, 2014 2002, 2026, 2029, 2037, 2038, 2047, 2065, 2011, 2118 2021, 2002, 2026 2000, 2120 2009, 2026 2026 2009 2061 2011 2002, 2111, 2023 2021 2021 2009, 2021, 2059, 2055, 2009, 2111, 2009, 2058, 2061 2014, 2002, 2061 2014 2021, 2108, 2013 2009, 2021, 2014 2021 2021
5013 5015
2010
2025 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2019 2022, 2114 2110 2061 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2019, 2027
5027, 5028 5027, 5028 5016, 5029 5052 5012, 5013, 5019, 5025, 5031, 5032 5034 5049, 5052 5049 5035
2014, 2023, 2061 2002, 2009, 2013, 2016, 2021, 2022, 2024, 2115 2017, 2019, 2025, 2026, 2028, 2110 2010 2026 2029 2012, 2014, 2015, 2021, 2024, 2025, 2030, 2032, 2033, 2034, 2035, 2036, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042, 2044, 2045, 2105, 2113, 2116, 2117, 2130 2023, 2048, 2049, 2050, 2051, 2052, 2119 2026 2001, 2013, 2021, 2022, 2053, 2115, 2014, 2018, 2054, 2121
FISHER 5018, 5053 5018 FUJI FUNAI GARRARD GE GOLDSTAR GRADIENTE HARLEY DAVIDSON HARMAN KARDON HARWOOD HEADQUARTER HITACHI HI-Q INSTANT REPLAY JCI JC PENNEY
5023, 5041
5009, 5011
JENSEN JVC KENWOOD KLH KODAK LLOYD LOGIK LXI MAGNAVOX MAGNIN MARANTZ MARTA MASUSHITA MEI
2010, 2022, 2060, 2056, 2010, 2123 2010, 2111, 2021 2026
2022, 2062, 2063, 2104, 2124 2010, 2011, 2016, 2018, 2058, 2062, 2064
42
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 5
Remote Codes
MEMOREX MGA MGN TECHNOLOGY MIDLAND MINOLTA MITSUBISHI 2002, 2104, 2029, 2013 2053 2055, 2029, 2070, 2123 2075, 2021, 2002, 2002, 2009, 2076, 2014 2013 2021 2014, 2096 2035 2021, 2016, 2018 2021, 2021, 2014 2010, 2016, 2000, 2061 2104 2011 2011 2021, 2000, 2082, 2089, 2002, 2026, 2014 2014 2128 2104 2005, 2104, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2093, 2011, 2051, 2002, 2004, 2013 2002, 2021, 2002, 2021, 2002, 2124 2002, 2002, 2014 2058, 2002, 2021, 2002, 2013, 2015, 2013, 2013 2009, 2010 2009, 2013 2002, 2029, 2103, 2021, 2009, 2004, 2011, 2013, 2014, 2021, 2023, 2026, 2131 2065, 2113
TV CODES
ABEX ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AKAI ALLERON AMTRON ANAM NATIONAL AOC AUDIOVOX BELCOR BELL & HOWELL BRADFORD BROKWOOD CANDLE CAPEHART CELEBRITY CENTURION CITIZEN CLAIRTONE COLORTYME CONCERTO CONTEC/CONY CRAIG CROWN CURTIS MATHES CXC DAEWOO DAYTRON DIMENSIA DUMONT DYNATECH ELECTROBAND ELECTROHOME EMERSON 1172 1001, 1174 1016 1002 1046 1038 1003, 1004, 1038 1004 1001, 1038 1004 1004, 1175 1002 1009 1004, 1174, 1176 1004, 1004, 1012, 1038 1038, 1000, 1038 1004, 1171 1004, 1000 1004, 1178 1002, 1003, 1004, 1025, 1031, 1038, 1047, 1179, 1004, 1048, 1046 1038, 1038 1000, 1055, 1181 1004, 1004, 1058, 1038, 1004, 1038 1004, 1135, 1142, 1179 1038 1062 1174 1062 1002 1000, 1054, 1128, 1004, 1012, 1089, 1173
EN
2056, 2107 2055, 2056, 2065, 2066, 2067, 2069, 2071, 2072, 2073, 2074, 2106, 2113, 2131 2131 2013, 2013, 2010, 2078,
MONTGOMERY WARD MOTOROLA MTC MULTITECH NEC NIKKO NOBLEX OLYMPUS OPTIMUS OPTONICA ORION PANASONIC PENTAX PENTEX RESEARCH PHILCO PHILIPS PILOT PIONEER PORTLAND PROSCAN PROTEC PULSAR QUARTER QUARTZ QUASAR RCA
2026 2016, 2026, 2053, 2061 2011, 2016, 2018, 2058, 2064, 2079, 2111, 2123
1083, 1162
2131
2022, 2109, 2125, 2126, 2127 2055, 2056, 2107, 2120 2022, 2062, 2063 2062, 2096, 2124 2055, 2080, 2081, 2123 2017, 2019, 2110 2001
1006, 1008, 1016, 1038, 1105, 1171, 1177 1006 1006 1013, 1014, 1038, 1176 1171 1004, 1006, 1015, 1105, 1162, 1171 1005,1006, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1127, 1006, 1171 1151 1176 1004, 1006, 1026, 1032, 1039, 1123, 1191 1006 1049, 1046 1003, 1004, 1006, 1022, 1052, 1054, 1087, 1164, 1165, 1166, 1167, 1168, 1151 1005, 1006, 1012, 1019, 1056, 1057, 1155, 1156, 1171, 1172 1046, 1171 1006 1006, 1012, 1013, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1136, 1137, 1138, 1139, 1140, 1141, 1143, 1144, 1145, 1146, 1148, 1150,
RADIOSHACK/REALISTIC RADIX RANDEX RICOH RUNCO SAMSUNG SANKY SANSUI SANYO SCOTT SEARS SHARP SHINTOM SHOGUN SIGNATURE SINGER SONY STS SYLVANIA SYMPHONIC TANDY TASHIKO TATUNG TEAC TECHNICS TEKNIKA TMK TOSHIBA TOTEVSION UNITECH VECTOR RESEARCH VICTOR VIDEO CONCEPTS VIDEOSONIC WARDS
2013, 2131 2092, 2013, 2015, 2116 2014, 2055, 2017, 2056,
2015, 2033, 2053, 2112 2111, 2123 2023 2025, 2032, 2035, 2038, 2065, 2021, 2056, 2029, 2061, 2023, 2048, 2049, 2050, 2107, 2118 2094, 2095, 2096, 2131 2098
2131 2061, 2128 2004, 2098, 2099, 2119, 2128 2107 2021, 2022, 2026, 2062, 2063, 2065, 2026 2011 2111 2026, 2109 2014, 2024, 2049, 2014
2058, 2085, 2111 2021, 2026, 2100, 2129 2047 2051, 2055, 2065, 2093, 2116
JENSEN JVC
2010, 2015, 2016 2010, 2015, 2016, 2113 2013, 2055, 2107, 2026, 2010, 2098, 2014, 2056, 2116, 2061 2011, 2104, 2015, 2021, 2023, 2026, 2061, 2096, 2101, 2102, 2131 2018, 2058, 2111 2119, 2128
1005, 1006, 1008, 1022, 1052, 1063, 1064, 1072, 1087, 1105, 1172, 1181 1054, 1060, 1065, 1066, 1067, 1158, 1159, 1182
43
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 6
Remote Codes
KAWASHO KAYPANI KENWOOD KLOSS NOVABEAM KTV LOEWE LOGIK LUXMAN LXI MAGNAVOX 1002, 1175 1004, 1068, 1038, 1062 1083 1004, 1000, 1162, 1004, 1074, 1131, 1083 1062 1004, 1006, 1176 1001, 1004, 1080, 1054, 1052 1004, 1080, 1083 1003, 1004, 1038, 1084 1006, 1003, 1006, 1016 1038 1185 1095, 1035, 1003, 1003, 1062, 1184 1003, 1069, 1089 1004, 1004, 1004, 1105 1054 1000, 1004, 1151 1004 1003, 1000, 1162, 1000, 1096, 1129, 1176 1151 1004, 1004, 1105, 1171 1191 1004, 1162, 1006 1004, 1000, 1049, 1110, 1004, 1113, 1004 1001, 1004, 1006 1006, 1019 1069, 1174, 1183 1070, 1171, 1176, 1177 SIMPSON SONIC SONY SOUNDESIGN SQUAREVIEW SSS STARLITE SUPRE-MACY SUPREME SYLVANIA 1008 1176 1002 1004, 1189 1004, 1038 1174 1002 1004, 1074, 1183, 1033, 1173 1003, 1054 1004, 1004, 1038, 1171 1117 1004, 1049, 1118, 1171 1052, 1066, 1004, 1174 1000, 1033, 1076, 1184 1004, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1038, 1046 1038
1049, 1062, 1071, 1072, 1073, 1008, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1069, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1089, 1130, 1133, 1134, 1183, 1184
MAJESTIC MARANTS MARANTZ MEGATRON MEI MEMOREX MGA MIDLAND MINUTZ MITSUBISHI MONTGOMERY WARD MOTOROLA MTC MULTITECH MULTIVISION NAD NEC NIKKO NTC ONWA OPTIMUS OPTONICA ORION PANASONIC PHILCO
1006, 1062, 1078 1059 1006, 1082, 1083, 1162 1005, 1006, 1019, 1022, 1051, 1079, 1082 1151, 1171, 1172, 1181 1005, 1006, 1019, 1022, 1051, 1079, 1081, 1082, 1082, 1083, 1125 1173 1005, 1006, 1105, 1176, 1178 1178 1071, 1072, 1185 1004, 1005, 1006, 1089 1016
1006, 1008, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1069, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1088, 1116, 1161, 1184 1038, 1189 1178 1006, 1054 1005, 1006, 1008, 1012, 1013, 1016, 1046, 1076, 1082, 1083, 1105, 1170,
1006 1071, 1072, 1089, 1105, 1109, 1117, 1160, 1162 1087 1182 1005, 1006 1001, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1019, 1024, 1046, 1052, 1062, 1069, 1074, 1075, 1083, 1087, 1088, 1095, 1119, 1120, 1005, 1006, 1019 1083, 1151, 1152, 1153, 1154
YAMAHA ZENITH 1173 1191 1054, 1062, 1170 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1012, 1019, 1068, 1069, 1074, 1075, 1077, 1183, 1004, 1008, 1012, 1019, 1062, 1068, 1074, 1075, 1076, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1171 1006, 1090, 1091, 1092, 1179, 1185 1005, 1006, 1016, 1171
Satellite Receivers
CHAPPARAL 5056, DRAKE 5058, GE SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, GENERAL INSTRUMENTS 5060, PANASONIC SATELLITE RECEIVER 5075 PRIMESTAR DBS 5076 PROSCAN SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, RCA SATELLITE RECEIVER 5000, REALISTIC 5063 SONY SATELLITE RECEIVER 5072 STS1 5064 STS2 5065 STS3 5066 STS4 5067 TOSHIBA 5068 TOSHIBA SATELLITE RECEIVER 5073 UNIDEN SATELLITE RECEIVER 5069 5057 5059 5001 5061, 5062
PHILIPS
PILOT PIONEER PORTLAND PRICE CLUB PRISM PROSCAN PROTON PULSAR PULSER QUASAR RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC RCA
5001 5001
1094 1012, 1038, 1049, 1095, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1019, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1103, 1187, 1188, 1190
RHAPSODY RUNCO SAMPO SAMSUNG SAMSUX SANSUI SANYO SCOTCH SCOTT SEARS
1006, 1171, 1172, 1175 1005, 1006, 1012, 1015, 1019, 1104, 1106, 1171, 1172
1048, 1049, 1050, 1080, 1107, 1108, 1169, 1180, 1189 1006, 1004, 1050, 1162, 1006, 1122, 1012, 1006, 1051, 1180, 1012, 1171, 1024, 1013, 1066, 1181, 1029, 1173 1035, 1019, 1071, 1189 1095, 1038, 1046 1046, 1048, 1072, 1109, 1111, 1112,
1083, 1115
44
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 7
Language Codes
For audio track and subtitle selection, see p.25,26. Abkhazian Afar Afrikaans Albanian Amehanie Arabic Armenian Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Basque Bengali, Bangla Bhutani Bihari Bislama Breton Bulgarian Burmese Byelorussian Cambodian Catalan Chinese Corsican Croatian Czech Danish Dutch English Esperanto Estonian Faeroese Fiji Finnish French Frisian Galiean Georgian German Greek Greenland Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hebrew Hindi Hungarian Icelandic Indonesian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiaic Irish Italian Japanese Javanese Kannada 6566 6566 6570 8381 6577 6582 7289 6583 6588 6590 6665 6985 6678 6890 6672 6673 6682 6671 7789 6669 7577 6765 9072 6779 7282 6783 6865 7876 6978 6979 6984 7079 7074 7073 7082 7089 7176 7565 6869 6976 7576 7178 7185 7265 7387 7273 7285 7383 7378 7365 7369 7375 7165 7384 7465 7487 7578 Kashmiri Kazakh Kanyarwanda Kirghiz Kirundi Korean Kurdish Laothian Latin Latvian, Leltish Lingala Lithuanian Macedonian Malagasy Malay Malayalam Maltese Maori Marathi Moldavian Mongolian Naru Nepali Norwegian Occitan Oriya Oroma (Atan) Punjabi Pashto, Pushao Persian Polish Portuguese Quechua Ahaero- Romance Romanian Russian Samoan Sangbo Sanskrit Sents Gaelic Serbian Servo-Croatian Sesotho Setswana Sindhi Singhalese Siswati Slovak Slovenian Somali Spanish Sudanese Swahili Swedish Tagalog Tajik Tamil 7583 7575 8287 7589 8278 7579 7585 7679 7665 7684 7678 7684 7775 7771 7783 7776 7784 7773 7782 7779 7778 7865 7869 7879 7967 7982 7977 8065 8083 7065 8075 8084 8185 8277 8279 8285 8377 8371 8365 7168 8382 8372 8384 8478 8368 8373 8383 8375 8376 8379 6983 8385 8387 8386 8476 8471 8465 Tatar Telugu Thai Tibetan Tigrinya Tonga Tsonga Turkish Turkmen Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapuk Welsh Wolaf Xhosa Yiddish Yoruba Zulu 8484 8469 8472 6679 8473 8479 8483 8482 8475 8487 8575 8582 8590 8673 8679 6789 8779 8872 7473 8979 9085
EN
45
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 8
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITED WARRANTY ARE GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF INDIANA. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.
Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.
46
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 9
Limitation of Warranty:
THE WARRANTY STATED ABOVE IS THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. NO VERBAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION GIVEN BY THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD., ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE A GUARANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. THOMSON MULTIMEDIA LTD. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE PROVINCIAL LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE APPLICABLE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.
EN
Product Registration:
Please complete and mail the Product Registration Card packed with your product. It will make it easier to contact you should it ever be necessary. The return of the card is not required for warranty coverage.
47
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 10
Limited Warrranty(Mexico)
Centro de Servicios Autorizados Express (servicio en 24 horas) Mxico, D.F. Monterrey. N.L. Guadalajara, Jal.
Digital Ser vice Av. 3 A No. 12, Local 2 Col. Santa Rosa Mxico , D.F. Tel 01 53889621 55877599 55878971 55673972 Audio Estreo Aguilar Servicio Especializado de Jalisco Gral. Zuazua 738 Nte . Enrique Daz de Leon No . 821 Col. Centro Col. Sagrada Familia Monterrey. N.L. Guadalajara, J al. Tel 01 (8) 3724989 Tel 01 (3) 1267431 3755440 1267430 3755884 8253229 82582
AGUASCALIENTES
Electrnica JIMSA Av. Adolfo Lpez Mateos No . 230 ote . Col. Centro Aguascalientes, Ags. C.P. Tel. (01-49) 15 51 81 / 78 07 57 Fax.(01-49) 15 81 00
Serv. Elec. Especializado Cuahutemoc No. 2A Col. Centro, C.P. 29200 San. Cristbal de las Casas, Chis. Tel/Fax.(01-967)8-1355 Fax.(01-967)8-1355
onica Rico Electr Iturbide y Manuel Acua Col. Centro. Cd. Acua, Coahuila. C.P. 26250 Tel. (877) 236 23 Vacom Av. Morelos 1016 ote . Col. Centro Torren, Coah. C.P. 27000 Tel. (01-17) 18 39 05, 22 15 51 Fax.(01-17) 18 11 98 Electr o Vision Allende No. 114 esq.Xicotencatl Zona Centro Piedras Negras, Coahuila. C.P. Tel. (878) 21875 Fax.(878) 21875 Multiser vicios del Nor te 5 de Mayo 295sur . Col. Centro Sabinas, Coahuila. C.P. 26700 Tel. (861) 264 31 Fax.(861) 264 31
DURANGO
Macroservicios. Calle Patoni No. 105 sur . Col. Centro Durango, Dgo. Tel. (01-18) 12 26 86 Fax.(01-18) 12 26 86
Ele Aplicada Ser v Digitales 4a. Av., Sur No. 51 BAJA CALIFORNIA NORTE Col. Centro, C.P. 30700 Electrnica General Internac Blvd. Insurgentes No. 16174, Loc. 2AC. Tapachula, Chis. Tel. (01-962)6-9998 Plaza de Abastos Los Almos Fax.(01-962)5-4578 Tijuana, BCN C.P. 22440 Tel. ( 01-66 ) 21 22 15 CHIHUAHUA Tel. / Fax: ( 01-66 ) 21 22 15 Zener Electrnica Trasvia y Retes No. 3503A Baja Electr onics Col. Sn. Felipe Hacienda de Corralejo No. 2099 Chihuahua, Chih. C.P. 31240 Col. Hidalgo Tels. ( 01-14 ) 14 01 16; 26 50 41 Mexicali, B .C.N. C.P. 21389 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-14 ) 26 50 41 Tel. (01-65) 619818, 619808 Fax.(01-65) 619808, 619818 vox Magna Tlaxcala 1161 Serv. Electrnico Ensenada Col. Hidalgo Calle 4ta No. 1050, Local B Cd. J uarez, Chihuahua.C.P. 32010 Col. Centro. Tel. (01-16)12 40 31 Ensenada, B.C.N. C.P. 22800 Fax: (01-16)12 40 31 Tel. (01-61) 740 0532 Fax.(01-61) 788356
ESTADO DE MEXICO
Electrnica Alcntara. Reforma No. 36 Col. Centro Chalco, Edo. de Mex.C.P. 56600 Tel. ( 01-597 ) 51 847 Fax: ( 01-597 ) 51 847 Ctro Serv. Electrnicos L. Portillo, esq. Blvd. Coacalco Col. Villa de las Flores Coacalco, Edo. de Mex.C.P. 55710 Tels. 879 3404; 874 6006 Fax: 898 2464 SHUREE Electrnica Av. De los Maestros No. 113A Col. Centro, C.P. 50060 Toluca, EDM. Tel. (01-72)14-9330, Fax.(01-72)13-3424 TV Servideo Oriente 9 No. 182 Col. Reforma Cd. Neza, Edo . De Mex.C.P. 57840 Tel. 5857 2547 Fax.5857 6399 Servicio Sony Visin Prensa No. 1253 Col. Prensa Nal. Ind. Vallejo. Tlanepantla, E.D.M. C.P. 54170 Tel. 587 75 99 Fax: 587 89 71 GUANAJUATO Tecnologa Electrnica Blvd. Adolfo Lpez Mateos No . 2834A Col. Haciendas El Rosario Len, Gto. C.P. 37130 Tel:(01 4) 773 6634 Fax.(01 4) 773 6634 Mar Electr onic's Brisas No. 999 Col. Las Reinas, C.P. 36660 Irapuato, Gto. Tel. (01-462)4-7140 Fax.(01-462)4-7 140 Tele Ser vicio Chucho. Blv Adolfo Lpez Mateos No 510 Pte Col. Centro, C.P. 38000 Celaya, Gto. Tel. (01-461) 2-4714, Fax.(01-461) 3-0591 Tele Radio Or tega. Av. 16 de Septiembre No . 1076 Col. Centro, C.P. 38600 Acambaro, Gto. Tel. (01-417)2-0780 Fax.(01-417)2-0780
COLIMA
Elec. Saturno de Colima Nigromante No. 138 Col. Centro Colima, Col. C.P. 28000 Tel. ( 01-331 ) 4 55 54, 4 50 00 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-331 ) 4 55 54 Lab.Elect. De la Mora Allende No. 110 Col. Centro Manzanillo , Col. C.P. 28200 Tel. ( 01-333 ) 2 30 04 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-333 )
Electr onica T ony Priv. De la calle 6ta oriente No. 7 Col. Centro Cd. Delicias, Chihuahua Tel. (01-14) 74 30 26 Fax.(01-14) 74 30 26
Taller Electrnico Tony 20 de Noviembre No. 1521 Col. Centro. Cd. Camargo, Chihuahua. C.P. Tel. (146) 234 67 Fax.(146) 234 67
DISTRITO FEDERAL
SIMEL Ro Churubusco No. 2215 Col. Agrcola Oriental Mxico , D.F. C.P. 08500 Tel. 756 0883 Fax: 756 0883
COAHUILA CAMPECHE
Videoservicio Av. Lpez Matees No . 24 Col. Barrio Sn. Roman, C.P. 24040 Campeche, Camp. Tel. (01-981) 6-3333 Fax.(01-981) 1-0664 Electrnica Pr of esional Blvrd. Francisco Coss No. 450-1 Col. Centro Saltillo, Coah C.P. 25000 Tels. ( 01-84 ) 10 03 00 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-84 ) 12 30 44 Audio y Video Electr onica Miguel Blanco 307-A Col Zona Centro. Monclova, Coahuila. C.P. 25700 Tel. (01-86) 33 94 06 Fax.(01-86) 33 94 06 o Visin Electr J uan Aldama No. 6 y Presid. Carranza Col. Centro Nueva Rosita, Coahuila. C.P. Tel. (86) 14 58 44 Fax.(86) 14 58 44
CHIAPAS
KC Vdeo 10a.Norte Oriente No. 153A Col. Centro Tuxtla Gutirrez, Chis . C.P. 29000 Tel. ( 01-961 ) 8 19 08; 8 36 43 Fax.( 01-961 ) 8 19 08
Novatron. Diag. San Antonio No. 1213 Col. Narvarte Mxico , D.F. C.P. 03020 Tel. 639 0812 Fax: 639 1184 Electrnica Rang el. San Felipe No. 157 Col. Pedregal de Santa Ursula Mxico D .F. C.P. 04800 Tel. 619 3213 Fax: 619 4565
RTD101-EN
last
11/25/02
10:30 AM
Page 11
NUEVO LEN
Audio Estereo Aguilar Gral. Zuazua 738 Nte . Col. Centro Monterrey, Nvo. Len. CP. 64000 Tels. ( 01-8 )372-4989 / 375-5440 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-8 ) 375-5884 Teleservicio Murillo Allende No. 595 Sur. Col. Centro Cd. Linares, Nvo Len. C.P. 67700 Tel. (01-821) 266 50 Fax. (01-821) 266 50
Reparaciones Electrnicas J .Jose Ros No . 178 ote. Col. Centro. Culiacan Sinaloa. C.P. 81200 Tel. (01-67) 16 81 32, 16 51 45 Fax.(01-67) 16 81 32, 16 51 45 Electrnica Morelos . Morelos No. 201 ote Col. Centro. Los Mochis, Sinaloa. C.P. 81200 Tel. (01-68) 12 05 88 Fax. (01-68) 12 05 88
Micronics Calle 10 No. 607. Col. Jardin 20 de No viembre Madero, Tamps. C.P. 89440 Tels. ( 01-12 ) 15 96 89 Fax: ( 01-12 ) 10 38 82 Laboratorio Electrnico Washington 3142 Col. Juarez (Centro) Nuevo Laredo, Tamps. C.P. 88000 Tel. (01-87) 14 95 92, 14 98 52 Fax. (01-87) 14 71 71 Electronica Emmanuel Obregon No. 205A Zona Centro Cd. Mante, Tamaulipas. C.P. 89800 Tel. (01-123) 290 81 Fax. (01-123) 290 81
HIDALGO
Tec.Electrnica Digital Blvd. Valle de San. Ja vier No. Col. Fracc. Valle de San. Ja vier Pachuca, Hgo. C.P. 42086 Tel. ( 01-771 ) 3 24 36 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-771 ) 3 24 36 Electrnica Especializada Independencia No. 102 Loc.C Col. Centro, C.P. 43600 Tulancingo, Hgo, Tel. (01-775)5-2654 3-9120 Fax. (01-775)5-2654 3-9120
NAYARIT
Electrnica Show San Luis No. 118 sur Col. Centro Tepic, Nay. C.P. 63000 Tel. ( 01-321 ) 4 58 00 Tel. / Fax: (01-321) 4 58 00
SONORA
Wong's Electrnicos Monteverde No. 267 esq. Balderr ama Col. Balderrama Hermosillo, Son. C.P. 83180 Tels. ( 01-62 ) 10 54 95; 10 05 86 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-62 ) 10 54 95 Dasetronik . Guerrero No. 308-A este. Col. Centro. Navojoa, Sonora. C.P. 85800 Tel. (01-642) 240 64, Fax. (01-642) 136 64 Audio video Electrnica Av. Zaragoza No . 516 pte. Col. Centro. Cd. Obregon, Sonora. C.P. 23000 Tel. (01-64) 14 38 28 Fax. (14 75 75) Electrnica Univer sal. Calle 29 A v. Alfonso Idberry No. 401 Col. Centro Cd. Guaymas, Sonora. C.P. 85400 Tel. (01-622) 29 411
VERACRUZ
Grupo Digital I. Zaragoza No. 212 Col. Centro Coatzacoalcos, Ver. C.P. 96400 Tel. ( 01-921 ) 2 02 29 Fax.( 01-921 ) 2 02 29 Serv Tcnicos Prof. Av. 13 No.400 Esq. Calle 4 Col. Bella Vista Crdoba, Ver. C.P. 94500 Tel. ( 01-271 ) 2 73 22 Fax. ( 01-271) 2 25 39 Electrnica Arizona Bustamante No. 46 Col. Centro J alapa, Ver. C.P. 91000 Tel. ( 01-28 ) 18 78 68 Fax. ( 01-28 ) 12 25 34 Com. y Electrnica Miguel Hidalgo No. 103 Col. Buena Vista Sur Minatitlan, Ver. C.P. 96730 Tel. ( 01-922 ) 3 15 65 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-922 ) 3 15 65 Electrnica Digital BORR Av. J urez No . 516 Col. 27 de Septiembre Poza Rica, Ver. C.P. 93320 Tel. ( 01-782 ) 3 69 49 Fax.( 01-782 ) 3 69 49 Electrnica DICA F. del Paso y Troncoso No. 908 Col. Centro Veracruz, Ver. C.P . 91700 Tels. ( 01-29 ) 31 20 33; 31 22 96 Tel. / Fax:( 01-29 ) 31 2 33 Seguridad Plus. Oriente 4 No. 187 Esq. Sur 5 Col. Centro, C.P. Orizaba, Ver. Tel. (01-272) 5-0235
JALISCO
Serv. Esp. De Jalisco Ignacio Ramirez No . 567 S.H. Sta. Teresita Guadalajara, J al. C.P. 44200 Tels. ( 01-3 ) 825-3229, 827-0721 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-3) 825-3229 Electrnica Integral Candelaria No. 202, Esq. Analco Col. Sta. Mara Puerto Vallarta, J al. C.P. 48348 Tels. ( 01-322 ) 4 37 36 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-322 ) 4 85 90 Setesa 5 de Febrero No. 2786 Col. Rancho Blanco Tlaquepaque, Jalisco. C.P. 44890 Tel. (01-3) 635-4404, 635-1875 Fax. (01-3) 635-4404, 635-1875
OAXACA
El Francistor Hsares No. 207 Col. Centro Oaxaca, Oax.C.P. 68000 Tel. ( 01-951 ) 6 47 37 Fax. ( 01-951 ) 472 97
PUEBLA
Serv. Express Electrnico Prol. Reforma No. 6908A Col. La Libertad Puebla, Pue. C.P. 72130 Tels. (01-22 ) 49 78 19; 37 02 82 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-22 ) 31 32 93
QUERETARO
Blauton Industrial Av. Universidad No. 44B Col. Pathe Quertaro, Qro. C.P. 76020 Tels. ( 01-42 ) 23 22 66; 23 49 34 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-42 ) 23 22 67
MICHOACAN
Alka Electrnica Garca de Len No. 271 Col. Chapultepec Sur. Morelia, Mich. C.P. 58260 Tels. ( 01-43 ) 14 55 21; 15 90 36 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-43 ) 15 94 25 Centro Electrnico Son y J usto Mendoza No . 12 Col. Centro Uruapan, Mich. C.P. 60000 Tels. ( 01-452 ) 4 37 78; 4 08 38 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-452 ) 4 59 09 Multiserv Prof.amora Z 5 de Mayo No. 699A Col. El Duero Zamora, Mich. C.P. 59690 Tel. ( 01-351 ) 5 54 16 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-351 ) 5 54 16
QUINTANA ROO
Electrnica Beta Av. Sun Yax Chen No . 43 Loc.4 Col. Centro Cancun, Q. Roo. C.P. 77508 Tel. ( 01-98 ) 84 54 12 Fax. ( 01-98 ) 87 38 13 Electr onicos y Mas Ignacio Zaragoza No . 204-A Col. Centro. C.P. 77000 Chetumal, Q. Roo Tel. (983) 26663, 24622, 21562 Fax. (983) 26014
Electr onica Castillo Noche Buena # 37 Col. El rastro Nogales, Sonora. C.P. 84000 Tel. (16) 314 6857 Fax.(16) 312 3087
TABASCO
Elec. Sigma de Tabasco Av. Gregorio Mndez No.2819 Col. Atasta Villahermosa, Tab. C.P. 86100 Tels. ( 01-93 ) 54 00 33; 54 20 30 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-93 ) 54 00 33
TAMAULIPAS
Electrnica Digital Independencia No. 112 esq. 11 Col. Centro Matamoros, Tamps. C.P. 88000 Tel. ( 01-88 ) 13 50 13 Tel. / Fax.( 01-88 ) 13 50 13 Centr o de Servicio Lugo Rosalinada Guerrero No. 285 Col. Prol. Longoriiia Reynosa, Tamps. C.P. 88699 Tel. ( 01- 89 ) 24 92 43 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-89 ) 24 92 43 Esp. Electrnicas Matamoros poniente 225 Col. Centro Cd. Victoria, Tamps. C.P. 87000 Tel. (01-131) 299 45 Fax. (01-131) 251 93
MORELOS
Electrnica Hertz Insurgentes No. 190 Col. Emiliano Zapata Cuautla, Mor. C.P. 62744 Tel. ( 01-735 ) 3 84 10 Fax. ( 01-735 ) 3 84 10 Electrnica Her tz Libertad No. 108 Col. La Carolina Cuernavaca, Mor. C.P. 62190 Tel. ( 01-73 ) 13 90 92 Fax. ( 01-73 ) 13 09 49
YUCATAN
Cinescopios Calle 70 No. 443, oc.7 por 49 Col. Centro Mrida, Yuc. C.P. 97000 Tels. ( 01-99 ) 28 54 8, 2 28 59 05 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-99 ) 28 59 05
SINALOA
Serv. Electrnico del Pacifico Mariano Escobedo No. 1022 Col. Centro Mazatln, Sin.C.P. 82000 Tel. ( 01-69 ) 82 01 55 Tel. / Fax: ( 01-69 ) 82 01 55
ZACATECAS
Electronica Mario. Morelos Poniente No. 1214 Col. Centro Zacatecas, Zac. C.P . Tel. (01-492) 275 61 Fax.(01-492) 27 5 61
POLIZA DE GARANTIA
.A de C.V. garantiza este producto Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico S en todas sus partes y mano de obra, contra cualquier defecto de fabricacin y funcionamiento, a partir de la fecha de entrega al cliente final. Bajo el siguiente trmino: Producto
Televisores c/cinescopio de 36,6 cm. (14 pulgadas) y menores Televisores c/cinescopio de 48,3 cm (19 pulgadas) y mayores. Televisin de Proyeccin Videocaseteras Videocmaras Equipos de Audio Reproductor de DVD Accesorios 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao 1 ao . 2 aos cinescopio as partes. 2 aos otr 2 aos. . 2 aos cinescopio 1 ao otras partes. 1 ao
EXPEDIDA A: __________________________________________________
DIRECCION: ___________________________________________________
Partes
Mano de Obra
__________________________________________________________________
NOMBRE: _____________________________________________________
DIRECCION: ___________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
CONDICIONES
actura de 1. Para ser efectiva esta garanta se requiere presentar esta pliza y/o f compra, junto con el producto en cualquiera de nuestros Centros de Servicios ido. xa), o en el lugar donde fu adquir Autorizados, (que se indican en la hoja ane ar y/o reponer las 2. Comercializadora Thomson de Mexico se compromete a repar ectuosos sin cargo al consumidor, o en caso de que a piezas y componentes def criterio de dicha empresa no sea posible la reparacin, cambiar por uno nuevo, . Los gastos de transportacin dentro de exactamente del mismo modelo o su similar anta, la red de servicios, que se deriven del cumplimiento de esta pliza de gar .A de C.V. a Thomson de Mxico S sern cubiertos por Comercializador odos los productos debern ser llevados a cualquier Centro de Servicio Autorizado, 3. T , los cuales excepto los televisores con pantalla de 63,5 cm (25 pulgadas) o mas sern reparados en el domicilio del cliente. 4. El tiempo de reparacin en ningn caso ser mayor a 30 das, contados a partir de la recepcin del producto en el Centro de Servicio Autorizado. 5. Para la adquisicin de partes y accesorios, contactar al 01-800-1117221 o acudir a ,. Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico NOTAS: ir a su distribuidor para En caso de extravo de la pliza, el consumidor debe recurr su reposicin, previa presentacin de la factura o nota de compra. Para su comodidad, solicite informes sobre la localizacin del Centro de Servicio , llamando al: Autorizado mas cercano a su domicilio
Page 12
10:30 AM
11/25/02
Si el producto ha sido alterado, modificado o sufrido daos por causas ajenas al fabricante u ocasionadas por el consumidor.
last
RTD101-EN
Comercializadora Thomson de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra 57 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11529 Mexico D.F. Telefono: (55)25 81 53 20 RFC: CTM-980723-KS5
No. Poliza:
RTD130 NOTES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY. READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETYRELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. DESIGN ALTERATION WARNING - Do not alter or add to the mechanical or electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturer's warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacings between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-ofplace or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed-circuit board. Check AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis' normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis' are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis' have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords which do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used. PICTURE TUBE IMPLOSION WARNING - The picture tube in this receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.
Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some "in-line" picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such "permanently attached" yokes from the picture tube. X-RADIATION AND HIGH VOLTAGE LIMITS - Because the picture tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued Xradiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an X-radiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturer's specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the Xradiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called "horizontal disable" or "hold-down" circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by closetolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action. ANTENNA LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CHECK - With the instrument AC plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the "on" position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the "off" position.
reading should be < 0.5mA
2-wire cord
earth ground
LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled, plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a non-polarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the "on" position and then in the "off" position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.
Page 1-2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY . READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETY-RELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some in-line picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such permanently attached yokes from the picture tube.
DES I GNAL T E RATI ONWARNI NG- Do not alter or add to the mechanical or
electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturers warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacing between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-of-place or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed circuit board. Check the AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords that do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used.
tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued X-radiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an Xradiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturers specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the X-radiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called horizontal disable or hold-down circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by close-tolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action.
plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the on position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the off position.
LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled,
receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.
plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a nonpolarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the on position and then in the off position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY . READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETY-RELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some in-line picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such permanently attached yokes from the picture tube.
DES I GNAL T E RATI ONWARNI NG- Do not alter or add to the mechanical or
electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturers warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacing between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-of-place or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed circuit board. Check the AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords that do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used.
tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued X-radiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an Xradiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturers specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the X-radiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called horizontal disable or hold-down circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by close-tolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action.
plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the on position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the off position.
LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled,
receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.
plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a nonpolarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the on position and then in the off position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY. READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETYRELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. DESIGN ALTERATION WARNING - Do not alter or add to the mechanical or electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturer's warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacings between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-ofplace or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed-circuit board. Check AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis' normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis' are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis' have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords which do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used. PICTURE TUBE IMPLOSION WARNING - The picture tube in this receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.
Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some "in-line" picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such "permanently attached" yokes from the picture tube. X-RADIATION AND HIGH VOLTAGE LIMITS - Because the picture tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued Xradiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an X-radiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturer's specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the Xradiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called "horizontal disable" or "hold-down" circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by closetolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action. ANTENNA LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CHECK - With the instrument AC plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the "on" position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the "off" position.
reading should be < 0.5mA
2-wire cord
earth ground
LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled, plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a non-polarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the "on" position and then in the "off" position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.
Page 1-2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT OPERATE THIS INSTRUMENT OR PERMIT IT TO BE OPERATED WITHOUT ALL PROTECTIVE DEVICES INSTALLED AND FUNCTIONING. SERVICERS WHO DEFEAT SAFETY FEATURES OR FAIL TO PERFORM SAFETY CHECKS MAY BE LIABLE FOR ANY RESULTING DAMAGE, AND MAY EXPOSE THEMSELVES AND OTHERS TO POSSIBLE INJURY. READ AND COMPLY WITH ALL CAUTION AND SAFETYRELATED NOTES ON OR INSIDE THE RECEIVER CABINET, AND THE RECEIVER CHASSIS, OR ON THE PICTURE TUBE. SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE USED WHEN SERVICING ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS. INADVERTENTLY OVERSTRESSING COMPONENTS MAY CAUSE THEM TO SHATTER, DISCHARGING SMALL PARTICLES. DESIGN ALTERATION WARNING - Do not alter or add to the mechanical or electrical design of this TV receiver. Design alterations and additions may alter the safety characteristics of this receiver and create a hazard to the user. Design alterations or additions may void the manufacturer's warranty and may make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom. BEFORE RETURNING AN INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER, always make a safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited to, the following items: FIRE AND SHOCK HAZARD 1. Never release a repaired unit unless all protective devices such as insulators, barriers, covers, strain reliefs and other protective hardware have been installed in accordance with the original design. 2. Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which an adult or a child might be able to insert their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited to: (a) spacings between picture tube and cabinet mask, (b) excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and (c) an improperly fitted or incorrectly secured back cover. 3. Observe original lead dress. Take care to restore leads to their original dress. Make sure that leads are not in contact with sharp edges or thermally hot parts. Always inspect in all areas for pinched, out-ofplace or frayed wiring. Do not change spacing between adjacent components, or between components and printed-circuit board. Check AC power cord for damage. 4. Be certain to remove loose solder balls and all other loose foreign particles. 5. Check components, parts and/or wiring for physical evidence of damage, overheating or deterioration, and replace if necessary. Determine the cause of damage and/or overheating and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential safety hazard. 6. Parts Replacement - Many TV electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics, some of which are often not evident from visual inspection, and the protection they give cannot necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified in this service data by a ( ) on schematics and in the parts list. Use of a substitute replacement that does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement part in the service data parts list may create shock, fire and/or other hazards. Always consult the appropriate current service literature for the latest information. 7. Some TV receiver chassis' normally have 85VAC (RMS) between chassis and earth ground, regardless of the AC plug polarity. Some TV receiver chassis' are electrically connected directly to one conductor of the AC power cord. Some TV receiver chassis' have a secondary ground system in addition to the main chassis ground. This secondary ground system is not isolated from the AC power line. The two ground systems are electrically separated by insulating material that must not be defeated or altered. Thus, when servicing any unit always use a separate isolation transformer for the chassis. Failure to use a separate isolation transformer may expose the servicer to possible shock hazard, and may cause damage to servicing instruments. 8. Many electronic products use a polarized AC line cord (one wide pin on the plug). Defeating this safety feature may create a potential hazard to the servicer and the user. Extension cords which do not incorporate the polarizing feature should never be used. PICTURE TUBE IMPLOSION WARNING - The picture tube in this receiver employs integral implosion protection. For continued implosion protection, replace the picture tube only with one of the same type number.
Do not remove, install, or otherwise handle the picture tube in any manner without first putting on shatterproof goggles equipped with side shields. People not so equipped must be kept safely away while picture tubes are handled. Keep the picture tube away from your body. Do not handle the picture tube by its neck. Some "in-line" picture tubes are equipped with a permanently attached deflection yoke; because of potential hazard, do not try to remove such "permanently attached" yokes from the picture tube. X-RADIATION AND HIGH VOLTAGE LIMITS - Because the picture tube is the primary source of X-radiation in solid-state TV receivers, it is specially constructed to prohibit X-radiation emissions. For continued Xradiation protection, a replacement picture tube must be the same type as the original. The picture shields, mounting hardware and lenses (projection TV) may also perform an X-radiation protection function, and they must be correctly in place. Anode connectors contain an X-radiation shield - use only the manufacturer's specified anode connectors. High voltage must be measured each time servicing that involves power supply, horizontal deflection or high voltage circuits is performed. Correct operation of the Xradiation circuits must also be confirmed each time these circuits are serviced (X-radiation circuits may also be called "horizontal disable" or "hold-down" circuits). Read and apply high voltage limits and, if the chassis is so equipped, the X-radiation protection circuit specifications. These limits and specifications are given on instrument labels and are included in this service data. High voltage is maintained within specified limits by closetolerance safety-related components (and adjustments) in the high voltage circuit. If high voltage exceeds specified limits, check each safety related component specified on the schematic and take corrective action. ANTENNA LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CHECK - With the instrument AC plug removed from the AC source, connect an electrical jumper across the two AC plug prongs. Place the instrument AC switch (if applicable) in the "on" position. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to the AC plug prongs and touch the other ohmmeter lead, in turn, to each (exposed) antenna input terminal screw and/or coaxial connector. If the measured resistance is less than 1.0 Megohm, or greater than 5.2 Megohm, an abnormality exists which must be corrected before the instrument is returned to the customer. Repeat this test with the AC switch in the "off" position.
reading should be < 0.5mA
2-wire cord
earth ground
LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK FOR 2-WIRE OR 3-WIRE GROUNDED CORD SETS - With the instrument completely reassembled, plug the AC line cord into the mains AC outlet at normal line voltage via a non-polarized adapter. DO NOT GROUND THE 3RD PRONG OF THE ADAPTER AND DO NOT USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER. Use a leakage current tester or metering system that complies with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1492 (Section 67). With the instrument AC switch first in the "on" position and then in the "off" position, measure from a known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle bracket, metal cabinet, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.). Any current measured must not exceed 0.5 milliampere. Reverse the adapter plug in the outlet and repeat the test. ANY MEASUREMENTS NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS SPECIFIED HEREIN INDICATE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT MUST BE ELIMINATED BEFORE RETURNING THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER OR BEFORE CONNECTING THE ANTENNA OR ACCESSORIES. If a leakage current tester is not available, connect a 1.5 Kohm, 10 Watt resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 F, 150V capacitor, between earth ground and each exposed metal part of the instrument (as shown above). Use an AC voltmeter with at least 5000 ohm/volt sensitivity to measure the potential across the resistor. The potential measured for any exposed metal surface must not exceed 0.75 volts.
Page 1-2
@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.
@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.
@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.
@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.
@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.
@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.
@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.
@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.
@NOTE: When ordering components that are listed more than once in the part list, always adhere to the serial number application guidelines given in the description column. If a serial number application is not given, always select the component with a value, rating , other specification or identification marking(s) that match those of the corresponding component in the instrument you are servicing.
6 CHANNELS VOLUME CONTROLLER
DESCRIPTION
The SM7346 is 6 channels electric volume controlled 3-wire serial data. The IC is suitable for use in DVD systems and AV.
SM7346
FEATURES
* 4 Output ports * Built-in microcomputer interface circuit controlled by 16-bit serial data. * Electric volume Volume level......0dB~-79dB, - dB(1dB/ step) * Tone control Bass/Treble, 0dB~+10dB(2dB/step)
APPLICATION
* DVD * Home Audio equipment * AV
PIN ASSIGNMENTS
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 AVDD SWin GNDS SRin SLin GNDC Cin GNDR Rin GNDL Lin BYPASSR BYPASSL LTRE LBASS3 LBASS2 LBASS1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 SDIP 42PIN
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
DVDD OUT4 CLK OUT3 DATA OUT2 LATCH OUT1 DGND AVDD AGND SWin SW out GNDS SRout SRin SLout SLin Cout GNDC Rout Cin Lout GNDR AVSS Rin CL1 GNDL CL2 Lin CR1 BYPASSR CR2 BYPASSL RTRE LTRE RBASS3 LBASS3 RBASS2 LBASS2 RBASS1 LBASS1 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 TSOP 44PIN
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
DVDD CLK DATA LATCH DGND AGND SW out SRout SLout Cout Rout Lout AVSS CL1 CL2 CR1 CR2 RTRE RBASS3 RBASS2 RBASS1 NC
Page 1
V.1.0
6 CHANNELS VOLUME CONTROLLER
DESCRIPTION
The SM7346 is 6 channels electric volume controlled 3-wire serial data. The IC is suitable for use in DVD systems and AV.
SM7346
FEATURES
* 4 Output ports * Built-in microcomputer interface circuit controlled by 16-bit serial data. * Electric volume Volume level......0dB~-79dB, - dB(1dB/ step) * Tone control Bass/Treble, 0dB~+10dB(2dB/step)
APPLICATION
* DVD * Home Audio equipment * AV
PIN ASSIGNMENTS
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 AVDD SWin GNDS SRin SLin GNDC Cin GNDR Rin GNDL Lin BYPASSR BYPASSL LTRE LBASS3 LBASS2 LBASS1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 SDIP 42PIN
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
DVDD OUT4 CLK OUT3 DATA OUT2 LATCH OUT1 DGND AVDD AGND SWin SW out GNDS SRout SRin SLout SLin Cout GNDC Rout Cin Lout GNDR AVSS Rin CL1 GNDL CL2 Lin CR1 BYPASSR CR2 BYPASSL RTRE LTRE RBASS3 LBASS3 RBASS2 LBASS2 RBASS1 LBASS1 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 TSOP 44PIN
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
DVDD CLK DATA LATCH DGND AGND SW out SRout SLout Cout Rout Lout AVSS CL1 CL2 CR1 CR2 RTRE RBASS3 RBASS2 RBASS1 NC
Page 1
V.1.0
THE SMPS (Switch Mode Power Supply) Schematic and replacement parts are not available. Order complete board assembly, stock number 257176.
Power Supply
CON5A WARNING SEE NOTE POWER SWITCH WARNING SEE NOTE FB507 2 XXX F501 TH501 1 4A 125V SCK-1R37 1R3 1/4W L501 1 4 L503 2 3 1 4 L506 2 AC2 3 330nF 275v C601 3 D511 C560 C525 47uF 50V 50V BYV27-200 T501 C524 R596 10R 1/2W 1N5822 D512 C598 R598 10R 1/2W 50V 220R 1W R591 R585 10K 1/2W Z508 7V5 1.3W -27V 13 50V 470pF C591 ~FIL+ 12 100R 1/4W R589 ~FIL11 STBY 50V 50V 1W P501 AGND 9 3.3VM 8 1000uF 25V 470R 1W C547 R555 3 5VZ 7 AGND 6 Q509 2sc3746 D513 MBR745 C529 AGND 7 13 14 0.27R 1/2W R546 10R 1/2W C530 R553 220 1/16W 1000UF 25V 2200uF 16V C531 R565 470R 1W 50V +9V 2 12VM 1 470pF C590 100uF 16V C561 P502 38V PWR_DN R581 47K 1/4W D514 1 3 AGND 2 100nF 50V C542 C528 TX13/7.9/6.4-3E25 1 4 XXX L505 1nF 50V 2 3 R506 1K 2W C546 10nF 50V 38V 12 GND_AMP 11 500mW 39V Z503 Q508 BC817 1/16W 1/16W R575 R513 10 R559 47K 47K 12VM 8 3.3VM AGND AGND 1 2 1 2 OP502 AGND OUT IC503 2 -IN OUT 7 VCC 10K 1/16W 1 2M2 1/16W 100pF 50V R529 8 R535 R601 1/4W 220R AGND +12V 5 4 3 EL817 AGND 4 R569 330 1/4W -12V 3 PWR_DN 2 10K 1/16W C536 1nF 50V R606 R605 1K 1/16W AGND TL431ACLP IC506 220K 1/16W 5K6 1/16W R568 R603 C3 50V 100nF C537 1 R 2 A R550 0.27R R551 0.27R 3W 3W 3W 0.27R R552 AGND 1 BC807 Q527 1 3k 1/4W R563 C506 3 +IN -IN 6 C563 50V 100uF C562 100nF 50V 4 GND +IN 5 27K 1/16W R548 +5VZ C540 470NF 63V 1/16W 15K R583 7K5 1/16W +3.3VZ 1/16W 1/2W 1/16W C555 1000uF 10V 2 N501 GND_D OP503 EL817A DRAIN FQP7N40 Q507 D510 1N4148 GATE SORC 1. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performance and WARNING SEE NOTE safety of this unit. 6K8 1/16W C522 68nF 16V R539 2. All ground use screw fix to chassis ground except AMPGND. NOTES: NOTES: 5K6 1/16W R576 COMPONENTS DESIGNATED BY THE SAFETY WARNING SEE NOTE R564 3 C516 50V 100NF MC33072D WARNING SEE NOTE (All the above parts in the block are safety parts) C554 9 8 7 R574 50V 150R 1/2W 470pF MBR-745 D522 D523 SBL10L25 C574 45V R579 3K9 1/16W 45V R592 R514 150R 1/2W 470R 1/2W R519 4K7 1 R C551 GND_D 1nF 50V 1000uF 470R 100K 2k2 390 470pF 50V C552 1000uF 10V 1/16W R515 R572 1/16W R571 R570 C553 10V 6 7 9 1/4W 33K 1/4W GND_AMP 10 BC817 Q525 2200uF 50V 2200uF 50V C535 C534 GND_AMP R558 GND_AMP R597 33K 1/16W 38V 13 14 68K 1/4W R557 100R 1/2W 1/16W 75K R567 R562 C527 10nF 50V C538 10nF 50V 5VZ 4 AGND 3 500mW 9V9 Z506 1nF 50V AGND 3.3VM 5 2 1 10 N503 2 T50-52B 162UH EE-42X20 +38V + 330nF 275V C501 GBU8J 4 1 1.5KZ200A 3W 100R 200V DB501 1 18 12 0.27R 1/2W +12VA 470pF 50V D520 1UF 100NF 1N5822 AGND 16 17 0.27R FIL+ 11 9 33R 1/2W 15 Q520 BC817 C505 10 FIL0.27R 1/2W C539 1nF 50V D503 1/2W 33R R577 100uF 16V C541 1/2W -12VA C599 470pF 50V R599 10R 1/2W 100NF C587 C586 C588 470pF 50V 1 TVR10221 220V 2 RV501 2 1 R501 470uf 1 R503 GND R500 3M3 1/2W C592 1N5F 1N5F CHASSIC_GND C593 WARNING SEE NOTE GND 100R 3R3 250V 250V R507 2K2 1/4W Z501 18V GZ18-2 82K 1/4W R508 3W R509 C504 Z502 82K 470uF 200V AC1 C502 POWER CORD 2 N504 D507 EGP30G 400V 3N3F 500V FB503 XXX 3 1 FQP13N50 12.5UH L507 2 D501 BAV21 C548 2200uF 25V AGND 12V FB509 R587 1/2W 12R R586 1/2W 12R 12V R511 1/4W DRAIN GATE 1/4W R518 820R 1/4W R590 1W 120K 0.22R 3W 2 1 4 SORC 470 -27_V R556 3M9 100pF 50V C526 R502 1K5 1/4W
T50-52B
FB508
BYV27-200 +12VA
1nF 50V
P505
Q521
BC807
IN4004
OP_2
1 2
EL817
4 3
R580 1/4W 1K
5VZ
1nF 50V
R593
R536 5K6 1/16W 1 50V 100nF C571 8 R524 22K 1/16W 7 TH502 TTC03-154 150K OP505 EL817
C597
1K 1/16W
4 COMP IC501 2 Vfb UC3843B R523 Isense OUT 10K 1/16W 3 6 220NF 50V C566 Vi Vref 3
1 2
820 1/16W
R532
R525
GND
IN4148 D524
47K 1/16W
Rt/Ct
GND
5 R522
R520
2K2
1/16W
Q503 BC817
Q504
C513
R527 C511 10nF 50V C510 3n3F 50V C509 560pF 50V
220R
Q506 KTC3203
1/16W
C514
Q502
BC807
IN4148
D525
OP501 EL817
35V C507 220NF 50V C517 47UF 10 6 ER-28 T502 4 1 2 3 Z507 500mW
BC817
BC817
Q505
GND
P6KE200 200V
Z505
470K 2W C523
R544
3N3F 500V
FB502 XXX EGP10G D508 R538 3R3 1/4W L504 1 2 15uH T50-52B D509 BAV21 R578 33R 1/2W 1
33R
500mA 125V 4
R611
1W
220K
FB504 XXX
N505
C570
47uF
D560
COMP IC502
Vref
Vfb UC3843B
Vi
Isense
OUT
GND
1nF
50V
GZ18-2
18V
10nF 50V
C518
47uF 35V
C520
GND
C521
R543
2R2 1/2W
GND
2K2 3 C A2
1/16W R521
THE SMPS (Switch Mode Power Supply) Schematic and replacement parts are not available. Order complete board assembly, stock number 257176.
RTD101
SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Subwoofer: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: THD: Input Sensitivity: Power Output: Subwoofer Power Out: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: DVD/CD CVBS Video Frequency Response: S-Video Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
Eccentricity CD: Eccentricity DVD:
120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 20-20,000 Hz 20-20,000 Hz +0/-0 db CD/DVD 20-100Hz +0/-0 db CD/DVD 0.5m Vrms @ 6 ohms 65 db 70 db 0.05 % 450 mV +/- 30 mV 32W @ 10% THD 38W @ 10% THD 30Hz 1000 +/- 100 mV 530-1710 +/- 5 kHz 600 uV/m 40 db 60 db 87.5 108 +/- 0.1 Mhz 46 dbf 60 db 28 dbf 40 IRE Multi burst 0.1 Mhz/4 Mhz +/- 2.5 db 0.1 to 3.8 Mhz +/- 2.5db 60 db
0.6mm 65um
RTD130
SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Subwoofer: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: THD: Input Sensitivity: Power Output: Subwoofer Power Out: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: DVD/CD CVBS Video Frequency Response: S-Video Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
Eccentricity CD: Eccentricity DVD:
120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 20-20,000 Hz 20-20,000 Hz +0/-0 db CD/DVD 20-100Hz +0/-0 db CD/DVD 0.5m Vrms @ 6 ohms 65 db 70 db 0.05 % 450 mV +/- 30 mV 32W @ 10% THD 38W @ 10% THD 30Hz 1000 +/- 100 mV 530-1710 +/- 5 kHz 600 uV/m 40 db 60 db 87.5 108 +/- 0.1 Mhz 46 dbf 60 db 28 dbf 40 IRE Multi burst 0.1 Mhz/4 Mhz +/- 2.5 db 0.1 to 3.8 Mhz +/- 2.5db 60 db
0.6mm 65um
RS2622
SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: Crosstalk: Maximum Input: Power Output: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: Frequency Response: Stereo Separation @ 1kHz: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: TAPE Frequency Response: S/N Ratio (Playback): Channel Separation @1 kHz: Wow & Flutter: CD Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
Eccentricity: Vertical deviation:
120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 60-20,000 Hz 60-16,000 Hz +0/-3dB 1m Vrms @ 6 ohms 70 db 65 db 65 db 2 Vrms 75W @ 10% THD 6 mW 530-1710 600 uV/m 40 db 1000 mV/m 87.5 107.9Mhz 26 dbf 100 10 KHz +/- 5 db 26 db 55 dbf 35 dbf 125 8 kHz +/-5 db 45 db 34 db 0.2% 60 20,000 Hz +0/-3 db 75 db
140 um 780 mm
Page 1-3
RS2620
SPECIFICATIONS (Subject to change without notice) Line Voltage: AMPLIFIER: Power Bandwidth: Frequency Response: Main Channels: Hum, at Min Volume (unweighted): Muting Attenuation: Signal to Noise: Weighted: Crosstalk: Maximum Input: Power Output: Headphone Output: AM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Usable Sensitivity @ 20dB S/N: S/N: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 1kHz: FM RADIO PERFORMANCE Tuning Range: Minimum Sensitivity: Frequency Response: Stereo Separation @ 1kHz: S/N Ratio stereo A-weighted: Auto Stop Sensitivity @ 99MHz: TAPE Frequency Response: S/N Ratio (Playback): Channel Separation @1 kHz: Wow & Flutter: CD Frequency Response: S/N Ratio:
Eccentricity: Vertical deviation:
120vAC +/- 10% @ 60Hz 60-20,000 Hz 60-16,000 Hz +0/-3dB 1m Vrms @ 6 ohms 70 db 65 db 65 db 2 Vrms 40W @ 10% THD 6 mW 530-1710 600 uV/m 40 db 1000 mV/m 87.5 107.9Mhz 26 dbf 100 10 KHz +/- 5 db 26 db 55 dbf 35 dbf 125 8 kHz +/-5 db 45 db 34 db 0.2% 60 20,000 Hz +0/-3 db 75 db
140 um 780 mm
Page 1-3
SPECIFICATIONS
Power source Load impedance Reference output 10% THD output Speaker Recording system Erase system : : : : : : : AC 120 V, 60 Hz 4 ohm 1V 5WX2 4 ohm X 2 AC Bias Magnet Erase
TAPE RECORDER
Characteristic Play Frequency Response 125 Hz-8 KHz S/N Ratio MTT-112B Track cross talk (W/Band Pass Filter) Tape speed (3 KHz/-10 dB) Wow & Flutter (3 KHz-JIS WTD) Channel separation (1 KHz/-10 dB) Unit dB dB dB % % dB Limit -5/5 42 50 -2/+3 0.35 26
CD
Test disc EQ Functions Display : : : : PHILIPS test disc 444A Flat Play/Pause, Stop. Skip (<</>>), Repeat Play LCD Multi-Display Beam laser Cross Interleaved Reed-Solomon Code 16-bit linear 2 Times Unit dB dB m m m dB dB Limit -4/+2 54 600 600 60 45
Digital signal processing Optical pick/up : Error correction : Digital filter : Sampling rate :
Item Frequency Response 100 Hz /16 KHz S/N Ratio Interruption in information layer Black dot Eccentric disc Dynamic range Channel separation (W/Band Pass Filter)
F1_1
P24
P23
P22
P20
NP1
P21
P19
P18
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
F1_2
P10
P11
2G
3G
4G
5G
6G
7G
8G
9G
P9
P8
P7
P6
P5
P4
1G
MW FM LW AM PM
DP01
POWER-ON DEFAULT VOLUME SET, 11-8,10-10,01-12,00-14 AM AUTO-SCAN THRESHOLD SET FM AUTO-SCAN THRESHOLD SET
MHz KHz
NOTES: 1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, B. All Capacitor values are in uF
1/16w
FOR EU VERSION---24/12 HOURS 1-24HR, 0--12 HR FOR EU VERSION---LW/MW 1--LW/MW, 0--AM FOR EU VERSION---AM 9K/10K 1--9K, 0--10K FOR RDS 1--RDS AVAILABLE, 0--RDS N/A
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
P3 P2 P1 NP2F2_1 F2_2
R413L R413R
1 2 3 NJ504
C707
47nF 50v
C708
47nF 50V
2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum 3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position 5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit. MOTOR
GND
AGND
R414R
GND
REC_A_B REC_SW
+10V FILFIL+
KTC3198GR Q702
R701
330 1/16W
L701 100uH
1N4148
D704
+5V
MOTOR_VCC
-30V
D701
6V2 1/2W
C701
47uF 10V
C702
100uF 10V
C704
100nF 50V
1N4148
D703 C705
100nF 50V
C706
220uF 10V
GND
P80/FIP13
RDS-CLK RDS-QUAL
ECO
1N4148 D705
P81/FIP14
FIP0
FIP2
FIP3
FIP4
FIP5
FIP6
FIP7
FIP8
FIP10
FIP9
FIP12
FIP1
FIP11
4.7K 1/16W
R721
1/16 47N
C750
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 P87/FIP20 80 VLOAD 79 P90/FIP21 78 P91/FIP22 77 P92/FIP23 76 P93/FIP24 75 P96/FIP27 72 P97/FIP28 71 P100/FIP29 70 P101/FIP30 69 P102/FIP31 68 P103/FIP32 67 P104/FIP33 66 P105/FIP34 65 P106/FIP35 64 P107/FIP36 63 P110/FIP37 62 P111/FIP38 61 P112/FIP39 60 P113/FIP40 59 P114/FIP41 58 P115/FIP42 57 P116/FIP43 56 P117/FIP44 55 P120/FIP45 54 P70 VDD1 P127/FIP52 P126/FIP51 P125/FIP50 P124/FIP49 P121/FIP46 53 P122/FIP47 52 P123/FIP48 51 P94/FIP25 74 P95/FIP26 73 R739
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VDD3 P37
RDS-DATA
68K 1/16W
MUTE
1N4148
D706
R784
1K
1/16W
R7874.7K
1/16W
P32/TO2 P31/TO1
D709
Y701
C712
33pF 50V
Y702 32768Hz
12 X1 13 IC(VPP)
R716
R788
1K
1K
1/16W
14 XT2 15 P04/XT1
16 VDD2 17 P27/SCK0
18 P26/SO0/SB1 19 P25/S10/SB0 20 P24/BUSY 21 P23/STB 22 P22/SCK1 23 P21/SO1 24 P20/SI1 25 AVSS 26 P17/ANI7 27 P16/ANI6 30 P13/ANI3 P12/ANI2 P11/ANI1 P10/ANI0 AVDD 28 P15/ANI5 29 P14/ANI4
uPD780205GF
IC701
PROTECTION
TAPE_MUTE
XSURR +10V +5V C725 33pF 50V
R708
10K 1/16W
R703
10k 1/16W
C726
33pF 50V
P03/INTP3/CI0
P00/INTP0/TI0
GND R734
10k 1/16W
10k 1/16W
10k 1/16W
P74
KTC3198GR
R707
10K
P73
P72
VSS
P71
1/2W
AVREF
6V2
12k 1/16W
KTC3198GR
Q704
1N4148
D721
C721A
1UF 50V
R738 1K 1/16W
P01/INTP1
Q703
P02/INTP2
D702
R709
1K 1/16W
B8
1K 1/16W
4.7k 1/16W
R706
R705
4k7 1/16W
1/16W
R700
22k 1/16W
R786
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
D716
IR701 GP1U287R
3 1 2
GND 10uF 10K
GND +5V
22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 47K 1/16W 10K 1/16W 10K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W 22K 1/16W
C753
50V 100nF
100R R7021/16
OUT
VCC
10K
R760
R762
R763
R764
R765
R766
R767
R768
R769
R770
R761
R771
To CDM5B
8
4K7 1/16W
R781
10K 1/16W
CD-REST
7
1K 1K
R712
R790
1/16W 1/16W
R791 2K 1/16W
7.5K 1/16W
2 1 SW705 BAND
2
R744
22K 1/16W
R741
47k 1/16W
EQ PRESET
R780
10K 1/16W
10K 1/16W
1/16W
CD-DATA
R746
2 1
SW707
CLOCK
AUTO PROG
SW701
2 1
R794
P706
CD-CLK
1K 1K 1K 1K
DRW-DIR-CW
3
R735
GND
R797 10K
R747
DRW-DIR-CCW
SW709
FORWARD
SW710
SW711
PLAY PAUSE
SW712
VOL_DOWN
2 1
DRAW-IN DRAW-OUT
DISC-SW PLATTER-SW
1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K
1K
R751
SW717
POWER /ECO
2 1
P705
CAR-DIR-CW CAR-DIR-CCW
100nF 50V
SW703
2 BASS/ BOOST
C793
1.2K 1/16W
SW714
2 VOL_UP
R759
82K 1/16W
R745
R793
SLIDER-UP
2
2 1
SLIDER-DN
To CDM5B
GND
PAGE 9-2
PAGE 9-2
TDA7296
70V - 60W DMOS AUDIO AMPLIFIER WITH MUTE/ST-BY
VERY HIGH OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE (35V) DMOS POWER STAGE HIGH OUTPUT POWER (UP TO 60W MUSIC POWER) MUTING/STAND-BY FUNCTIONS NO SWITCH ON/OFF NOISE NO BOUCHEROT CELLS VERY LOW DISTORTION VERY LOW NOISE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION THERMAL SHUTDOWN DESCRIPTION The TDA7296 is a monolithic integrated circuit in Multiwatt15 package, intended for use as audio class AB amplifier in Hi-Fi field applications (Home Stereo, self powered loudspeakers, Topclass TV). Thanks to the wide voltage range and Figure 1: Typical Application and Test Circuit MULTIPOWER BCD TECHNOLOGY
to the high out current capability it is able to supply the highest power into both 4 and 8 loads even in presence of poor supply regulation, with high Supply Voltage Rejection. The built in muting function with turn on delay simplifies the remote operation avoiding switching on-off noises.
C7 100nF R3 22K C2 22F +Vs R2 680 C1 470nF R1 22K IN+MUTE R5 10K MUTE STBY R4 22K C3 10F C4 10F 4 10 9 IN2 7 -
+Vs
C6 1000F
IN+
VM VSTBY
THERMAL SHUTDOWN
September 1997
1/13
TDA7296
PIN CONNECTION (Top view)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
TDA7296
70V - 60W DMOS AUDIO AMPLIFIER WITH MUTE/ST-BY
VERY HIGH OPERATING VOLTAGE RANGE (35V) DMOS POWER STAGE HIGH OUTPUT POWER (UP TO 60W MUSIC POWER) MUTING/STAND-BY FUNCTIONS NO SWITCH ON/OFF NOISE NO BOUCHEROT CELLS VERY LOW DISTORTION VERY LOW NOISE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION THERMAL SHUTDOWN DESCRIPTION The TDA7296 is a monolithic integrated circuit in Multiwatt15 package, intended for use as audio class AB amplifier in Hi-Fi field applications (Home Stereo, self powered loudspeakers, Topclass TV). Thanks to the wide voltage range and Figure 1: Typical Application and Test Circuit MULTIPOWER BCD TECHNOLOGY
to the high out current capability it is able to supply the highest power into both 4 and 8 loads even in presence of poor supply regulation, with high Supply Voltage Rejection. The built in muting function with turn on delay simplifies the remote operation avoiding switching on-off noises.
C7 100nF R3 22K C2 22F +Vs R2 680 C1 470nF R1 22K IN+MUTE R5 10K MUTE STBY R4 22K C3 10F C4 10F 4 10 9 IN2 7 -
+Vs
C6 1000F
IN+
VM VSTBY
THERMAL SHUTDOWN
September 1997
1/13
TDA7296
PIN CONNECTION (Top view)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
TDA7440D
TONE CONTROL DIGITALLY CONTROLLED AUDIO PROCESSOR
INPUT MULTIPLEXER - 4 STEREO INPUTS - SELECTABLE INPUT GAIN FOR OPTIMAL ADAPTATION TO DIFFERENT SOURCES ONE STEREO OUTPUT TREBLE AND BASS CONTROL IN 2.0dB STEPS VOLUME CONTROL IN 1.0dB STEPS TWO SPEAKER ATTENUATORS: - TWO INDEPENDENT SPEAKER CONTROL IN 1.0dB STEPS FOR BALANCE FACILITY - INDEPENDENT MUTE FUNCTION ALL FUNCTION ARE PROGRAMMABLE VIA SERIAL BUS DESCRIPTION The TDA7440D is a volume tone (bass and treble) balance (Left/Right) processor for quality audio applications in Hi-Fi systems. BLOCK DIAGRAM
MUXOUTL L-IN1 4 100K 5 L-IN2 100K 6 100K 7 100K 0/30dB 2dB STEP 100K 2 100K 1 G VOLUME 8 INL 9
Selectable input gain is provided. Control of all the functions is accomplished by serial bus. The AC signal setting is obtained by resistor networks and switches combined with operational amplifiers. Thanks to the used BIPOLAR/CMOS Technology, Low Distortion, Low Noise and DC stepping are obtained
TREBLE(L) 18
BIN(L) 14 RB
BOUT(L) 15
L-IN3
TREBLE
BASS
27
LOUT
L-IN4
R-IN1
22 20
R-IN2
VOLUME
TREBLE
BASS
26
ROUT
R-IN3
100K 28 R-IN4 100K INPUT MULTIPLEXER + GAIN 10 MUXOUTR INR 11 19 TREBLE(R) 12 BIN(R) SUPPLY RB 13 BOUT(R) 23 CREF
D98AU883
24 25
VS AGND
April 1999
1/16
TDA7440D
PIN CONNECTION (Top view)
R_IN3 R_IN2 R_IN1 L_IN1 L_IN2 L_IN3 L_IN4 MUXOUTL IN(L) MUXOUT(R) IN(R) BIN(R) BOUT(R) BIN(L)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
D98AU884
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
R_IN4 LOUT ROUT AGND VS CREF SDA SCL DIG-GND TREBLE(R) TREBLE(L) N.C. N.C. BOUT(L)
THERMAL DATA
Symbol R th j-pin Parameter Thermal Resistance Junction-pins Value 85 Unit C/W
2/16
TDA7440D
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (refer to the test circuit Tamb = 25C, VS = 9V, RL= 10K, RG = 600, all controls flat (G = 0dB), unless otherwise specified)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Min. Typ. Max. Unit
SUPPLY
VS IS SVR Supply Voltage Supply Current Ripple Rejection 6 4 60 9 7 90 10.2 10 V mA dB K Vrms dB 1 31 2.5 dB dB dB K dB dB dB dB dB dB dB mV mV dB
INPUT STAGE
R IN V CL SIN Ginmin Ginman Gstep Input Resistance Clipping Level Input Separation Minimum Input Gain Maximum Input Gain Step Resolution THD = 0.3% The selected input is grounded through a 2.2 capacitor 70 2 80 -1 29 1.5 100 2.5 100 0 30 2 130
VOLUME CONTROL
Ri C RANGE AVMAX ASTEP EA ET VDC Amute Gb BSTEP RB Input Resistance Control Range Max. Attenuation Step Resolution Attenuation Set Error Tracking Error DC Step Mute Attenuation AV = 0 to -24dB AV = -24 to -47dB AV = 0 to -24dB AV = -24 to -47dB adjacent attenuation steps from 0dB to AV max 80 20 45 45 0.5 -1.0 -1.5 33 47 47 1 0 0 0 0 0 0.5 100 50 49 49 1.5 1.0 1.5 1 2 3
SPEAKER ATTENUATORS
C RANGE SSTEP EA VDC Amute Control Range Step Resolution Attenuation Set Error DC Step Mute Attenuation 70 0.5 -1.5 -2 80 76 1 0 0 0 100 82 1.5 1.5 2 3 dB dB dB dB mV dB
NOTE1: 1) The device is functionally good at Vs = 5V. a step down, on Vs, to 4V doest reset the device. 2) BASS and TREBLE response: The center frequency and the response quality can be chosen by the external circuitry.
3/16
TDA7440D
TONE CONTROL DIGITALLY CONTROLLED AUDIO PROCESSOR
INPUT MULTIPLEXER - 4 STEREO INPUTS - SELECTABLE INPUT GAIN FOR OPTIMAL ADAPTATION TO DIFFERENT SOURCES ONE STEREO OUTPUT TREBLE AND BASS CONTROL IN 2.0dB STEPS VOLUME CONTROL IN 1.0dB STEPS TWO SPEAKER ATTENUATORS: - TWO INDEPENDENT SPEAKER CONTROL IN 1.0dB STEPS FOR BALANCE FACILITY - INDEPENDENT MUTE FUNCTION ALL FUNCTION ARE PROGRAMMABLE VIA SERIAL BUS DESCRIPTION The TDA7440D is a volume tone (bass and treble) balance (Left/Right) processor for quality audio applications in Hi-Fi systems. BLOCK DIAGRAM
MUXOUTL L-IN1 4 100K 5 L-IN2 100K 6 100K 7 100K 0/30dB 2dB STEP 100K 2 100K 1 G VOLUME 8 INL 9
Selectable input gain is provided. Control of all the functions is accomplished by serial bus. The AC signal setting is obtained by resistor networks and switches combined with operational amplifiers. Thanks to the used BIPOLAR/CMOS Technology, Low Distortion, Low Noise and DC stepping are obtained
TREBLE(L) 18
BIN(L) 14 RB
BOUT(L) 15
L-IN3
TREBLE
BASS
27
LOUT
L-IN4
R-IN1
22 20
R-IN2
VOLUME
TREBLE
BASS
26
ROUT
R-IN3
100K 28 R-IN4 100K INPUT MULTIPLEXER + GAIN 10 MUXOUTR INR 11 19 TREBLE(R) 12 BIN(R) SUPPLY RB 13 BOUT(R) 23 CREF
D98AU883
24 25
VS AGND
April 1999
1/16
TDA7440D
PIN CONNECTION (Top view)
R_IN3 R_IN2 R_IN1 L_IN1 L_IN2 L_IN3 L_IN4 MUXOUTL IN(L) MUXOUT(R) IN(R) BIN(R) BOUT(R) BIN(L)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
D98AU884
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
R_IN4 LOUT ROUT AGND VS CREF SDA SCL DIG-GND TREBLE(R) TREBLE(L) N.C. N.C. BOUT(L)
THERMAL DATA
Symbol R th j-pin Parameter Thermal Resistance Junction-pins Value 85 Unit C/W
2/16
TDA7440D
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (refer to the test circuit Tamb = 25C, VS = 9V, RL= 10K, RG = 600, all controls flat (G = 0dB), unless otherwise specified)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Min. Typ. Max. Unit
SUPPLY
VS IS SVR Supply Voltage Supply Current Ripple Rejection 6 4 60 9 7 90 10.2 10 V mA dB K Vrms dB 1 31 2.5 dB dB dB K dB dB dB dB dB dB dB mV mV dB
INPUT STAGE
R IN V CL SIN Ginmin Ginman Gstep Input Resistance Clipping Level Input Separation Minimum Input Gain Maximum Input Gain Step Resolution THD = 0.3% The selected input is grounded through a 2.2 capacitor 70 2 80 -1 29 1.5 100 2.5 100 0 30 2 130
VOLUME CONTROL
Ri C RANGE AVMAX ASTEP EA ET VDC Amute Gb BSTEP RB Input Resistance Control Range Max. Attenuation Step Resolution Attenuation Set Error Tracking Error DC Step Mute Attenuation AV = 0 to -24dB AV = -24 to -47dB AV = 0 to -24dB AV = -24 to -47dB adjacent attenuation steps from 0dB to AV max 80 20 45 45 0.5 -1.0 -1.5 33 47 47 1 0 0 0 0 0 0.5 100 50 49 49 1.5 1.0 1.5 1 2 3
SPEAKER ATTENUATORS
C RANGE SSTEP EA VDC Amute Control Range Step Resolution Attenuation Set Error DC Step Mute Attenuation 70 0.5 -1.5 -2 80 76 1 0 0 0 100 82 1.5 1.5 2 3 dB dB dB dB mV dB
NOTE1: 1) The device is functionally good at Vs = 5V. a step down, on Vs, to 4V doest reset the device. 2) BASS and TREBLE response: The center frequency and the response quality can be chosen by the external circuitry.
3/16
TROUBLESHOOTING
Circuit General Symptom No sound AM No sound, weak sound (Low sensitivity) FM No sound, weak sound (Low sensitivity) Tape No sound/recording, unsteady tape sound, weak sound Cause and Remedy Speakers are not connected: Check the speaker connection. Wrong function is selected: Set switch to the proper position. Defective volume control: Set the volume control to a proper sound level. Defective earphone jack: Replace the earphone jack. Mute function is active: Release it by remote control. Improper location of unit: Rotate or reposition the unit. Defect in T402: Check resistance, voltage, and current. Replace as needed. Defect AM antenna coil or oscilloscope coil: Replace if necessary. Intermediate Frequency tuning faulty: Readjust (see Alignment and Adjustment). RF tracking faulty: Readjust (see Alignment and Adjustment). Defective IC401 (LA1844): Check voltages. Replace if necessary. Poor contact in antenna circuit: Check resistance and resolder. FM antenna not connected: Connect the built-in or external antenna. Defective band selector switch: Replace or repair the switch. Defective IC401 (LA1844): Check voltages. Replace if necessary. Intermediate Frequency tuning faulty: Readjust (see Alignment and Adjustment). Poor contact in FM antenna circuit: Resolder or repair as required. Dirty capstan or head: Clean the capstan or head with alcohol. Irregular cassette tape winding: Replace tape. Defective IC302 (AN7312): Check voltages. Replace if necessary. Cassette erasure prevention tabs broken out: Replace tape or cover tab openings with adhesive tape.
13
Circuit CD
Cause and Remedy Disc is inserted upside down: Insert disc correctly. Disc is dirty: Wipe clean with a soft cloth. Disc is scratched: Use a new disc. Disc is seriously warped: Use a new disc. A non-standard disc has been inserted: Use only a brand name disc. Moisture has formed inside the CD deck: Wait about 20 to 30 minutes. Defect in the servo control board: Replace or repair as required. Defect in the CD pickup mechanism: Replace as required.
14
TUNER SCHEMATIC
NOTES: TTT TF005
TP011 JR02
0R 1/16W
FM-ANT.
JP005 TP001
50V 100R 1/16W
TP003
1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF
33pF
C004
50V 33p 33PF 50V
JR01
0R 1/16W
L001
C001
TP001G C007
180R 1/16W
TF007 TTT
IN OUT SFECV10.7MS3E
2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum
C041
C003 TP002
GND
TP004
FM-RF
RFGND
10V 4u7F
SFECV10.7MS3IN OUT E
4.5T
Y001
Y002
100nF 50V
3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position
L003 4.5T
N001
100nF 16V
C051
C049
33PF 16V
5p 50V
47K 1/16W
R007
100pF 50V
L004
G CV002 11pF
JP008
47K 1/16W
R009
1/16W
AFC-POS
AFC-NEG
AF-LO
VCC2 VDD
IFGND
PILFIL
MUTE
C020
470p 10V
R014
C019
C019A
470nF 10V
470nF 10V
R013
220K 1/16W
RV001
47K
1/16W
91K
MPXI LPF
1/16W
R012
AF-RO
C016
68K
FM-DEM
0.1uF 10V
470nF16V
AFO
INDICATOR
C015
VCO R011
XTAL MO-ST
TP005 TP006
X001
75.0KHZ
R035
1/16W
JP006
R008
47K
SVC201SPA
D002
15pF 50V
C012
10R 1/16W
R005
SUBGND
AGND
IC001
L007
47uH
TF001
TTT
47K 1/16W
R006
47pF 50V
C010
C008 C009
100uf 10V
RIPPLE
AM-RFI
TP009G
FM-RFO
AFC-AM P1
TF008 TTT
5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
AM-MIXER
FM-MIXER
AM-IF2I/O
FM-IF1O
AM-IF1I
FM-IF2I
FM-IF1I
VSTABB
VSTABA
AGC
FM-RFI
RFGND
R046470 R045
100nF 16V
TEA5757H
1/16W
12pF 50V
18K
470pF 50V
C047
C045
470pF 50V
C046
470pF 50V
C014 R015
2K2
selection TP012
TTT
10V
22p
C021
470nF
22nF
22nF
TTT
TF003
JP002
C022
10V
C023
1/16W
470nF 10V
C024
1uF 16V
2.2uf 16V
C027
C029
15pF 10V C028 100p 10V
470nF 10V
C030
C031
100nF 16V
C025 C026
1uf 16V
C032
1K0 1/16W
R030
1K
33uF 16V
C034
22R 1/16W
R034 C043
100nF 16V
J113
16V
1uf
C033
1/16W
R031
100nF 16V
C035
TP004G
TF006
TP007 TP008
VT
JP001
C039 C042
1uF 16V
TUNER_R TUNER_L
1uF 16V
PAGE 9-4
PAGE 9-4
TUNER SCHEMATIC
NOTES: TTT TF005
TP011 JR02
0R 1/16W
JP005
100R 1/16W
TP003
1. Unless otherwise specified: A. All resistor values are in ohms, 1/4W B. All Capacitor values are in uF
FM-ANT. P003 1
TP001
33pF
50V
C004
50V 33p 33PF 50V
JR01
0R 1/16W
L001
C001
TP001G C007
180R 1/16W
TF007 TTT
IN OUT SFECV10.7MS3E
2. Voltages are positive with respect to ground under no signal conditions and volume control minimum
C041
C003 TP002
GND
TP004
FM-RF
RFGND
10V 4u7F
SFECV10.7MS3IN OUT E
4.5T
Y001
Y002
100nF 50V
3. Replace transistors with type specified from replacement parts list 4. Unless otherwise stated, all voltages taken in radio "on" position
L003 4.5T
N001
100nF 16V
C051
C049
33PF 16V
5p 50V
47K 1/16W
R007
100pF 50V
L004
G CV002 11pF
JP008
47K 1/16W
R009
1/16W
AFC-POS
AFC-NEG
AF-LO
VCC2 VDD
IFGND
PILFIL
MUTE
C020
470p 10V
R014
C019
C019A
470nF 10V
470nF 10V
R013
220K 1/16W
RV001
47K
1/16W
91K
MPXI LPF
1/16W
R012
AF-RO
C016
68K
FM-DEM
0.1uF 10V
470nF16V
AFO
INDICATOR
C015
VCO R011
XTAL MO-ST
TP005 TP006
X001
75.0KHZ
R035
1/16W
JP006
R008
47K
SVC201SPA
D002
15pF 50V
C012
10R 1/16W
R005
SUBGND
AGND
IC001
L007
47uH
TF001
TTT
47K 1/16W
R006
47pF 50V
C010
C008 C009
100uf 10V
RIPPLE
AM-RFI
TP009G
FM-RFO
AFC-AM P1
TF008 TTT
5. * and indicates critical safety components. Replace only with those specified from replacement parts list to maintain proper performances and safety of this unit.
AM-MIXER
FM-MIXER
AM-IF2I/O
FM-IF1O
AM-IF1I
FM-IF2I
FM-IF1I
VSTABB
VSTABA
AGC
FM-RFI
RFGND
R046470 R045
100nF 16V
TEA5757H
1/16W
12pF 50V
18K
470pF 50V
C047
C045
470pF 50V
C046
470pF 50V
C014 R015
2K2
selection TP012
TTT
10V
22p
C021
470nF
22nF
22nF
TTT
TF003
JP002
C022
10V
C023
1/16W
470nF 10V
C024
1uF 16V
2.2uf 16V
C027
C029
15pF 10V C028 100p 10V
470nF 10V
C030
C031
100nF 16V
C025 C026
1uf 16V
C032
1K0 1/16W
R030
1K
33uF 16V
C034
22R 1/16W
R034 C043
100nF 16V
J113
16V
1uf
C033
1/16W
R031
100nF 16V
C035
TP004G
TF006
TP007 TP008
VT
JP001
C039 C042
1uF 16V
TUNER_R TUNER_L
1uF 16V
PAGE 9-4
PAGE 9-4
Family Code
These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.
1) PIN CONFIGURATION
Page No. 4 OF 7
Document ID:
Family Code
These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.
2) BLOCK DIAGRAM
Page No. 5 OF 7
Document ID:
Family Code
These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.
3) ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page No. 6 OF 7
Document ID:
Family Code
These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.
4) PACKAGE DIMENSIONS
Page No. 7 OF 7
Document ID:
Family Code
These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.
1) PIN CONFIGURATION
Page No. 4 OF 7
Document ID:
Family Code
These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.
2) BLOCK DIAGRAM
Page No. 5 OF 7
Document ID:
Family Code
These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.
3) ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page No. 6 OF 7
Document ID:
Family Code
These drawings and specifications are the property of Thomson Consumer Electronics and shall not be reproduced or copied, or used as the basis for the manufacture or sale of apparatus or devices without permission.
4) PACKAGE DIMENSIONS
Page No. 7 OF 7
Document ID:
This Section is currently not available. Look for new or revised information on CD Updates.
IC658 Pin 1 2 3
Fan Board Schematic Q701 E B C 0 0 25.8 E B C Q702 0 0.1 25.5 E B C Q703 25.8 25.5 0
DVD Schematic
CN201 Pin 1 4.12 2 5.12 3 5.23 4 0 CN203 5.35 Pin 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 CN202 Pin 1 1.56 2 0 CN204 Pin 1 0 2 0
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
NC11 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Video Schematic
IC550 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 2.24 5.23 2.95 0 2.97 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC554 1.32 0 1.31 0 1.31 5.21 1.53 0 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1.64 0 1.42 0 1.32 5.21 2.15 0 IC551 1.66 0 1.47 0 1.42 5.21 2.18 0 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC552 1.64 0 1.45 0 1.42 5.21 2.21 0
IC553 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Q601L E B C Q635FR E B C Q670 E B C Q681 E B C Q685 E B C Q689 E B C 0 0 3.4 E B C 4.42 4.26 0 E B C 5.1 5.38 0 E B C 0 0.12 0.1 E B C 0 0 0 E B C 0 0 0 E B C
Q601R 0 0 0 Q635SL 0 0.69 0 Q671 0 -0.57 -0.1 Q682 4.42 4.26 0 Q686 0 5.29 0 Q690 0 0 3.4 E B C E B C E B C E B C E B C
Q635C 0 0 0 Q635SR 0 0.69 0 Q672 25.6 25.1 0.12 Q683 2.02 4.13 0.7 Q687 0 5.29 0 E B C E B C E B C E B C E B C
Q635FL 0 0 0 Q635SW 0 0 0 Q673 25.6 25.1 25.1 Q684 4.42 4.26 0 Q688 0 5.29 0
DSP Schematic
IC1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1.02 0 1.05 1.2 1.37 1.42 0 3.29 3.22 1.14 0 0 3.23 5.36 IC3 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 0 IC5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2.13 0 1.04 0 2.13 0 0 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 2.13 0 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 2.38 2.11 2.11 2.11 0 Pin 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 2.14 0 1.04 1.07 1.71 1.04 1.08 1.13 0 0 1.41 2.19 0 4.58 2.13 2.13 0.73 1.64 0 1.67 1.66 0.85 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2.83 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IC6 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IC7 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 -15.5 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 -15.5 0 0 0 15 2.6 5.32 5.32 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.63 2.55 3.22 3.22 0 Pin 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 2.28 2.28 3.47 2.29 2.29 4.28 0 2.47 2.42 2.01 2.56 2.42 2.79 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.82 0 IC2 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 2.82 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22
IC4 Pin 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 2.57 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 3.22 0 2.6 2.63
IC8 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 -15.5 0 0 0 15 IC14 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1.57 3.32 0 0.06 0 4.99 0 0 4.02 1.25 0 0 0.1 0 IC19 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 0.88 4.4 0 4.41 0 0 0 0 0 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 0 0 0 2.59 0 2.68 4.4 0 4.4 Pin 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 1.5 1.62 0 0 0 1.45 0 3.23 0 0.02 0 0 0 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IC12 2.28 2.28 2.28 -15.5 2.28 2.28 2.28 15 IC18 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 5.38 2.64 0 0 0 2.64 5.38 0 0 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.1 2.65 1.69 0 0.1 0 5.38 2.65 0 2.65
IC VOLTAGE CHARTS
IC401 LA1844 2.29 V 4.74 V 2.29 V 2.27 V 0V 0V 4.72 V 4.73 V 4.73 V 0.04 V 3.6 V 3.68 V 3.04 V 3.02 V 2.22 V 2.28 V 2.03 V 2.96 V 0V 0.23 V 2.28 V 2.28 V 4.73 V 3.21 V IC403 TC4052BP 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.83 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 8.03 V IC402 BU2616F 2.24 V 0.51 V 0V 0V 4.95 V 0.05 V 0.05 V 0V 0.05 V 0V 3.31 V 0.03 V 0.01 V 2.10 V 4.83 V 1.12 V 0.14 V 0V IC302 AN7312 0V 0V 0V 3.66 V 1.38 V 1.29 V 0.03 V 0.03 V 1.29 V 1.38 V 3.63 V 0V 7.15 V 7.24 V IC404 PT2253A 0V 4.33 V 4.33 V 4.39 V 4.34 V 4.35 V 8.76 V 8.71 V 7.98 V 8.66 V 4.35 V 4.34 V 4.39 V 4.34 V 4.34 V 8.76 V U601 LA4270 1.2 V 0.7 V 11.6 V 0V 0.7 V 1.2 V 11.5 V 0V 23.6 V 11.5 V U1 PT2222 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 2.12 V 0V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.07 V 3.05 V 0V 0V
PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9 PIN 10 PIN 11 PIN 12 PIN 13 PIN 14 PIN 15 PIN 16 PIN 17 PIN 18 PIN 19 PIN 20 PIN 21 PIN 22 PIN 23 PIN 24
U600 L7812C 24 V 0V 12 V
52
PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9 PIN 10 PIN 11 PIN 12 PIN 13 PIN 14 PIN 15 PIN 16 PIN 17 PIN 18 PIN 19 PIN 20 PIN 21 PIN 22 PIN 23 PIN 24 PIN 25
4.88 V 4.88 V 4.87 V 0.39 V 4.91 V 0.05 V 4.67 V 4.91 V 4.91 V 4.91 V 4.91 V 0V 4.91 V 1.11 V 4.8 V 4.88 V 0V 4.91 V 0V 0V 0V 4.86 V 2.19 V 2.11 V 2.19 V
PIN 26 PIN 27 PIN 28 PIN 29 PIN 30 PIN 31 PIN 32 PIN 33 PIN 34 PIN 35 PIN 36 PIN 37 PIN 38 PIN 39 PIN 40 PIN 41 PIN 42 PIN 43 PIN 44 PIN 45 PIN 46 PIN 47 PIN 48 PIN 49 PIN 50
IC801 UPD780306 2.19 V PIN 51 4.91 V PIN 52 4.59 V PIN 53 2.88 V PIN 54 1.45 V PIN 55 0V PIN 56 2.23 V PIN 57 2.27 V PIN 58 2.25 V PIN 59 2.26 V PIN 60 2.26 V PIN 61 2.26 V PIN 62 2.25 V PIN 63 2.27 V PIN 64 2.18 V PIN 65 2.14 V PIN 66 2.21 V PIN 67 2.24 V PIN 68 2.21 V PIN 69 2.14 V PIN 70 2.14 V PIN 71 2.14 V PIN 72 2.14 V PIN 73 2.14 V PIN 74 2.2 V PIN 75
PIN 76 PIN 77 PIN 78 PIN 79 PIN 80 PIN 81 PIN 82 PIN 83 PIN 84 PIN 85 PIN 86 PIN 87 PIN 88 PIN 89 PIN 90 PIN 91 PIN 92 PIN 93 PIN 94 PIN 95 PIN 96 PIN 97 PIN 98 PIN 99 PIN 100
0.06 V 4.91 V 0V 2.62 V 1.58 V 4.9 V 0V 4.81 V 4.88 V 4.74 V 4.76 V 4.5 V 1.78 V 0V 4.84 V 0V 4.49 V 4.49 V 0.3 V 0V 0V 0.35 V 0.35 V 0V 4.88 V
53
TRANSISTOR
Ref. No. Q301 Q302 Q303 Q304 Q305 Q306 Q307 Q308 Q309 Q310 Q311 Q312 Q313 Q314 Q315 Q316 Q317 Q318 Q319 Q320 Q401 Q402 Q403 Q420 Q440 Q441 Q442 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 733 945 945 945 945 2999 945 945 733 945 PIN E 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 2.25 V 0V 0V 11 V 0V 0.03 V 0V 5V 9V 0V PIN B 0V 0V 0.65 V 0.65 V 0.7 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0.7 V 0.7 V 0.7 V 0.7 V 1.59 V 0V 0.65 V 11.4 V 0V 0.72 V 0V 5.6 V 8V 0V PIN C 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.5 V 0.03 V 0.03 V 0V 0V 0V 0.03 V 0.03 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 2.17 V 4.87 V 0V 12 V 0V 9V 11.4 V 9V 8.7 V 9V Ref. No. Q443 Q444 Q460 Q461 Q462 Q463 Q464 Q465 Q466 Q467 Q468 Q601 Q602 Q603 Q642 Q645 Q646 Q647 Q648 Q649 Q800 Q802 Q803 Q804 Q805 Q806 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 945 733 343 343 343 343 945 945 945 928 928 945 945 945 733 945 945 945 945 PIN E 0.62 V 0V 0.68 V 0.68 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.9 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 12 V 9V 0V 0V 0V 3.32 V 0V 0V 0V 0V PIN B 1.11 V 0.62 V 1.26 V 1.26 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 4.7 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0.7 V 0V 11 V 8V 0.7 V 0.7 V 0V 4.3 V 4.9 V 0V 0V 0V PIN C 2.51 V 2.51 V 2.95 V 2.95 V 0.03 V 0.03 V 8.6 V 7.9 V 8.6 V 0V 0V 0.03 V 0.03 V 12 V 0.03 V 8V 11.7 V 8.7 V 0V 0V 4.9 V 0V 4.7 V 3.3 V 0V 0V
54
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
AM 1 0 0.19 1.1 1.1 0.73 11.4 6.9 5.3 1.4 0 4.7 4.7 0 6.3
Pin 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
FM 0 1.4 0.74 1.4 0.69 1.4 0.5 1.2 0.99 1.2 1.2 0 0.78 0.22
AM 0 1.4 0 1.4 0.96 1.4 0.79 1.2 0.95 1.2 1.2 0 0.77 0.15
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
IC300 Rec Pin 1.9 13 1.9 14 0.7 15 3.4 16 2.7 17 2.8 18 0 19 3 20 2.9 21 0 22 4.4 23 0 24
Page 5-1
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
IC401 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 0 0 3.3 3.3 0 Pin 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 4.7 3.3 6.6 0 2.6 2.6 3.3
IC501 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 15.7 27.1 -27 IC502 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 15.7 27.1 -27 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 4 0 0 27.1 0 -27 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 4 0 0 27.1 0 -27
Page 5-2
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 2.2 1.9 0 2.2 1.7 4.7 5.1 4.7 0 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0
Pin 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0.02 4.7 4.5 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 0
0 4.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4.6 -4.6 -8.7 -6.7 -6.8 -8.2 -6.2 -9.1 -8.5 -12.8
Pin 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 8 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
-8.4 -12.7 0 -27.8 -8.7 -10.1 -7.9 -8.2 -9 -2.2 -0.2 -7.6 -27.8 -27.8 -27.8 -27.8 -25.6 -25.6 -25.6 -25.5 -25.5 -25.5 -25.2 -25.5 -25.5
E B C
Rec 0 -2.4 4.2 Q307 0 0 4.7 Q602R 0.12 1.4 0.8 Q401 7 7.7 11.3 Q603L 4.6 5.3 7 Q402 11.3 10.6 11.3 Q603R 4.6 5.3 7 Q403 0 0.69 0 Q702 5.4 6.1 11.4 Q501 0 0 4 Q703 0 0 4.7 Q704 0 0.7 0
E B C
E B C
Page 5-3
VOLTAGES
VOLTAGES
IC302 Play 6.5 0 0 0 0
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
IC001 (Tuner) FM 0.96 0 1 1.1 1.1 1.9 11.4 6.9 0.3 1.4 0 0 4.7 0 0
AM 1 0 0.19 1.1 1.1 0.73 11.4 6.9 5.3 1.4 0 4.7 4.7 0 6.3
Pin 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
FM 0 1.4 0.74 1.4 0.69 1.4 0.5 1.2 0.99 1.2 1.2 0 0.78 0.22
AM 0 1.4 0 1.4 0.96 1.4 0.79 1.2 0.95 1.2 1.2 0 0.77 0.15
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
IC401 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 0 0 3.3 3.3 0 Pin 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 4.7 3.3 6.6 0 2.6 2.6 3.3
IC501 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 15.7 27.1 -27 IC502 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 15.7 27.1 -27 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 4 0 0 27.1 0 -27 Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 4 0 0 27.1 0 -27
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
IC300 Rec 1.9 1.9 0.7 3.4 2.7 2.8 0 3 2.9 0 4.4 0
Pin 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Page 5-1
Page 5-2
VOLTAGES
WAVEFORMS
IC701 Pin 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 2.2 1.9 0 2.2 1.7 4.7 5.1 4.7 0 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0
Pin 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0.02 4.7 4.5 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 4.7 4.7 4.7 0 0
0 4.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4.6 -4.6 -8.7 -6.7 -6.8 -8.2 -6.2 -9.1 -8.5 -12.8
Pin 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 8 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
-8.4 -12.7 0 -27.8 -8.7 -10.1 -7.9 -8.2 -9 -2.2 -0.2 -7.6 -27.8 -27.8 -27.8 -27.8 -25.6 -25.6 -25.6 -25.5 -25.5 -25.5 -25.2 -25.5 -25.5
E B C
Rec 0 -2.4 4.2 Q307 0 0 4.7 Q602R 0.12 1.4 0.8 Q401 7 7.7 11.3 Q603L 4.6 5.3 7 Q402 11.3 10.6 11.3 Q603R 4.6 5.3 7 Q403 0 0.69 0 Q702 5.4 6.1 11.4 Q501 0 0 4 Q703 0 0 4.7 Q704 0 0.7 0
E B C
E B C
Page 5-3
Page 5-4
RTD130 Waveforms
Page 1-6
RS2620 WAVEFORMS
IC701 Pin 11
IC701 Pin 12
IC701 Pin 19
IC701 Pin 18
IC701 Pin 9
TP007
TP008
IC401 Pin 5
IC401 Pin 2
IC401 Pin 8
IC401 Pin 10
IC302 Pin 2
IC401 Pin 27
IC401 Pin 26
RS2622 WAVEFORMS
IC701 Pin 11
IC701 Pin 12
IC701 Pin 19
IC701 Pin 18
IC701 Pin 9
TP007
TP008
IC401 Pin 5
IC401 Pin 2
IC401 Pin 8
IC401 Pin 10
IC302 Pin 2
IC401 Pin 27
IC401 Pin 26
WIRING DIAGRAM
WIRING DIAGRAM